JP6646910B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an outer frame, a main body frame that is attached to the front side of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and holds a game board, and a door frame that is openably and closably mounted on the front side of the main body frame. It has. On the front of the door frame, for example, a decorative lamp is attached, or an opening covered with a transparent plate such as a glass plate is formed, and the game board held by the main body frame is visually recognized through the transparent plate You can do it.

  In this type of gaming machine, in order to pursue the originality of each gaming machine and to be easily noticed by a player, for example, an overhanging portion swelling forward is provided at an upper portion on the front surface of a door frame, It is known that a decorative panel part with a decorative design (including the model name, a logo associated with the model name, an original design related to the model, etc.) corresponding to the type of gaming machine is provided on the front of the overhang portion. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-102908 A

However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, if the game medium is spilled, there is a possibility that a game ball may be caught between the outer frame and the main body frame.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to reduce the possibility that a game ball is sandwiched between an outer frame and a main body frame.

[Solution 1]
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame and a main body frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, wherein a game is played using a game medium,
The outer frame is
A lower member that is provided at a lower portion and includes a curtain plate on which the main body frame is mounted in a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to an outer frame;
A hinge member provided on the left side of the outer frame and supporting the body frame so as to be openable and closable,
At least
A first standing wall portion that is provided horizontally at a position retracted rearward from a front end of the outer frame on a side where the hinge member is provided ;
A second standing wall portion which is provided on the upper side of the curtain plate at a position on the right side and the front side of the first standing wall portion to prevent foreign matter from entering from the front of the gaming machine;
A game ball discharge region formed before the first standing wall portion and behind the second standing wall portion and for discharging a game ball to a rear surface side of the curtain plate ;
Bei to give a,
The upper end of the first standing wall portion is higher than the upper end of the second standing wall portion ,
The lateral width of the game ball discharge area is formed smaller than the lateral width of the hinge member,
On the side of the game ball discharge area, a flat plate portion capable of receiving a game ball rolling from the front when the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame is provided,
The game ball is configured to be guided along the first standing wall portion from the flat plate portion to the game ball discharge region,
The first standing wall portion is separated by at least one game ball from a rear end of a lower end of the main frame when the main frame is closed so as not to hinder the closing of the main frame by the game balls received by the flat plate portion. exhibited form behind rises upward,
When the main body frame is closed, the entirety of the game ball discharge area is not blocked by the lower surface of the main body frame.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to reduce that a game ball is pinched between an outer frame and a main body frame .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a plan view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. . (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which removed the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member is attached to the main body side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. FIG. 2A is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 2B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened together with a door frame with respect to an outer frame in FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the main frame is opened with respect to the outer frame by providing a guide blade at a position of the lower hinge member on the outer frame side, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the outer frame in the embodiment of (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows a state with a main body frame closed, (c) shows the state which provided the guide blade of embodiment different from (a) and (b), and opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame. It is explanatory drawing, (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the outer frame in embodiment of (c). It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is a front perspective view of the staging operation units of dishes units, (b) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit from behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from above. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked at from below. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the attachment base unit of the effect operation unit and looked at from the top. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as viewed from below when disassembled. Is an exploded perspective view from above to decompose the touch units of staging operation unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit when disassembled and viewed from below. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit of the effect operation unit and looked at from above. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit when viewed from below. It is a top view of a plate unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the effect operation unit in BB cross section in FIG. FIG. 41 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the effect operation unit in the CC cross section in FIG. 40. (A) is a front view of a door lower-right direction unit dishes units, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right direction unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the door lower right direction unit, (b) is a perspective view of the door lower right direction unit from behind. It is DD sectional drawing in the door lower right effect unit of FIG. 43 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower right effect unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower right effect unit and looked from behind. Is an exploded front perspective view with exploded rotary body part unit of the door lower right direction unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotating body internal unit from the disassembly. (A) is a front view in a state where the lower right rotating body of the door of the lower right effect unit faces forward, and (b) is a front view in a state where the lower right rotating body of the door faces rearward. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit with the upper plate removing unit attached to the plate unit base, viewed from the front, and (b) of FIG. It is the perspective view seen. Is an exploded front perspective view with disassembled upper tray ball vent unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back plate removal unit from the disassembled view. (A) is a perspective view of the lower tray emptying unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower bowl emptying unit as seen from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from the disassembly before. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from back and disassembled. (A) is a front view of a payout apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the payout blade in a payout apparatus. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower full tank path unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit from behind and disassembled. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the taxiway opening / closing door of a form different from FIG. 76 thru | or FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is a perspective view of the game board from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view seen from the front which shows only a front component and a game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows only a front component and a game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit as viewed from the upper front, and (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit as viewed from the lower rear. (A) is a perspective view of the side unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the side unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the attacker unit of the front unit viewed from the upper front, (b) is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the upper rear, and (c) is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the lower rear. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role of the front unit from the front. Table unit of the center won game is a perspective view from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper movable rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper movable rendering unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable production unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable production unit and looked from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and disassembled the back upper decorative body unit of the back upper movable effect unit from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper decoration body unit of the back upper movable effect unit and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back upper sub decoration body in a back upper movable decoration body unit. It is a front view which shows the state of the internal mechanism when the back upper decoration body unit of a back upper movable effect unit is in a retracted position. It is a front view which shows the state of an internal mechanism when the back upper decorative body unit of a back upper movable effect unit is in a first appearance position. It is a front view which shows the state of an internal mechanism when the back upper decorative body unit of a back upper movable effect unit is in a second appearance position. (A) is a front view showing a part of the internal mechanism of the back upper movable effecting unit, (b) is a perspective view of a part of the internal mechanism different from (a), viewed from the front, and (c). FIG. 3B is a perspective view of FIG. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a part of an internal mechanism of a back upper movable production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the main member which comprises the internal mechanism in a retracted position, (b) is a state in which the 1st transmission member rotates from the state of (a), and transmits to a 1st transmitted member. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which transmission of rotation of the rotation of the first rotation is started. (C) shows a state in which the first transmitted member and the first transmitted member are further rotated from the state of FIG. 113 (b), and the back upper decorative body unit is lowered from the retracted position toward the first appearance position. It is an explanatory view, (d) is a state in which the 1st transmission member rotates further with the 1st transmission member from the state of (c), transmission of rotation to a 1st transmission member is complete | finished, and a back decoration body unit is in the 4th. It is an explanatory view showing the state where it reached one appearance position. (E) is a state in which the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism that has been rotated together with the first transmission member from the state of FIG. 114 (d) is further rotated to start transmitting the rotation to the second transmitted member. (F), the second transmitted member rotates together with the second transmitting member from the state of (e), and the back upper decorative unit descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position. It is an explanatory view showing a state where it is rotating while rotating. (G) shows a state in which the second transmitted member rotates together with the second transmitting member from the state of (f) of FIG. 115, and the back upper decorative body unit rotates while further descending toward the second appearance position. It is an explanatory view showing (h), the second transmitted member rotates further together with the second transmitted member from the state of (g), the transmission of the rotation to the second transmitted member ends, and the back upper decorative body unit is moved. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which reached | attained the 2nd appearance position by making a half turn while descending from the state of a 1st appearance position. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is an explanatory view showing the front lower back front decorative body and the rear lower front second decorative body of the rear lower front movable effect unit from the front in a normal retracted position, and (b) is a front lower back front decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the back lower front 1st decoration body and the back lower front second decoration body of a movable production unit from the front in the state of an appearance position. (A) is a perspective view of the back right movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back right movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is a front view of the back right movable rendering unit showing the first decoration surface of the back right rotating decorative body facing the front, and (b) opens the shutter of the back right rotating decorative body in (a). It is a front view of the back right movable production unit shown in the state in which it was shown, (c) is a front view of the back right movable production unit shown with the second decoration surface of the back right rotating decorative body facing the front, and (d) () Is a front view of the back right movable effect unit showing the third decoration surface of the back right rotary decoration body facing the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back left movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is a front view of the back left movable decorative unit showing the first decoration surface of the back left rotating decorative body facing the front, and (b) is a front view of the second decorative surface of the back left rotating decorative body. It is a front view of the back left movable effect production unit shown in the state of facing, (c) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing the third decoration surface of the back left rotating decorative body facing the front, d) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing a state in which the back left protruding decorative body of the back left rotating decorative body is in the appearance position in the state of (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG. 122 (a). FIG. 7A is a perspective view of the movable effect unit behind the back of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 7B is a perspective view of the movable effect unit behind the back of the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the raising / lowering unit of a movable production unit after a back, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering unit of a movable effecting unit after back, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the raising / lowering unit at the time of the back decoration lower rotation decoration unit being a lower end position from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the raising / lowering unit at the time of a back decoration rotary decoration unit being a raising end position from the front. (A) is a front view of a back lower movable effect unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back lower back rotating decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit, and (c) is a lower back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back rotation decoration body unit from the back under the back movable production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotary decoration body unit after back back and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary decoration body unit after back and looked down from behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in FIG. 129 (a). (A) is a front view showing a state in which the back-and-bottom rotating decoration body of the back-and-back bottom rotation decoration unit stops rotating, and (b) is a counterclockwise direction in which the back-and-back bottom rotating decoration body is viewed from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which is rotating, (c) is a front view which shows the state just before a back decoration is opened and it rotates just clockwise in front view, (d) is a back view. It is a front view showing the state where the back rotation ornament is rotating clockwise in the front view. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the drive mechanism which concerns on a lower back rear rotation drive motor in a back lower rotation decoration body unit, (b) is a differential mechanism which concerns on a rotation damper in a lower back rear decoration body unit. FIG. 9C is an explanatory view showing the configuration of (a), (c) shows a configuration of a coupling mechanism that couples a drive mechanism related to the lower back rear rotation drive motor and a differential mechanism related to the rotary damper in the lower back rear decoration body unit; FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the connection mechanism when the back decoration is closed and the rotation is stopped, and (b) is a case where the back decoration rotates in the counterclockwise direction. It is an explanatory view showing a state of a connection mechanism at the time of. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the coupling mechanism when the rotating decorative body is closed and rotation is stopped after the back, and (b) is a diagram in which the coupling ring of the drive mechanism rotates in the clockwise direction and the reverse. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism when a lower back rotary decoration is opening, (c) is the connection ring of a drive mechanism further rotating clockwise, and a back lower rotary decoration is completely completed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism at the time of opening, (d) of the connection mechanism at the time of the clockwise direction rotating with the connection mechanism of a drive mechanism with the back back decoration of an open state. It is explanatory drawing which shows a state. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corner movable production unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corner movable production unit of the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner 1st unit in a back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner 1st unit in a back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner second unit in the back four corner movable effect unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back four corner 2nd unit in the back four corner movable production unit, and was seen from behind. (A) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit in the state of the normal retreat position, and (b) is the back four corner first unit in the state where the back four corner first decorative body appears. It is a front view of a unit, (c) is a front view of the back four corners first unit in the state of the back four corners second decoration object in an appearance position. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism at the time of a back four corner first decoration body in an evacuation position in a back four corner first unit, and (b) is a back four corner first unit in a back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of a decoration body going from an evacuation position to an appearance position from a left side surface, and (c) is a drive mechanism when a back four corners first decoration body is in an appearance position in a back four corners first unit. It is an explanatory view showing the state from the left side. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the drive mechanism when the back four corner second decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit from the left side, and (b) is a back four corner second unit in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of a decoration body going to an appearance position from an evacuation position from the left side surface, (c) is a drive mechanism when the back four corners 2nd decoration body is an appearance position in a back four corners first unit. It is an explanatory view showing the state from the left side. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of the front movable decoration body of the front movable effect unit in the center role. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the back upper decorative body of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit at the first appearance position. The state in which the back upper decorative body of the back upper movable production unit in the back unit is in the second appearance position, and the lower back front first decorative body and the lower back front second decorative body of the back lower front movable effect unit are in the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows. A pair of shutters are opened with the first decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable rendering unit in the back unit facing forward, and the first decoration of the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable rendering unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the appearance position where the back left protruding decorative body appeared with the surface facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotary decorative body of the back right movable rendering unit and the back left rotary decorative body of the back left movable rendering unit in the back unit, with the respective second decorative surfaces facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decorative body of the back right movable rendering unit and the back left rotary decorative body of the back left movable rendering unit in the back unit with the respective third decorative surfaces facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state where the back decoration under the back of the back under movable unit in the back unit is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view at the rising end position. The back decoration of the back-side movable production unit in the back unit is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view at the rising end position, and the back four corner second decoration bodies of the back four-corner movable production unit are in the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board showing a state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back four corner first decorations of the back four corner movable production unit in the back unit in the appearance position. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt process periodically executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) It is a big hit determination table used for a lottery process for a big hit, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for a lottery process for a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design change processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16mS regular process performed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a timing chart of a battle effect. It is a timing chart of a battle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle effect. It is a front view of the game board which cut | disconnected the front structural member and the front unit at the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a right portion in the game area in FIG. 174, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line HH in (a) and showing only main parts. FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the upper winning award in FIG. 174. It is a figure showing an example of a reservation number display on a display panel of a central liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows an example of a hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of a central liquid crystal display device. 178 is a view illustrating an example as a continuation of the hold change effect in FIG. 178. FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example as a continuation of the hold change effect in FIG. 179. FIG. It is a time chart which shows typically the hold change effect of this example, the change of the display color of the target hold image, and the display color of the hold image whose target position is to be changed as the hold storage is exhausted. 168 is a flowchart illustrating each process executed by the peripheral control MPU in connection with the suspension storage as each process of the effect control process of step S602 in FIG. 168. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the number-of-holds designation command processing which a peripheral control MPU performs. This is a continuation of the flowchart in FIG. 183. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the suspension notice determination processing which a peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the suspension notice effect process which a peripheral control MPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the hold | maintenance image shift process which a peripheral control MPU performs. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating tables, storage areas, and processing operations necessary for the peripheral control MPU to execute each process related to the pending storage. It is an example of the figure which shows the flow of a reservation notice effect. It is a scenario pattern table which shows the pattern which the display color of a notice suspension image changes. It is a figure which shows the time chart in the case of an immediate movable pattern being selected in a participatory movable role production. It is a figure which shows the time chart at the time of a movable pattern being selected after 1 second in the participation type movable role production. It is a figure which shows the time chart at the time of a movable pattern being selected after 2 seconds in the participatory movable role production. It is a figure which shows the pattern of the timing which a back upper movable production unit moves. It is a figure showing a flow of an effect in which a movable pattern notice is performed when a movable character effect is selected one second later in a participatory movable character effect. It is a figure showing a time chart in a case where an effect game was successful. It is a figure showing a time chart when an effect game fails. It is a figure which shows the pattern of the timing which a back upper movable effect unit moves for every number of rounds when a jackpot is drawn by lot. It is a figure showing a time chart when an immediate change pattern is selected in a suspension notice production. It is a figure which shows the time chart at the time of a change pattern after 1 second is selected in a hold notice effect. It is a figure showing a time chart at the time of a change pattern after two seconds is chosen in a hold announcement effect. It is a change timing table which shows a change timing pattern of a notice suspension image in a suspension notice effect. It is a figure which shows a series of flows of a hold notice effect which compared the case where a change effect was selected after 1 second and the case where an immediate change effect was selected. It is a change timing table which shows the change timing pattern of the notice suspension image for every number of rounds when a jackpot is selected by lot. It is a figure showing an example of a series of flows in a notice change production. It is a figure which shows the sketch of the field which the main character 1500a walks in a loop image. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a loop image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. 207 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the loop image in FIG. 207. FIG. It is a figure showing the production table which stores the production pattern used for real-time production. It is a figure which shows the period which can perform an object action for every scene with a graph. It is a flowchart in which, when it is determined by the peripheral control MPU that a real-time effect is to be performed, which effect pattern is to be selected in a stepwise manner according to the variation time. It is a figure showing an example of the real-time production performed when main character 1500a is in the area of scene 1. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a loop image process and the selected effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a loop effect. It is a figure showing the state where a side overhang is located in a fixed position. It is a figure which shows the state which the side overhang moved above the fixed position. It is a figure which shows the accommodating part corresponding to side overhang, and a sheet insertion opening, (A) is a figure which shows that a cover part is an open state. (B) is a figure which shows that a cover part is a closed state. FIG. 11 is a view illustrating a state in which sheets arranged in a storage unit corresponding to side overhang are arranged side by side, in which a plurality of gaming machines are juxtaposed. It is a schematic diagram of a right overhanging panel and a belt-type movable unit that slides the right overhanging panel. FIG. 213 is a view of the AA cross section of FIG. 219 viewed from below. It is a figure showing the state where the right movable sheet and the left movable sheet are protruding toward the player. FIG. 3A is a diagram illustrating a right movable sheet and a movable sheet rotating mechanism that rotates the right movable sheet. (B) is a schematic diagram showing a rotation mode of the right movable sheet. It is a figure which shows the state in which the side protrusion is open. It is a figure which shows the state in which the side extension is closed. It is a figure which shows the side extension and the side extension rotation mechanism by the rack and pinion which rotates and moves the side extension. It is a figure showing the state where the left overhang panel is upright. It is a figure showing the state where the left overhanging panel fell down. It is a figure which shows the left overhanging panel 490 and the left overhanging panel rotating mechanism which rotates the left overhanging panel 490. It is a figure showing the state where the upper projection panel is located in the fixed position. It is a figure showing the state where the upper projection panel is located after movement. It is a top view which shows an upper overhang panel and an upper overhang rotation mechanism by the gear which rotates the upper overhang panel. It is a figure which shows the state in which the upper overhang panel has slid upward. It is a figure which shows the state which the upper overhang panel has slid downward. (A) is a figure which shows the upper extension slide mechanism which slides an upper extension panel. (B) is a schematic side view showing a state in which the upper extension panel slides upward by the upper extension slide mechanism. (C) is a schematic side view showing a state in which the upper extension panel has been slid downward by the upper extension slide mechanism. It is a figure showing the state where the upper projection upper part was stored in the upper part of the upper projection panel. It is a figure which shows the state which the upper overhang upper surface part 351a was rising. (A) is a side view showing the state where the upper overhang upper surface part was located in the fixed position. (B) is a side view showing a state in which the upper overhanging upper surface portion rises upward by the upper surface portion rotating mechanism. It is a figure which shows the state which arranged two upper overhang panels on right and left.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Figure 5 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are openably and closably mounted by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape in a front view and having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear, and a game mounted on a lower front part of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing spheres, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the left front part of the door frame base unit 100 a unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, is stored in the upper tray 201 is mounted through the dish unit 200 on the front lower right portion of the door frame base unit 100 gaming balls a handle unit 500 player is operable for driving the game board 5 of the gaming area of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been hit into the game area and is ejected to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball that is mounted on the lower portion of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and has an upper plate 201 comprises a spherical feeding unit 540 for feeding to the ball shooting apparatus 680, the glass unit 560 for closing the attached to the surface through hole 111 after the door frame base unit 100, a security cover 580 that covers the surface lower after glass unit 560, a ing.

  Body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is partially a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 the periphery of the game board 5 is possible supported while being capable of being inserted into the outer frame 2 frame, the body frame base 600 front view left attached to upper and lower end outer frame 2 of the outer frame side on the hinge member 60 and the door frame 3 of the door frame side on with mounted respectively rotatably to the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 hinge member 140 and the door frame The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, the reinforcing frame 660 mounted on the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the main body frame base 600 the ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball to the game region 5a of the game board 5 is attached to the lower front, the main body frame outer frame attached to the front view the right side of the base 2 and the main frame 4 , And door A locking unit 700 for locking between the main frame 3 and the main frame 4; and an inverted L-shaped payout which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view and pays out game balls to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and the back of the game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main frame base 600. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 which is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left in a front view. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 in front view for guiding game balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820 Game balls that are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 at the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 A payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board accommodated in a payout control board box 950, and a game ball that is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and that is paid out by the payout device 830, is guided downward. The upper full tank path unit 850 that releases the game balls from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200 and the payout unit base 801 A normal taxiway which is attached to the lower end and guides the game balls discharged from the normal discharge port of the upper full tank path unit 850 to the front and guides the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and discharges from the full tank discharge port. A lower full tank path unit having a full tank guiding path for guiding the game balls forward and guiding the game balls from the front end to the full tank receiving port 530 of the door frame 3. Is provided with a door 860, a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a bass speaker mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side in front view of the rear side of the board unit base 910, and a power supply board is housed therein, and an interface control mounted on the back side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board box in which a payout control board that is attached across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls is housed. 950.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is struck and places the game ball fired from the ball firing device 680 on the upper part of the game area 5a, as shown in FIGS. Front member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to the front, a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front member 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a; A box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower portion on the rear side and opened upward, and a main control substrate attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. Table having a main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning holes which are mounted in the game area 5a at the front side of the game panel 1100 and are capable of receiving game balls hit into the game area 5a. A knit (not shown) and a back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the upper side of the substrate holder 1200 and behind the game panel 1100 and visible from the player side through the game panel 1100. Have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launching device 680 plays the game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in a winning port (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning ports. . Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the players can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front by exploding. 15A is a perspective view of a portion of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15B is an exploded perspective view showing the exploded view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated from each other and extends left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. , And a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that extend to the right. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Also, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same. Have been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably mounted.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 having both ends attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position closer to the left from the left and right center, A right sliding member 82 in the form of a flat plate attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, or the like), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. , Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). The upper frame member 10 has an engagement notch 11 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 11, an upper left and right fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. In addition, the upper frame member 10 includes, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view, a mounting step portion 12 that is recessed from the general surface. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths are different. Is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and a lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D of the connecting member 85 described below are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 has a front end notch portion 22 that is recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same size as the front-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal member such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetric shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are depressed inward on the lateral side outside in the left-right direction from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end. It has recesses 31 and 41 and projections 32 and 42 which bulge out from the side surface opposite to the recesses 31 and 41 and have an internal cavity. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. In the protruding portions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on the surface. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility such as a game hall or transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by fingers and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is opened. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape large enough to allow a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51, A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a front wall bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go rearward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of Makuban member 50 is formed in a matching position with the discharge hole 74 to be described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in the assembled state the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 when assembled to the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

  The upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined such that the front end side is lower. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting a right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a lattice shape, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side on the hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, as shown, the upper fixing portion 61 outer shape of a square in horizontal extends tabular, flat and extends from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61 forward like a front extending portion 62 of the bearing groove 63 which extends through the vertically extending to the left and right center of the front extending portion 62 toward the right end of the front extending portion 62 to the front, plan view of the upper fixed portion 61 A horizontal fixing portion 64 having a flat plate shape extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the edge extending from the left end to the front end of the front extension portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 15B).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). I have. The front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. The horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state where the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the concave portion 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 allows the main frame 4 to cooperate with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66 a having a predetermined width on the left and right and extending back and forth, and an operation unit protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and then extending diagonally left forward, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is mounted at a position behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. In a state where the locking member 66 attached to the outer frame side on the hinge member 60, the lock body 66a is, it is possible to block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, a right side near the front end, on the outer frame side hinge member It extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the 60 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 17).

  The distal end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a, in which a main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 described later can be accommodated.

  By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper main frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands up from a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71, which is located behind the center in the front-rear direction. An upright flat rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a size that penetrates the horizontal portion 71 vertically so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. includes a discharge hole 74 of the, the. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is provided. Are fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 in front of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) of the main frame 4 at the main frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 74 coincide with the left discharge holes 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and it is possible to discharge from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connection member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connection member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connection member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided to be separated from each other in the front and rear directions. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of contacting the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 11 of the upper frame member 10, and are fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Also, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member front lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the 85B is fixed to the inner side of the front side of the left frame member 30 or right frame member 40 protrusion 32 and 42. Furthermore, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the rear side of 85B is a bis screwed from the inserted to the outer side in the left frame member 30 or right frame member 40 protrusion 32, 42 It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is lower than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The horizontal fixing portion 87 on the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side of the front side of the protrusion 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 or right frame member 40. Furthermore, the lower left and right fixing members 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surfaces of the lower frame member 20. .

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism with respect to the body frame side on the hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 by the locking member 66 in the outer frame side on the hinge member 60, 16 and 17 It will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a perspective view showing an enlarged state of being detached can body frame side on the hinge member of the main frame relative to the outer frame side on the hinge member of the outer frame, (b) the outer is a perspective view showing an enlarged state of the main body side upper hinge member to the upper hinge member is attached. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the lock member on the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the distal end of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a U-shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

  Supporting mechanism of the body frame on the hinge pin 622 and using a on the outer frame side hinge member 60 and the locking member 66 in this embodiment, the front end of the lock body 66a main body frame on the hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 right side is, it the contact with each has a small gap between the right side and the right side of the depending portion 65 of the front end of the lock body 66a is in a state (the state in which close to the right hanging portions 65 In the normal bearing state (not shown), the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the center of the front end face of the lock main body 63 are displaced obliquely and opposed. It is in a state.

  In this normal pivoting state, since the hinge pin 622 on the body frame that supports the heavy body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin on the body frame is There is almost no load on the front end face of the lock member 66a from 622. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end face of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operation part 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. I have. In the figure, the center of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is pulled out along the inclination of the U-shaped bearing groove 63 and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F, a component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame and the front end face of the arc shape; And the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the one side inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (the mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging part 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame moves the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is subjected to the normal pin support state or the action force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. This prevents the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and prevents the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from dropping out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move rightward, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the hanging portion 65 and Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  In addition, even if the shape of the front end face of the lock body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the above-described component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 is directed outward of the front protruding portion 62. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) of the lock member 66 at a position where the rotational moment to be rotated is generated, a load is not always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and the lock is not performed. Even if the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is opposed to the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a, which has closed the bearing groove 63, retreats and the bearing groove 63 is opened, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is urged by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves rightward, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame is accommodated in a space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked).

  When removing the upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. Thus, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ball security for preventing a game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1. The mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 18A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in FIG. FIG. 19A is an explanatory view showing a state in which a guide frame is provided at a portion of the lower hinge member on the outer frame side and the main frame is opened with respect to the outer frame, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the frame, (c) is the state which provided the guide blade of embodiment different from (a) and (b), and opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame. (D) is an explanatory view showing a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame in the embodiment of (c).

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to a left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The Makuban member 50 includes a vertical wall portion 54 rising from the rear end of the upper surface upward. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (the pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear. In addition, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when an invalid tool that has contacted the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the invalid tool to be bent. Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  However, when such comprises a vertical wall 54 which extends upwardly to the rear end of the upper surface of Makuban member 50, as shown in FIG. 18 (b), by opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 When the game ball falls on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) in the state of being, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. Therefore, there is a possibility that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 may be caught between them. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which game balls can pass and a right discharge hole 52. , And the left discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like, and the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4, it can be reduced to a game ball is sandwiched between.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and the outer frame 2 is not closed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above configuration, when the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball dropped on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is discharged from the discharge hole 74 or the like. As shown in FIG. 19, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 may be provided with guide blades 95 and 96 for guiding the game balls to the discharge holes 74 and the like, as shown in FIG.

  More specifically, the guide blade 95 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B has a distal end projecting outward from the main body frame 4, and has a base end located below the rear end of the left side surface of the main body frame 4. It is attached so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically on the side, and is formed in a rod shape. The guide blade 95 is urged by a spring (not shown) to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in plan view. Then, as shown in FIG. 19A, the guide blade 95 has its tip inclined slightly backward with respect to the left side surface of the main body frame 4 in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. The rotation end in the counterclockwise direction is regulated so as to protrude from the end. Therefore, from this state, the guide blade 95 can rotate so that the leading end moves rearward by resisting the urging force of the spring.

  When the main body frame 4 is rotated in the closing direction from the state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the tip of the guide blade 95 contacts the right side surface of the rising portion 72 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. The guide vane 95 rotates in the direction in which the tip moves rearward (clockwise in plan view) around the base end against the urging force of a spring (not shown). When the body frame 4 is further rotated in the closing direction, the guide blade 95 is further rotated to a state in which the guide blade 95 projects rearward from the body frame 4, and the guide blade 95 does not interfere with the outer frame 2. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be closed (see FIG. 19B).

  When a game ball falls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 70 when closing the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide blade 95 projects obliquely left rearward from the rear end of the main frame 4. Therefore, the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be brought to the right side by the left side surface of the main body frame 4 and the guide vanes 95, and the game balls are moved to the rear side of the main body frame 4. Rolling can be suppressed, and the game ball can be guided to the discharge hole 74 by moving the game ball to the right side, so that the game ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  When the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide blade 95 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the urging force of a spring (not shown) to the state shown in FIG. 19A. . Therefore, the guide blade 95 of the present embodiment rotates (moves) with the opening and closing operation of the main body frame 4.

  On the other hand, the guide blade 96 shown in FIGS. 19C and 19D has both ends attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. When the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the fan-shaped bellows shape is formed so that when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the fan-shaped bellows is formed. The guide blade 96 is movable in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4, similarly to the guide blade 95 described above.

  When the game ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 while the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide blade 96 is developed between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. The guided wings 96 can guide the falling game balls by rolling them to the rear side of the main body frame 4 to guide them. The game ball can be discharged downward. Therefore, the guiding wings 96 can also prevent a game ball from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  According to this embodiment, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 can be guided to the discharge holes 74 by the guide blades 95 and 96, so that the game balls can be discharged from the discharge holes 74 without increasing the size of the discharge holes 74. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the strength of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 due to a large hole (discharge hole 74) penetrating the horizontal portion 71. Therefore, even if a tool for performing wrongdoing is inserted between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has a sufficient strength, so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is hardly distorted, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, and it is possible to prevent fraud.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 21 is a rear view of the door frame. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a square external shape when viewed from the front, a plate unit 200 attached to a lower front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to an upper front part of the door frame base unit 100. a unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, the front lower right portion of the door frame base unit 100 And a handle unit 500 which is attached through the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a foul cover unit 520 mounted on a lower portion of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feed unit 540 mounted on a lower portion of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. is the glass unit 560 for closing the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the surface lower after glass unit 560, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically long rectangular shape and having a through hole 111 penetrating front and rear, A tubular handle mounting member 120 mounted on the front lower right corner of the front of the door frame base 110 for mounting the handle unit 500, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 And a door frame side which is attached to upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 in a front view, protrudes forward, and is rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4. An upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  Dish door frame 3 unit 200, which will be described in detail later, the upper tray 201 and Shitasara 202 capable of storing game balls bulges forward are arrayed vertically, the upper tray 201 and Shitasara 202 , A plate-shaped plate unit base 210 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 and a plate liquid crystal display device 244 attached to the plate unit base 210 in front of the plate 201 and capable of displaying images. An effect operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 and an upper plate effect button 257 operable by a player, a plate unit cover 260 covering the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a right side of the upper plate 201 in front view. A door lower right production unit 270 having a door lower right rotator 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the game state, and covers the door lower right production unit 270 from the front side. A transparent direction unit cover 300, an upper pan ball vent unit 310 for removing the game ball that is stored in the upper tray 201 to Shitasara 202, for removing the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward a lower tray ball vent unit 320, a spherical rental operation unit 330 for operating the pachinko machine 1 and the sphere is disposed adjacent rental machine (shown also called omitted .CR unit) in the island equipment game hall, a dish unit base upper tray top decorative member 340 upper part capable attached to and emission decoration 210, a mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 partially attached along the upper side on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and a unit base 360 having a light-transmitting property. A translucent top decoration member 370 attached to the left and right centers on the front surface of the 360 and swelling forward, and a top speaker attached to the top decoration member 370 and outputting a high-range sound ( (Not shown), and a decorative board 380 on the door frame, which is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 360 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a flat unit base 410 attached along the left outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, A light-transmitting left side decorative member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350; 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) and a door frame mounted on the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350; 3 and a right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) mounted between the unit base 410 and the right side decorative member 470 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And a door frame right decorative board (not shown) to which is attached.

  The handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. A handle lever 504 that can be turned by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and cooperates with the handle body 502 to rotatably support the handle lever 504. And Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is mounted in the handle body 502 and detects a rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and is mounted on the handle body 502 and can be operated by a player. It has a stop button, and a contact detection sensor attached to the handle body 502 and detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504.

  The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is a shallow box-shaped unit body attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and open at the front side as shown in FIGS. 522 and a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray supply port 210a of the tray unit 200. 526, a full-filled ball receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the through-ball passage 526 when viewed from the front and that can communicate with the full-filled guide path of the lower full-filled ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A furl that receives a game ball (foul ball) that opens upward on the right side of the ball receiving port 528 in a front view and that does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4. a spherical socket 530, dishes as well as releasing the front view the lower right corner in towards the front opening to have full ball socket 528 and game ball received in foul ball socket 530 units 200 Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  The ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the back of the unit body 542, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, etc. A unit cover 544 detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front cover unit 520 in a box shape with an open front side, and an upper plate that is open frontward and is open forward; A ball entrance 546 into which the game balls stored in 201 enter, a ball ejection port 548 capable of releasing the game balls entering the ball entrance 546 and opening rearward, and a ball entrance A ball discharge port 550 is provided, which is capable of discharging the game ball that has entered the 546 and is opened forward below the ball entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid for releasing game balls entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a game ball entered from the ball entrance 546. And a switching mechanism for switching between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front and rear sides of the unit frame 562 as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. A pair of glass plates 564 for closing the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

(First Embodiment of Door Frame)
[Left / Right overhang panel]
As shown in FIG. 215, the door frame 3 in the present embodiment has a pair of side overhangs (left overhanging panels) projecting toward the player on the left and right sides of the front side of the door frame 3 so as to sandwich the game area 5 a. 490, right overhanging panel 491).
The side overhang of this example has a hollow structure, and a sheet (not shown) on which a decorative design corresponding to the model of the gaming machine is drawn can be inserted. The left overhanging panel 490 has a left outer window 490a and a left inner window 490b.

  As shown in FIG. 217, a sheet of a predetermined shape is inserted into a left outer surface storage portion 492 corresponding to the left outer surface window portion 490 a from a left outer surface sheet insertion port 493 formed above the left overhanging panel 490. By inserting the sheet, the sheet becomes visible from the outside of the left overhanging panel 490. Also, by inserting a sheet of a predetermined shape from the left inner surface sheet insertion opening 498 formed above the left overhanging panel 490 into the left inner surface accommodating portion 497 corresponding to the left inner surface window portion 490b, the left overhanging panel is provided. The sheet is visible from inside 490. A lid 499 for opening and closing the left outer sheet insertion port 493 and the left inner sheet insertion port 498 is provided above the left overhanging panel 490. FIG. 217 (A) shows a state in which the cover 499 is open, and FIG. 217 (B) shows a state in which the cover 499 is closed. By being in the open state, it is possible to insert and withdraw sheets from the left outer sheet insertion port 493 and the left inner sheet insertion port 498. The opening / closing of the lid is of a vertical sliding type, and may be manually opened / closed (slided) from the outside, or may be opened / closed by a drive control by a peripheral control board described later in order to prohibit opening by a player. In such a case, the operation unit (described later) disposed on the back surface of the door frame 3 may detect the operation of the open / close switch of the lid unit 499 to open or close. Configuration. Although not shown, inside the left overhanging panel 490, an LED board A on which a plurality of LEDs for illuminating the sheet inserted into the left outer-side housing section 492 and the left inner-side housing section 497 are inserted. An LED board B on which a plurality of LEDs illuminating the sheet are arranged is provided. Like the left overhanging panel 490, the right overhanging panel 491 has a right outer surface window 491a, a right inner surface window 491b, an accommodating portion and a sheet insertion opening corresponding to each window, and various LED boards. are doing.

  With the above configuration, even if the game board is replaced, for example, when a new machine is replaced, it is possible to make the side overhang unique to the game machine simply by replacing the seat with the one corresponding to the newly installed game board Therefore, it is not necessary to replace all the side overhangs each time the game board is replaced, and the decoration of the side overhang can be renewed at low cost. Further, the side overhang has a structure in which the sheet can be visually recognized from the outside. Thereby, even if the player in the game hall does not move to the front of the gaming machine, if the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the entrance of the island where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, it is possible to know where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. In addition, compared to gaming machines that do not have side overhangs, the side overhangs protrude forward, so the advertising effect is high, and the possibility of selecting the pachinko machine 1 is improved. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 218, it is possible to put sheets having different decorations on the outside and the inside of the side overhang, respectively. Since the sheets arranged on the window portion 491a and the window portion 490b for the left inner surface are arranged side by side, the pattern imitating the "star" drawn on the window portion 491a for the right outer surface and the window portion 490b for the left inner surface is drawn. Since the combined sheets appear as a single picture, the design applied to the sheet is more powerful than looking at one of the sheets, making it possible to further enhance the advertising effect.

  Furthermore, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are juxtaposed on the island facilities of the game hall, a large number of side projections appear side by side like a climbing pole, and exhibit spectacular views. By inserting a sheet with a pattern imitating a "star" into the accommodation section corresponding to each window of the side overhang, the island facility was inserted into a plurality of side overhangs when viewed along the aisle. The sheets are arranged side by side, and it looks like a single large starry sky pattern. As a result, the entire island facility in which a plurality of the pachinko machines 1 are juxtaposed has a decorative property that can be easily noticed by the hall patrons and that the possibility that the pachinko machines 1 are selected more than other game machines is improved. Can be.

  The side overhang of this example is provided with a movable means (described later) that can move (operate) with respect to the door frame 3 so that the functions and effects of the side overhang differ between before and after the movement. . Types of movement include sliding movement, rotating movement, and the like. In this example, the side projection is configured to slide vertically, and as illustrated in FIG. 215, the side projection is slid downward. 216 is a state before the movement (fixed position), and as shown in FIG. 216, a state in which the side protrusion slides upward is a state after the movement.

  Further, the side overhangs of this example each have a side speaker unit (not shown), and when the side overhangs slides due to a game state or an effect performed by a peripheral control board to be described later, the side speaker is accordingly moved. Since the position of the unit also changes, the way in which the player hears the sound differs depending on the position of the side overhang.

  More specifically, when the side overhang is at the position after the movement, the sound emission position of the side speaker unit is higher than when the side overhang is at the fixed position. Sounds like (low volume). Conversely, if the side overhang is in the fixed position, it sounds as if the sound is coming from near (loud). As a result, the way in which the sound output from the side speaker unit is heard differs depending on the position of the side overhang, and this difference may indicate to the player that the probability of developing into a big hit state is high. It can be reminded, and in addition to the fact that the side overhang slides, it is possible to have the expectation that a special game state will come, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game .

  Also, the side speaker unit may change the volume (volume) of the audio output according to the height at which the side overhang is located. ) And the state of sliding down (fixed position), the volume felt by the player may be relatively the same. In this way, the direction in which the sound is heard varies depending on the position of the side overhang, even though the sound volume perceived by the player has not changed. Can be suppressed.

  The side speaker unit controls the sound output depending on the progress of the game (game state), and may output different sounds from each side speaker unit overhanging the side. When two characters are displayed on the display device 1500, a character image A and a character image B are displayed, and when an effect is produced in which the two characters have a conversation, the sound emitted by the character image A located on the right side is displayed on the right overhanging panel. The side speaker unit of the left overhanging panel 491 outputs the sound generated by the character image B located on the left side. Further, when the character image A is located on the front right side and the character image B is located on the back left side, the sound volume emitted from the side speaker unit of the right overhanging panel 491 is emitted from the side speaker unit of the left overhanging panel 490. Output relatively lower than the volume. This makes it possible to express the positional relationship between the two character images by voice output.

Also, by utilizing a structure in which the side overhang slides in the vertical direction, and when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played by the player, the side overhang is slid upward, so that the side overhang can be temporarily performed on other gaming machines. Even if it is provided, since the side overhang is located above it, the side overhang of the pachinko machine 1 becomes relatively conspicuous, and the advertising effect can be enhanced as compared with the case where the side overhang is at the fixed position. As a result, the possibility that the pachinko machine 1 is selected by the player can be improved.
In this example, the above-mentioned “when no game is played” can be exemplified by “during demonstration”. The demonstration state in the present embodiment is a so-called customer waiting state, which is started when "a state in which the later-described special symbol change display is not performed is passed for a predetermined time". This is a power saving mode in which light emission of an LED or the like illuminating the game area 5a is suppressed to reduce power consumption.
In addition, the demo state is configured to end when a special symbol change display described later is performed.

  Note that the condition under which the side extension slides upward in this example corresponds to the start of the above-described demonstration state, and the condition under which the side extension slides downward (fixed position) in this example corresponds to the above-described demonstration state. Is equivalent to ending.

In addition, the “when not playing” is not limited to the above-described demonstration state, and it is detected that there is no game ball in the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the pachinko machine 1, and “the player and the handle lever” State after a predetermined period of time in which the contact with 504 is not detected ”. In such a case, it is necessary to provide a detection sensor capable of detecting the presence of a game ball at a predetermined position on the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine at a glance whether or not the pachinko machine is currently playing a game, as well as to improve the advertising effect. For example, when the player temporarily leaves the room due to a meal break or a toilet break, although a state in which contact with the handle lever 504 is not detected continues, a state in which a game ball is borrowed from a ball rental machine (such as the upper plate 201 or the upper plate 201). Since it is detected that a game ball is present on the lower plate 202), the side projection does not slide downward, and it is possible to prevent other players from starting a game by mistake. .

  Further, even when the player touches the handle lever 504 even when the player is not playing a game, it is detected that there is a lending ball or a ball held (the presence of a game ball on the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 is detected). Otherwise, even if the contact with the handle lever 504 is detected, the side projection does not slide downward, so that power consumption when the game is not being played and wear of the sliding mechanism are prevented. be able to.

  When the player plays a game of the pachinko machine 1 (when the above-described demonstration state ends), the side projection slides downward (in a fixed position). In addition, it is possible to use a structure in which the side projection can swing up and down, and use the structure for production. For example, by swinging the side projection up and down in a specific game state such as a big hit state, it is possible to function as a movable movable object for an effect that excites the game. In addition, as described above, since a plurality of LEDs are attached to the side protrusion (not shown), not only can it be swung up and down, but also effects using the light emission of the LEDs can be performed. Side overhangs that did not produce an inherent effect other than for advertising can also be used by adding a function for directing.

  With the above configuration, in a state where the side overhang is sliding upward, it can be used as an advertising member that stands out more than other gaming machines, and conversely, when the side overhang is sliding downward, Since it can be used as an effect character that can move up and down according to the game state or perform a light emitting effect using LEDs, the function is different depending on the movable position of the side extension.

  Note that the brightness of the LED provided on the side overhang is different between a state in which the side overhang is sliding upward and a state in which the side overhang is sliding downward (in a fixed position) (in a fixed position). May be changed. For example, information based on drive control indicates whether the side overhang is sliding upward or the side overhang is sliding downward (fixed position). It is possible to make a determination based on the detection status of a detection switch (not shown), and set the brightness of the LED based on the determination result. More specifically, when the side overhang is used as an advertising member, when the side overhang is sliding upward, the brightness of the LED is set to high, and the side overhang is downward (fixed position). In the state in which the LED is slid (to the fixed position), the luminance of the LED is set to be lower than that in the state in which the side protrusion slides upward. This makes it possible to appropriately suppress the burden on the player's eyes in the case where the side overhang functions for an advertisement visually recognized from a distance and the case where the side overhang functions for an effect visually recognized from a near distance. It becomes possible. The LEDs provided on the side protrusions are electrically connected to a peripheral control board described later, and the setting of the luminance according to the movable position is controlled by the peripheral control board. For this reason, the peripheral control board functions as a brightness setting unit.

  In addition, when the side overhang is sliding upward, the high brightness and the low brightness are repeatedly switched at regular intervals, and the side overhang is sliding downward (fixed position) In the state (2), the luminance may be always low. As a result, when the side overhang is visually recognized from a distance, the side overhang appears to be blinking, so that attention to the pachinko machine 1 can be further increased, and the possibility of selecting the pachinko machine 1 is improved. It is possible to do.

  In addition, when the side overhang is sliding upward, the side overhang is slidably moved so as to swing at a fixed interval, and the side overhang is slid downward (fixed position). In the state (2), the swing operation may be canceled. By using the tendency to follow moving objects with the eyes, when the island facilities are viewed along the passage, the line of sight is naturally directed to the oscillating side overhang, so the pachinko machine 1 attracts more attention than any gaming machine It is possible to improve the possibility that the pachinko machine 1 is selected.

  Next, the structure of the side overhang will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram of the right overhanging panel 491 and a belt-type movable portion 503 that slides the right overhanging panel 491. FIG. 220 is a diagram of the AA cross section of FIG. Further, the movable structure of the left overhanging panel 490 and the right overhanging panel 491 are common, and therefore, the movable structure of the right overhanging panel 491 will be described here, and the description of the left overhanging panel 490 will be omitted. Note that a right overhanging panel 491, a belt-type movable section 503, and a right overhanging mechanism 501 are referred to.

The right overhanging mechanism 501 includes a right overhanging panel 491 and a belt-type movable section 503.
The belt-type movable section 503 includes a frame member 511 and a belt mechanism 510.
The belt mechanism 510 includes a toothed belt 512, an upper belt gear 513, a lower belt gear 514, a connection fitting 515, a belt drive motor 516, and screws 517.
The frame member 511 is a member having a U-shaped cross section, and has a structure in which a left wall 511a, a right wall 511b, and a rear wall 511d are coupled, and is screwed to the door frame base unit 100 with screws 517. The belt mechanism 510 is incorporated between the left wall 511a and the right wall 511b of the frame member 511. The upper belt gear 513 and the lower belt gear 514 of the belt mechanism 510 are supported by upper and lower portions between the left wall 511a and the right wall 511b of the frame member 511. An endless toothed belt 512 is looped around.
The belt drive motor 516 is connected to the upper belt gear 513, and the belt drive motor 516 drives the belt mechanism 510 to operate.
In addition, U-shaped slide concave portions 518 and 519 cut inward are provided at the front ends of the left wall 511a and the right wall 511b of the frame member 511, respectively. The slide concave portions 518 and 519 are formed so as to penetrate in the longitudinal direction of the frame member 511, and serve as rails of the right overhanging panel 491.

  The rear end of the right overhanging panel 491 is formed in a T-shape, and the slide recesses 518, 519 and the rear end of the T-shaped right overhanging panel 491 are slidably fitted. I do. Then, in order to slide the right overhanging panel 491 in the up and down direction, the toothed belt 512 and the lower rear surface of the right overhanging panel 491 are attached and fixed by a connection fitting 515. Thus, the right overhanging panel 491 is configured to slide up and down with the driving of the belt mechanism 510.

  In addition, since the rear end of the right overhanging panel 491 has a structure extending below the bottom surface other than the rear end, the right overhanging panel 491 is slid upward by the belt-type movable portion 503. In this case, a structure is provided to fill a gap of the door frame 3 generated at a position where the right overhanging panel 491 was originally located. For this reason, it is possible to prevent impropriety (goto) or mischief caused by a foreign object being put in the door frame 3 or the game area 5a. Furthermore, it is also possible to prevent accidents, injuries, etc., such as pinching a part of the body such as a finger between the right overhanging panel 491 and the gap.

  As described above, the movable structure of the side extension in the present example has been described. However, the movable structure is not limited to the movable structure using the belt mechanism 510. The slide may be performed by using a linear motor, and various methods can be selected as long as the configuration allows the slide to be performed.

  Further, regarding the slide movement of the side overhang, the height of the side overhang may be adjusted at the game hall side, instead of changing the height of the side overhang depending on whether a game is played.

  In some gaming halls, shelves that can be used as luggage storage by players may be installed above the island facilities where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. In this case, when the side extension slides upward, it may collide depending on the height of the shelf, which may cause a failure or damage. In order to prevent this, in this example, the upper limit value at which the side overhang is increased on the game hall side is configured.

In the vicinity of the upper belt gear 513 of the above-mentioned belt-type movable portion 503, a rotation sensor for detecting the number of rotations of the upper belt gear 513 is provided (not shown). Specify the quantity. Further, an operation unit for determining an upper limit value at which the side protrusion is increased is arranged on the back surface of the door frame 3, so that only a staff member of the game hall can operate.
In addition, depending on the structure of the game hall, when the side overhang slides upward, there may be an obstacle on the movement path of one side overhang, so that the left overhang panel 490 and the right overhang panel 491, respectively. Different upper limits can be set.

  The operation unit is electrically connected to a peripheral control board to be described later, and can set an upper limit of a distance by which the side protrusion slides upward from 0% to 100% according to an operation on the operation unit. It is. When it is set to 0%, the side overhang does not rise at the fixed position. In addition, when it is set to 100%, it is configured to be able to ascend to the maximum position where the side overhang can move. When a staff in the game hall operates the operation unit and sets, for example, 50% as the upper limit, a movement amount upper limit signal having a value of 50% is input from the operation unit to the peripheral control board. Then, based on the movement amount upper limit signal, the peripheral control board is configured to control the upper limit value of the distance that each side extension can move to half of the maximum value.

[Modification of First Embodiment of Door Frame]
In addition, in the door frame 3 of this example, in addition to swinging the side overhang in the vertical direction during the game, as shown in FIG. 221, for example, after the side overhang is slid upward according to the playing state, A pair of left movable sheet 390 and right movable sheet 391 projecting toward the player appears at the position where the overhang was located. Also in this example, the structure of the right movable seat 391 will be described, and the description of the left movable seat 390 will be omitted.

The right movable sheet 391 is formed of a thin plate-shaped member, and has a sheet on which an ornamental design corresponding to the model of the gaming machine is drawn on the outside and inside, and can be used for directing and advertising. ing.
In addition, the right movable sheet 391 has different sheets inside and outside, respectively. For example, in this example, a sheet on which a decorative design (in this case, an image imitating a ladybird) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine is drawn on the outside where hall customers other than the player can view, for advertising purposes. On the inside that is used and directly visible to the player, a "big hit" indicating that the probability of developing into the big hit state is high, and a "big hit !!" indicating that the big hit state has been drawn are drawn. It is possible to use it for performances, for example, by using a folded sheet.

  Next, the structure of the right movable seat 391 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222A is a diagram illustrating a right movable sheet 391 and a movable sheet rotating mechanism that rotates the right movable sheet 391. FIG. 222 (B) is a schematic diagram illustrating a rotation mode of the right movable sheet.

The movable sheet rotating mechanism has a right movable sheet 391 and a rotation moving mechanism 392, and the rotation moving mechanism 392 rotates the right movable sheet 391 about a horizontal direction so that a player can visually recognize the position. The right movable seat 391 appears.
The rotation moving mechanism 392 includes an upper gear 393, a middle gear 394, and a lower gear 395. The upper gear 393 is supported by the rotation shaft of the right movable seat 391, and the lower gear is supported by the above-described lower belt gear 514. The middle gear 394 is disposed so as to mesh with the upper gear 393 and the lower gear 395.

  When the right overhanging panel 491 is slid upward by the belt-type movable portion 503, the lower belt gear 514 rotates clockwise, so that the lower gear 395 that is axially supported also rotates clockwise. Accordingly, the middle gear 394 that meshes with the lower gear 395 rotates counterclockwise, and the upper gear 393 that meshes with the middle gear 394 rotates clockwise. By rotating around the rotation axis of the right movable seat 391 with the rotation of the upper gear 393, a portion of the right movable seat 391 having a seat appears to be visible to a player. Has become.

  Conversely, when the right overhanging panel 491 is slid downward by the belt-type movable portion 503, the lower belt gear 514 rotates counterclockwise, so that the lower gear 395 supported by the shaft also rotates counterclockwise. Rotate. Accordingly, the middle gear 394 that meshes with the lower gear 395 rotates clockwise, and the upper gear 393 that meshes with the middle gear 394 rotates counterclockwise. By rotating around the rotation axis of the right movable seat 391 with the rotation of the upper gear 393, the door frame so that the portion of the right movable seat 391 having the seat can be visually recognized by the player. 3.

Further, the right movable seat includes a cover member 396, and is rotatably supported on the lower surface of the right movable seat 391.
The cover member 396 has a role of filling a gap generated in the door frame 3 when the right movable sheet 391 is made to appear visually. For this reason, it is possible to prevent impropriety (goto) or mischief caused by a foreign object being put in the door frame 3 or the game area 5a. Furthermore, it is also possible to prevent accidents, injuries, etc., such as pinching a part of the body such as a finger between the right movable seat 391 and the gap.
Further, since the cover member 396 is formed with the sheet stopper piece 397, the cover member 396 rotates toward the inside of the door frame 3 even when the cover member 396 is pressed by a finger or the like when the cover member 396 is filling the gap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap from being intentionally generated.

  With the above configuration, when the right movable sheet 391 is at a position where it cannot be visually recognized, the right movable sheet 391 is used as a normal door frame. Therefore, the function is different depending on the position of the right movable seat 391.

  Further, the left movable sheet 390 and the right movable sheet 391 described so far are thin plate-shaped members, each having a sheet on the outside and inside on which a decorative design corresponding to the model of the gaming machine is drawn. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying an image, an organic EL display, and the like are provided on the outside and the inside, and a game state and whether a game is performed. The configuration may be such that the displayed image is changed according to various situations such as whether or not.

[Second Embodiment of Door Frame]
In addition, the movable side overhang is not limited to the movable means that slides in the vertical direction as long as the function is different before and after the side overhang movement. The movable structure of the side overhang in this example is configured to rotate and rotate in a double-opening manner around the rear end of the side overhang, and as shown in FIG. position). As shown in FIG. 224, the state in which the side overhang is closed is after the movement.

  Further, the side overhangs of this example are provided with a left overhang display device 495 and a right overhang display device 496 on the outside, respectively. When the game was not played or played by a player and in a normal game state, the side overhang was opened and the left overhang display device 495 and the right overhang display device 496 had an advertising function. Used as an accessory. Conversely, when the player is playing a game, for example, performing an effect indicating that the probability of developing into the big hit state is high, or performing an effect indicating that the big hit state has occurred, the game is closed according to the playing state. The state is set, and all or a part of the game area is made invisible by side projection. When the side overhang is in the closed state, the left overhang display device 495 and the right overhang display device 496 are united, so that there was an effect function such as performing an image effect using the left and right overhang display device. It can be used as an accessory.

  Next, a structure for moving the side overhang will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 225 is a diagram showing a side extension and a side extension rotation mechanism using a rack and pinion for rotating and moving the side extension.

The side overhang rotation mechanism has a left overhang panel 490, a right overhang panel 491, and a reverse movement mechanism 481, and the reverse movement mechanism 481 opens and closes the left overhang panel 490 and the right overhang panel 491 in a double-open manner. Things.
The reverse movement mechanism 481 includes a left rack gear 485 and a left pinion 482, a right rack gear 486, a right pinion 483, and a drive gear 484. The left rack gear 485 and the right rack gear 486 are arranged in parallel along the left-right direction of the door frame base unit 100. The pinion shaft 487 of the left pinion 482 is vertically supported vertically along the left side of the door frame base unit 100, and the pinion shaft 488 of the right pinion 483 is vertically aligned along the right side of the door frame base unit 100. The upper and lower sides are supported in the direction.
In addition, a drive shaft 489 of the drive gear 484 is pivotally supported in a short vertical direction at the center of the upper side of the door frame base unit 100. The drive gear 484 is disposed on the rear surface where the left rack gear 485 and the right rack gear 486 overlap with each other so as to mesh with the left rack gear 485 and the right rack gear 486.

The left rack gear 485 has rack teeth on the rear surface where it meshes with the drive gear 484, and has rack teeth on the front surface where it meshes with the left pinion 482.
The right rack gear 486 has rack teeth on the front surface at both the portion meshing with the drive gear 484 and the portion meshing with the right pinion 483.

  The rear end of the left overhanging panel 490 is fixed to the pinion shaft 487. The rear end of the right overhanging panel 491 is fixed to the pinion shaft 488. The left rack gear 485 is bent rearward so that the positions of the left pinion 482 and the right pinion 483 are the same in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the drive gear 484 reciprocates left and right, the left rack gear 485 and the right rack gear 486 move in parallel and oppositely, and the left overhanging panel 490 and the right overhanging panel 491 are moved via the left pinion 482 and the right pinion 483. Open and close with double doors.

[Third Embodiment of Door Frame]
In this embodiment, the movable structure of the side overhang is configured to rotate around the rear end of the lower end of the side overhang, and as shown in FIG. (Fixed position). As shown in FIG. 227, the state in which the left overhanging panel 490 is falling is the state after the movement.

  In addition, since the left overhanging panel 490 of this example is provided with the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 on the outside, the left overhanging panel 490 uses a structure in which the left overhanging panel 490 rotates and moves, and when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played by the player, Alternatively, in a normal game state in which a player plays a game, the left overhanging panel 490 is in an upright state, and an image is displayed on the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 to be used as an accessory having an advertising function. Conversely, when the player is playing a game, for example, when performing an effect in which the effect mode changes in accordance with the operation of the player, the user operates the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 by rotating the left overhanging panel 490. Can be used as an accessory having a function of performing an effect of causing the player to operate the left liquid crystal touch panel 471. Accordingly, the function can be varied depending on the position of the left overhanging panel 490, and a new operation unit can be provided to give the player an unexpected or surprising surprise, and the player can entertain the player with the left liquid crystal touch panel 471. By operating, it is possible to participate in the production, and it is possible to prevent the player from actively enjoying the production and to reduce the interest. In addition, by rotating the left overhanging panel 490 to make the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 operable, a special operation effect using a plurality of touch panels such as the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 and a touch panel 246 described later can be executed. . According to such a configuration, the effect mode is changed according to the player operation on both the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 and the touch panel 246, or according to the player operation on either the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 or the touch panel 246. It is possible to change the effect mode, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game as compared with the related art.

  Next, the operation of the left overhang panel 490 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating the left overhanging panel 490 and a left overhanging panel rotating mechanism that rotates the left overhanging panel 490.

The left overhanging panel rotation mechanism has a left overhanging panel 490 and a gear box 472. The gear box 472 rotates the lower rear end of the left overhanging panel 490 in a front-rear direction axis and moves the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 to the player. Is moved to an operable position.
The gear box 472 includes a gear box base 473, a first gear 474, a second gear 475, a third gear 476, a motor 477, a rotation shaft 478, and a rotation base 479. The gearbox base 473 is attached and fixed to the door frame base unit 100, and the rotation base 479 is attached and fixed to the rear end of the lower left panel 490 at the lower end. The rotating shaft 748 is rotatably supported by the rear surface of the rotating base, and has a structure in which the left overhanging panel 490 is rotated by rotating the rotating shaft 748 in the horizontal direction. The first gear 474, the second gear 475, the third gear 476, and the motor 477 are disposed on the gear box base 473, the first gear 474 and the rotating shaft 478 are connected, and the third gear 476 and the motor 477 are connected to each other. Is connected. Further, the second gear 475 is disposed so as to mesh with the first gear 474 and the third gear 476.

  When the left overhanging panel rotation mechanism moves the left overhanging panel 490 to a position where the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 can be operated, the third gear 476 connected to the motor 477 rotates clockwise. Accordingly, the second gear 475 arranged so as to mesh with the third gear 476 rotates counterclockwise in conjunction therewith. Accordingly, the first gear 474 arranged so as to mesh with the second gear 475 rotates clockwise. With the rotation of the first gear 474, the rotation shaft 478 and the rotation base 479 rotate clockwise, so that the left overhanging panel 490 is in a falling state.

  Conversely, when the left overhanging panel 490 is moved to a position where the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 cannot be operated by the left overhanging panel rotating mechanism, the third gear 476 connected to the motor 477 rotates counterclockwise. Accordingly, the second gear 475 arranged so as to mesh with the third gear 476 rotates clockwise in conjunction therewith. Accordingly, the first gear 474 arranged to mesh with the second gear 475 rotates counterclockwise. As the rotation shaft 478 and the rotation base 479 rotate counterclockwise with the rotation of the first gear 474, the left overhanging panel 490 moves to an upright position.

  Further, with respect to the rotational movement of the left overhanging panel 490, when the left overhanging panel 490 is rotationally moved to a position where the operation on the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 can be performed, the rotation angle of the left overhanging panel 490 is adjusted by the player. Anything that can be done.

  Even if the left overhang panel 490 is rotationally moved to a position where the operation on the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 can be performed, depending on the player, the left liquid crystal touch panel 471 is located at a position where it is difficult to operate at the default position. There is a possibility. In that case, the user may feel stress due to the inability to perform the operation comfortably, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  A rotation sensor (not shown) for detecting the rotation speed of the first gear 474 is provided near the first gear 474 of the above-described left overhang panel rotation mechanism. The rotation amount of the overhang panel 490 is specified. Further, the rotation angle of the left overhang panel 490 can be adjusted by operating the touch panel 246.

  In this example, the rotation amount of the left overhang panel 490 can be adjusted in two stages in accordance with the operation on the operation unit. , Rotate at a rotation angle of 90 ° or more (default angle). Further, when set to the second stage, when the left overhanging panel 490 is rotationally moved, the panel is rotated at a rotation angle of about 90 °. When the player operates the touch panel 246 and sets, for example, the second stage, a rotational movement amount signal is input from the touch panel 246 to the peripheral control board. Next, based on the rotation amount signal, the peripheral control board sets and controls the amount of rotation of the left overhanging panel 246.

  The members provided on the left overhanging panel 490 and operable by the player have been exemplified by the liquid crystal touch panel. The present invention is not limited to this, and various configurations can be selected as long as the operation can be performed by rotating the left overhang panel 490, such as selecting a depressable member such as a button. is there.

[First Embodiment of Upper Overhanging Panel]
As shown in FIGS. 229 and 230, an upper overhanging panel 351 is provided on the upper side of the door frame 3 in the present example, at the front side of the door frame 3 and above the game area 5a so as to protrude toward the player. I have.
The upper overhang panel 351 has an upper display device 352 and an upper decorative member 353 on different surfaces, respectively. The upper decorative member 353 is a translucent decorative member, and has a plurality of LEDs inside. Is installed.

  The upper overhanging panel 351 includes a moving unit (described later) that is movable with respect to the door frame 3, and makes the function of the upper overhanging panel 351 different before and after the movement. In this example, the upper overhanging panel 351 is configured to rotate around the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 229, the upper display device 352 provided on the upper overhanging panel 351 faces upward. Before the movement (fixed position), as shown in FIG. 230, the state in which the upper display device 352 faces forward (toward the player) is the state after the movement.

  Before the upper overhanging panel 351 moves, the upper decoration member 353 faces the player, so that it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using the LEDs provided on the inside, and after the movement, the upper display device. Since 352 faces the player (visible direction), a display effect such as displaying an image can be performed. Therefore, by rotating the upper overhanging panel 351 according to the game state, it is possible to switch the effect that can be executed, that is, without separately preparing a device for a light emission effect and a device for a display effect. In both cases, the light-emitting effect and the display effect can be performed using only a single device.

  In addition, in a state before the upper overhanging panel 351 is rotationally moved (fixed position), the upper display device 352 is in a position that is invisible to a sitting player, and therefore, an effect using the upper display device 352 during the game. Is performed, the upper overhang panel 351 is rotated and moved to a position at which the upper display device 352 can be visually recognized, and then a display effect such as displaying an image is performed. As a result, it is possible to surprise the player and entertain a surprising effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  The trigger of movement of the upper overhanging panel 351 is, for example, a game being played by a player. In a normal game state, the upper overhanging panel 351 is located at a fixed position. It can be used as a movable object for performing a light decoration effect by a light emitting member such as an LED arranged in the light emitting device. Conversely, when the player is playing a game and, for example, performs an effect indicating that the probability of developing into the big hit state is high, or performs an effect indicating that the big hit state has been achieved, the upper display device 352 is displayed. The upper projection panel 351 is rotated and moved to a position where the player can view the image, and an image is displayed on the upper display device 352 or the like. be able to. Thus, in addition to different functions to be issued depending on the position of the upper overhang panel 351, the upper display device 352 is located at a position where the player cannot visually recognize the display device. By appearing to appear, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest in the game.

The upper overhanging panel 351 has an upper first speaker 354 and an upper second speaker 355 that are speaker units. The upper first speaker 354 is located on the side of the upper display device 352 and the upper second speaker 355. Are provided on the side of the upper decorative member 353, two each.
When the upper overhanging panel 351 is rotationally moved by a game state or an effect performed by a peripheral control board to be described later, the positions of the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355 change accordingly. At 351, the way of hearing the sound felt by the player differs depending on the position.

  More specifically, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is at the position after the movement, the sound emission direction of the upper first speaker 354 is in the player direction, while the sound emission direction of the upper second speaker 355 is lower, but the sound emission direction of the upper second speaker 355 is lower. Since the upper overhanging panel 351 is located at a position higher than the position, the direction is toward the player, and the player hears a sound from near. Conversely, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is in the fixed position, the upper first speaker 354 is in the state of facing upward, and the upper second speaker 355 is in the player direction (accurately, parallel to the ground). It is in the state of being. When sound is emitted from each speaker in that state, the sound emission direction of the upper second speaker 355 is the player direction, but the sound emission direction of the upper first speaker 354 is the ceiling direction opposite to the player. Therefore, the player hears that the sound is sounding from a distant place compared to the case where the upper overhang panel 351 is at the position after the movement.

  In addition, the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355 may be controlled by a peripheral control board, which will be described later, as to whether or not to output audio depending on the location where the upper overhanging panel 351 is located. For example, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a fixed position, sound may be emitted only from the upper first speaker 354 (in a sound emission direction other than the player direction), and by doing so, from a remote place The feeling that sound is heard (at a low volume) can be emphasized. Conversely, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is in the position after the movement, sound may be emitted from both the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355, and the sound is heard from near (to a large volume). The feeling can be emphasized. This makes it possible to more clearly feel the difference in the sound heard from the player, as compared to the difference in how the sound is heard only at the position of the upper overhang panel 351.

  According to the above configuration, since the sound output from the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355 differs depending on the position of the upper overhanging panel 351, the player is likely to develop a big hit state due to the difference. It is possible to remind the user that it is suggesting, and in addition to the fact that the upper overhanging panel 351 is rotationally moved, it is possible to have the expectation that a special game state will come, so that the game It is possible to improve the interest in.

  Further, the upper overhanging panel 351 is not limited to the switching of the effect by rotating and moving, but may have a different function for the advertisement and for the effect as in the side overhang described above. Since the upper overhanging panel 351 of this example includes the upper decorative member 353 and the upper display device 352, the pachinko machine 1 is played by a player using a structure in which the upper overhanging panel 351 rotates. When not present (during the above-described demonstration state), the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a fixed position, and is used as a member that exhibits advertising functions such as attracting customers by lighting the LED of the upper decorative member 353. Can be. Conversely, when the player plays the game of the pachinko machine 1 (when the above-described demonstration state ends), the upper overhanging panel 351 is in the position after the movement, and an image effect using the upper display device 352 is performed. For example, it can be used as a member that exerts the function of production, so that the movable position of the upper overhanging panel 351 has a function that can be exerted regardless of whether it is in a game or a demonstration state. I have.

  In addition, not limited to the upper display device 352, a touch panel (referred to as an upper touch panel in the present embodiment) may be provided instead of the upper display device 352. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played by the player, or is being played by the player, and in a normal playing state, the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a fixed position, and the upper decorative member 353 emits light. Use it as a member that exhibits the function of advertising by letting it play, etc. Conversely, when playing a game that is being played by a player and the stage of the performance changes according to the operation of the player, for example, overhanging the top By moving the panel 351 to the position after the movement, the panel 351 is moved to a position where the operation on the upper touch panel is possible. Therefore, the panel 351 can be used as an accessory having a function of performing an effect of causing the player to operate the upper touch panel. it can. Accordingly, the function can be varied depending on the position of the upper overhanging panel 351, and a new operation unit can be provided to give the player unexpectedness and surprise, and the player can entertain by operating the upper touch panel. By doing so, it is possible to participate in the effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from actively enjoying the effect and to reduce the interest in the effect. Further, by rotating and moving the upper extension panel 351 so that the upper touch panel can be operated, a special operation effect using a plurality of touch panels such as the upper touch panel and a touch panel 246 described later can be executed. According to such a configuration, the effect mode changes according to the player operation on both the upper touch panel and the touch panel 246, or the effect mode changes according to the player operation on either the upper touch panel or the touch panel 246. It is possible to improve the amusement of amusement as compared with the related art.

  Next, a structure for moving the upper overhang panel 351 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a plan view showing the upper overhanging panel 351 and an upper overhanging rotation mechanism using a gear for rotating the upper overhanging panel 351. FIG. (B) shows a state in which the upper overhang panel 351 is at the position after the movement.

The upper overhang rotation mechanism has an upper overhang panel 351 and an upper gear box 382. The upper gear box 382 rotates the upper overhang panel 351 about an axis in the left-right direction. The display device 352 is moved to a position where the player can visually recognize the display device.
The upper gear box 382 has a front gear 383, a rear gear 384, and a drive motor 385. The upper overhang panel 351 has a left rotation shaft 398 and a right rotation shaft 399.
The left rotation shaft 398 is formed substantially at the center of the left side surface of the upper overhang panel 351, and the right rotation shaft 399 is coaxial with the left rotation shaft 398 and is formed substantially at the center of the right surface of the upper overhang panel 351. . The front gear 383, the rear gear 384, and the drive motor 385 are arranged inside the upper gear box 382. The front gear 383 is connected to the left rotation shaft 398, and the rear gear 384 is connected to the drive motor 385. . The front gear 383 is disposed so as to mesh with the rear gear 384.

  When the upper overhanging panel 351 is moved by the upper overhanging rotation mechanism to a position where the player can visually recognize the upper display device 352 disposed on the upper overhanging panel 351, the rear gear 384 connected to the drive motor 385 is connected to the left side surface. Rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the side. Along with this, the front gear 383 arranged to mesh with the rear gear 384 rotates clockwise in conjunction with it. By rotating the left rotation shaft 398 clockwise with the rotation of the front gear 383, the upper overhanging panel 351 is in the state after the movement.

  Conversely, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is moved by the upper overhanging rotation mechanism to a position where the player cannot see the upper display device 352 disposed on the upper overhanging panel 351, the rear gear 384 is connected to the drive motor 385. Rotates clockwise when viewed from the left side. Along with this, the front gear 383 arranged to mesh with the rear gear 384 rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with it. By rotating the left rotation shaft 398 counterclockwise with the rotation of the front gear 383, the upper overhanging panel 351 is in a state before the movement (fixed position).

  Further, with respect to the rotational movement of the upper overhanging panel 351, when the upper overhanging panel 351 rotationally moves to a position where the player can visually recognize the upper display device 352 disposed on the upper overhanging panel 351, the upper overhanging panel 351 is moved by the player. It is good also as what can adjust the rotation angle of.

  Even if the upper overhanging panel 351 is rotationally moved to a position where the upper display device 352 can be visually recognized by the player, depending on the sitting height of the player who is playing the game, the upper display device 352 emits light such as illumination of a game hall. 352 may be reflected and the displayed image may be difficult to see. In this case, the user may feel the stress due to the inability to enjoy the image effect, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  A rotation sensor (not shown) for detecting the rotation speed of the front gear 383 is provided in the vicinity of the front gear 383 of the above-mentioned upper overhang rotation mechanism. Measure the amount of rotation. The rotation angle of the upper overhang panel 351 can be adjusted by operating the touch panel 246.

  In this example, the amount of rotation of the upper overhang panel 351 after the movement can be set from 0% to 100% in accordance with the operation on the touch panel 246. When it is set to 0%, the upper overhang panel 351 stands straight up at the position after the movement, and the upper display device 352 faces a direction parallel to the ground (default angle). When set to 100%, the upper overhang panel 351 further rotates from the position after the movement, forms an angle of 45 ° from the default angle, and the upper display device 352 faces the player's eyes. . When the player operates the touch panel 246 and sets a value of, for example, 100%, a rotation amount signal having a value of 100% is input from the touch panel 246 to the peripheral control board. Next, the peripheral control board sets and controls the amount of rotation of the upper overhang panel 351 based on the rotation amount signal.

  Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the drive motor 385 and the lower right relay board 281 is inserted into the upper overhanging panel 351 so that the upper overhanging panel 351 is controlled by the peripheral control board. ing.

[Second Embodiment of Upper Overhanging Panel]
The movable operation of the upper overhanging panel 351 is not limited to the one that rotates and moves as long as the function is different before and after the movement of the upper overhanging panel 351. The movable structure of the upper overhanging panel 351 in this example is configured so that the upper overhanging panel 351 slides vertically with respect to the door frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 232, the upper overhanging panel 351 slides upward. Before moving (fixed position). As shown in FIG. 233, the state where the upper overhanging panel 351 is sliding downward is the state after the movement.

  Further, the upper overhang panel 351 of this example also includes an upper display device 352, an upper decoration member 353, an upper first speaker 354, and an upper second speaker 355. Utilizing a structure in which the upper overhanging panel 351 slides, the upper overhanging panel 351 is fixed when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played by a player or when a game is being played by a player, and in a normal playing state. It is located at a position, and can be used as a device that performs a light emitting effect using the upper decorative member 353 or a sound emitting effect using the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355. Conversely, if the player is playing a game and, for example, performs an effect indicating that the probability of developing into the jackpot state is high, or performs an effect indicating that the jackpot state has been reached, the game state may be changed. Slide down accordingly. In this case as well, a sound emission effect using the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355 is performed. However, the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 354 are slid downward as the upper overhanging panel 351 slides. Since the position at which the sound is emitted from the speaker 355 also changes, the way in which the sound is heard is different from that in the state in which the sound is sliding upward. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the way of hearing the sound is changing, to amplify the sense of expectation for the jackpot, etc., and to improve the interest in the game.

  An upper third speaker 356 is disposed behind the upper overhanging panel 351. When the upper overhanging panel 351 is slid upward, the upper third speaker 356 is located at a position overlapping the upper overhanging panel 351 in the front-rear direction. Because it is located, it is invisible and furthermore, when sound is emitted in that state, since the front of the sound emission point is blocked, the player can hear a cluttered sound I have. Further, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is slid downward, the upper third speaker 356 is in a visible state, and when sound is emitted in this state, the front of the sound emitting portion is not blocked. , So that the player can clearly hear the sound. For example, by emitting sound from the upper third speaker 356 while the upper overhanging panel 351 slides downward from above, it is possible to entertain an effect in which the sound is gradually and clearly heard. In addition to the difference in sound, the sliding of the upper overhanging panel 351 can improve the sense of expectation for the jackpot, and can enhance the interest in the game.

  Further, the upper third speaker 356 emits a sound having a different sound quality from the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355 which are always visible. For example, the upper first speaker 354 and the upper When the second speaker 355 outputs a high sound, in addition thereto, outputs a low sound as a so-called woofer speaker, and the upper first speaker 354 and the upper second speaker 355 output a sound with a low sound pressure (small sound). In the case, by outputting different sound such as outputting a sound with a high sound pressure (loud sound), it is possible to give the sound a profound feeling, to increase the thickness in the production, and to improve the entertainment interest of the game It is possible. The sound quality emitted by the upper first speaker 354, the upper second speaker 355, and the upper third speaker 356 may be the same.

  The upper overhanging panel 351 moves in a range of a position where the position before and after the movement (fixed position) and the position after the movement do not overlap with the game area 5a in the front-rear direction regardless of the case of the rotational movement or the sliding movement in the vertical direction. The game area 5a is always visible even if the upper overhanging panel 351 moves, so that the game is not hindered.

  Next, a structure for sliding the upper overhang panel 351 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 (A) is a diagram illustrating an upper extension panel 351 and an upper extension slide mechanism that slides the upper extension panel 351. (B) is a schematic side view showing a state in which the upper extension panel 351 has been slid upward by the upper extension slide mechanism. (C) is a schematic side view showing a state in which the upper extension panel 351 has been slid downward by the upper extension slide mechanism.

  The upper overhang slide mechanism has an upper overhang panel 351, an upper right gear box 371, and an upper left gear box 372. The upper extension panel 351 is slid in the vertical direction by being rotated. Since the structure of the upper right gear box 371 and the upper left gear box 372 are common, the structure of the upper right gear box 371 will be described here, and the detailed description of the upper left gear box 372 will be omitted.

  The upper right gear box 371 has a cam member 373, an upper front gear 374, an upper rear gear 375, an upper drive motor 376, and a slide recess 377. The upper overhang panel 351 has a side recess 379 and a slide projection 378. The upper front gear 374, the upper rear gear 375, and the upper drive motor 376 are disposed inside the upper right gear box 371, the upper rear gear 375 is connected to the upper drive motor 376, and the upper front gear 374 is connected to the upper rear gear 374. It is arranged in mesh with the gear 375. Further, the cam member 373 is arranged outside the upper right gear box 371 and is connected to the rotation shaft of the upper front gear 374.

  The side recess 379 is a recess provided on both side surfaces of the upper overhanging panel 351, and the cam member 373 is disposed inside the side recess 379 so as to face the side recess 379. As shown in FIG. 234 (B), since the side surface of the cam member 373 is in contact with the inner upper surface portion of the side recess 379, the side surface of the cam member 373 farthest from the shaft portion is the inner upper surface portion of the side recess 379. When the upper panel 351 is in contact with the upper panel 351, the upper panel 351 is slid upward (fixed position). In addition, as shown in FIG. 234 (C), when the side surface of the cam member 373 closest to the shaft portion is in contact with the inner upper surface of the side recess 379, the upper overhanging panel 351 is slid downward. Becomes In addition, since the slide projection 378 formed on the upper overhanging panel 351 is fitted with the slide recess 377 formed on the upper right gearbox 371, the angle of the upper overhanging panel 351 is fixed, and the upper overhanging panel 351 is vertically moved without rattling. It is possible to slide it straight.

[Third Embodiment of Upper Overhanging Panel]
In the present embodiment, the movable structure of the upper overhanging panel 351 is not limited to the entire upper overhanging panel 351 being movable as described above. A structure in which the surface (hereinafter, the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a) is rotatable can be exemplified.

  The upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a of this example is configured to be rotatable with respect to the upper overhanging panel 351. As shown in FIG. 235, the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is accommodated in the upper portion of the upper overhanging panel 351. The state where the disposed upper display device 352 is invisible to the player is before movement (fixed position), and as shown in FIG. 236, the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is standing up, and the disposed upper The state where the display device 352 is at an angle that can be visually recognized by the player is the state after the movement.

  Before the movement of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a, the upper display device 352 is invisible and the upper decoration member 353 faces the player. After the movement, the upper display device 352 is positioned so as to be visible to the player, so that in addition to the light emission effect by the upper decoration member 353, a display effect such as displaying an image can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to switch the effect that can be executed by rotating the upper projecting upper surface portion 351a in accordance with the game state, that is, to change the device for the wave height effect and the device for the display effect to the upper projecting panel 351. Is also used.

  In addition, before the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is rotated (fixed position), the upper display device 352 is in a position invisible to a sitting player, so the upper display device 352 is used during the game. When performing an effect, a display effect such as displaying an image after rotating the upper overhang panel 351 to a position where the upper display device 352 can be visually recognized is performed. This makes it possible to surprise the player in an unusual production mode and to enjoy an unexpected production, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The movement of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is, for example, a game being played by a player. In a normal game state, the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is positioned at a fixed position, and when a normal effect is performed by the peripheral control board, the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is moved upward. It can be used as a movable object for performing a light decoration effect by a light emitting member such as an LED arranged on the decoration member 353. Conversely, when the player is playing a game, for example, performing an effect indicating that the probability of developing into the jackpot state is high, or performing an effect indicating that the jackpot state has occurred, the upper display device 352 is displayed. The upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is rotationally moved to a position at which the player can visually recognize the image, and in addition to the light emission effect by the upper decoration member 353, an image is displayed on the upper display device 352, etc., for example, to suggest a result of the success or failure to the player. It can be used as a movable object that performs display effects such as. Accordingly, the function is different depending on the position of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a. In addition, the upper display device 352 may be surprised to the player by appearing from a place where the player cannot view the part to a place where the player can view the part. It is possible to improve the interest in the game.
In this embodiment, an upper touch panel may be used instead of the upper display device 352.

  Next, a structure for rotating the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a diagram illustrating an upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a of the upper overhanging panel 351 and an upper surface rotating mechanism that rotates the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a. (A) is a side view showing the state where the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is located at a fixed position. (B) is a side view showing a state where the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a has risen upward by the upper surface portion rotating mechanism.

  The upper surface rotating mechanism has an upper overhanging upper surface 351a and a gear mechanism, and the gear mechanism rotates and rotates about the rotation shaft 344 of the upper overhanging upper surface 351a, and is disposed on the upper overhanging upper surface 351a. The upper display device 352 is moved to a position where the player can visually recognize the upper display device 352. The gear mechanism has an upper shaft gear 341, a rear gear 342, and a drive motor 343. The upper surface shaft gear 341 is connected to the rotation shaft 344 of the upper projecting upper surface portion 351a, and the rear gear 342 is connected to the drive motor 343. The upper surface shaft gear 341 is arranged so as to mesh with the rear gear 342.

  When moving the upper overhanging upper surface 351a to a position where the player can visually recognize the upper display device 352 arranged on the upper overhanging upper surface 351a by the upper surface rotating mechanism, the rear gear 342 connected to the drive motor 343. Rotates clockwise. Along with this, the upper shaft gear 341 arranged to mesh with the rear gear 342 rotates counterclockwise in conjunction therewith. With the rotation of the front gear 383, the upper projecting upper surface portion 351a rises around the rotation shaft 344, and the receiving portions 348, 349 formed on the upper projecting panel 351 contact the upper projecting upper surface portion 351a, The structure is such that it is located after the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a moves.

  Conversely, when the upper overhanging portion 351a is moved by the upper surface rotating mechanism to a position (fixed position) at which the player cannot visually recognize the upper display device 352 disposed on the upper overhanging upper surface 351a. Is rotated counterclockwise. Accordingly, the upper shaft gear 341 arranged to mesh with the rear gear 342 rotates clockwise in conjunction therewith. With the rotation of the front gear 383, the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a falls down to a fixed position about the rotation shaft 344, so that the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a moves to the fixed position.

  In addition, an upper overhanging lid 358 is provided at a position facing the bottom surface of the upper overhanging upper surface 351a, and has a function of supporting when the upper overhanging upper surface 351a is at a fixed position. In addition, when the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is in the position after the movement, the upper overhanging panel 351 has a function of preventing dust and dirt from entering the player as well as foreign matter.

  Further, regarding the rotational movement of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a, when the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is rotationally moved to a position where the player can visually recognize the upper display device 352 disposed on the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a, The rotation angle of the overhanging upper surface portion 351a may be adjustable.

  Even if the upper display portion 351 is rotated and moved to a position where the upper display device 352 can be visually recognized by the player, depending on the angle viewed from the player playing the game, the light such as the illumination of the game hall or the pachinko machine 1 May be reflected by the upper display device 352, and the displayed image may be difficult to visually recognize. In this case, there is a possibility that the user may feel stress due to the inability to enjoy the image effect despite the rotation of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a, and the interest in the game may be reduced. In this example, this is solved.

  A rotation sensor (not shown) for detecting the rotation speed of the rear gear 342 is provided near the rear gear 342 of the above-described upper surface rotation mechanism, and the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351 a is determined by the rotation speed of the rear gear 342. Measure the amount of rotation. The rotation angle of the upper overhanging upper surface 351 a can be adjusted by operating the touch panel 246.

  The amount of rotation of the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a after the movement can be set from 0% to 100% in this example according to the operation on the touch panel 246. When it is set to 0%, the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a comes into contact with the receiving portions 348 and 349 when the upper overhanging upper surface portion 351a is in the position after the movement (default angle). When the setting is set to 100%, the upper overhang panel 351 is rotated from the position at the default angle to the upright state, and the upper display device 352 faces the horizontal direction. When the player operates the touch panel 246 and sets a value of, for example, 100%, a rotation amount signal having a value of 100% is input from the touch panel 246 to the peripheral control board. Next, the peripheral control board sets and controls the amount of rotation of the upper projecting upper surface 351a based on the rotation amount signal.

  The embodiment of the upper overhanging panel 351 has been described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another example in which a plurality of upper overhanging panels 351 are provided above the door frame may be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG. 238, the upper overhanging panels 351 are arranged side by side on the upper part of the door frame 3. The left and right upper overhanging panels 351 may also be configured to be rotatable and move as described above, and drive the respective upper overhanging panels 351 using the upper gearbox 382 disposed therebetween. Thereby, for example, each upper overhanging panel 351 is rotated and moved so that the player can visually recognize the upper display device 352, a character image or the like is displayed on both the left and right upper display devices 352, and the upper first speaker is displayed. The effect variation is more ambiguous than in the case where only one upper overhanging panel 351 is used, such as performing an effect such that character images have a conversation using the upper second speaker 355 and the upper second speaker 355. It can prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper overhanging panel 351 having different functions between the two surfaces of the upper display device 352 and the upper decorative member 353 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Three or more surfaces whose functions change as the 351 rotates may be provided.
For example, when the upper overhanging panel 351 is rotatable 360 degrees around the left-right direction, different upper decoration members 353 are arranged on each surface, and the surface which can be visually recognized by the player according to the progress of the game is changed to 1 The four upper overhanging panels 351 can provide the player with four patterns of decorations, and furthermore, the player can be expected to hit the jackpot with four patterns of decorations so that the player can enjoy the pattern. When the upper decorative member 353 is visually recognized, the player can feel delighted, and it is possible to keep the interest expected of the game high.

  The members provided on the upper overhanging panel 351 are not limited to the upper decorative member 353, the upper display device 352, the upper first speaker 354, and the upper second speaker 355. For example, different modeling objects (dolls, etc.) can be visually recognized from each surface of the upper overhanging panel 351, and the upper overhanging panel 351 moves (rotates) in the left-right direction so that the player can visually recognize the modeling. The thing may change. Specifically, the upper overhanging panel 351 has three or more surfaces facing the player direction by rotational movement, the inside of which is hollow to form a space capable of accommodating a plurality of modeling objects, and further, the upper decorative member Each surface of 353 is provided with a window through which at least one of the objects stored therein can be viewed. Then, by rotating the upper overhanging panel 351 to change the surface facing the player, the modeled object visible to the player is changed. In addition, as the modeled object housed inside the upper overhanging panel 351, for example, “a game machine that is visible from the first surface of the upper overhanging panel 351 (visible from the window portion of the first surface)” A character modeling object as a motif (first modeling object) "and" Right-handed notification that can be visually recognized from the second surface of the upper overhanging panel 351 (visible from the window portion of the second surface). Right arrow shaped object (second shaped object) "and" left arrow notifying left hitting that can be visually recognized from the third surface of upper overhanging panel 351 (visible from the window on the third surface). In the case where the upper overhanging panel 351 is rotated and moved according to the progress of the game to function as a decoration means for the outside (the first molded object is visible). With the other side facing the player) When the player functions as assist means (means for suggesting the direction in which the game ball should be driven) that informs the player of a game method that does not hurt the player (a surface in which the second and third objects can be visually recognized faces the player). State) can be exemplified. The upper overhanging panel 351 functions as an assist means as a game state in which a left-handed game described later or a game state in which a right-handed game described later is performed, until the game state ends or the game state. Until the predetermined period (elapse of a predetermined time or execution of a predetermined number of fluctuations) has elapsed since the start of the game, the peripheral control is performed so that the surface corresponding to the game state is maintained in a state facing the player. It can be exemplified that the substrate controls the upper overhang panel 351. In addition, other than the above-described ones, a design sheet on which a predetermined decorative design is drawn, a plate on which a message or the like is drawn, or the like may be appropriately selected and adopted.

[3-1. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as viewed from below.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit when disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit disassembled and viewed from below. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit when disassembled and viewed from above. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit disassembled and viewed from below. 40 is a plan view of the plate unit, FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the BB section in FIG. 40, and FIG. 42 is an effect operation in the CC section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 43 (a) is a front view of the lower right effect unit of the plate unit, FIG. 43 (b) is a right side view of the lower right effect unit, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is the perspective view seen from the back of the door lower right production unit. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the door lower right effect unit of FIG. 43B taken along the line DD. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the lower right door effect unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit of the lower right door effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating body internal unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 (a) is a front view of a state where the lower-right rotating body of the door of the lower-right door effect unit faces forward, and FIG. 50 (b) is a front view of a state where the lower-right rotating body of the door faces rearward.

  FIG. 51 (a) is a perspective view of the dish unit with the upper dish removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 51 (b) is a perspective view of the dish with the upper dish removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper tray removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the upper tray removing unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 54 (a) is a perspective view of the lower dish removing unit seen from the front, and FIG. 54 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish removing unit seen from the front.

  Dish unit 200 bulges from the door frame base unit 100 forward. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and driven into the game area 5a, and a game provided below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201. balls and a, a lower tray 202 capable of storing the. Also, the dish unit 200, a flat dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100, the upper left side of the left-right center with attached to the front upper part of the dish unit base 210 has largely bulged forward dish 201 And a lower plate main body 214 attached to the lower center of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 at the left and right centers and greatly swelling forward to form the lower plate 202. .

  Further, the plate unit 200 covers the front and lower sides of the effect operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate main body 212 and the front surface of the plate unit base 210, and the upper and lower plate main body 212, the lower plate main body 214, and the effect operation unit. a dish unit cover 260 attached to the front of the tray unit base 210, a door lower right direction unit 270 attached to the front right portion of the tray unit base 210 is disposed on the right side of the staging operation unit 220, the door lower right direction unit The effect unit cover 300 which covers the front side of the plate unit 270 and is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210, and the game balls which are attached so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from front and rear and are stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212. And a lower portion of the lower plate main body 214 for extracting the upper plate into the lower plate 202. Mounted it includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the plate unit 200 is mounted on the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220, and a ball rental operation unit 330 for operating a ball rental machine disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall; An upper plate top decoration member 340 that is mounted on the upper portion of the unit base 210 and can be illuminated and decorated, and is mounted on the left side of the front of the plate unit base 210 behind the plate unit cover 260 so that light can be emitted forward. The dish unit left decorative board 345 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and the rear side of the effect unit cover 300 and the lower right side of the effect unit 270, are attached to the front right side of the dish unit base 210 and are directed forward. A dish unit right decorative board 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and a dish unit base 210 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 A decorative board 233 before the upper plate, a decorative substrate 235 after the upper plate, an upper liquid crystal substrate 241, a vibrating device 242, a touch panel 246, an effect button decorative substrate 251, an effect button pressing sensor 258, a lower right relay board 281 to be described later, A dish unit left decorative board 345 and a dish unit relay board 347 that relays connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and a peripheral control board (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

[3-1a. Dish unit base]
29 and 30, the plate unit base 210 of the plate unit 200 extends left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. Dish unit base 210 comprises an upper pan ball supply opening 210a extending cylindrical rearward and extends through the back and forth near the front view the upper left corner, through back and forth below the upper tray ball supply port 210a A speaker slit 210b comprising a plurality of elongated holes extending upward and downward, a lower tray ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and rearward and extending rearward in a lower portion at the lower left and right center of the front view, and a lower tray upper extends vertically and extends through the front and rear as viewed from the front right upper side of the ball supply port 210c is provided with a pan ball feed port 210d on which is located at the right end of the upper tray body 212.

  Further, the dish unit base 210 has a rectangular opening 210e which penetrates forward and backward on the left side in the front view of the upper dish ball sending port 210d, and a receiving plate projecting forward from the lower side of the opening 210e in a plate shape. A piece 210f, an escape opening 210g that penetrates forward and backward at the upper right side of the upper bowl sending port 210d in front view, and a handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 that penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view are inserted. Handle insertion opening 210h, a cylinder insertion opening 210i that penetrates the front and rear near the right corner in front view and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a right front view right side of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply opening 210c. And a notch 210j which is cut out from the rear end toward the front side.

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200 has a left-hand side that is larger than the left-right center in front view and bulges forward, and is formed in a container shape opened upward and backward. ing. Upper tray body 212, game ball has been seen opened leftward and backward in front view the right end side is provided with a guide channel portion 212a can flow. The upper plate body 212 is inclined such that the bottom surface is entirely lower at the right end. More specifically, when the upper plate main body 212 is attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is positioned from the lower side of the upper plate ball supply port 210a to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It is inclined to become lower toward the slightly lower position than the outer diameter of. Thereby, the game balls discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate main body 212, and the received game balls can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed port 210d.

  In addition, the upper plate main body 212 includes a metal grounding member 212b extending from the left and right center to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the grounding metal 212b is electrically grounded (grounded), so that the static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed by contact with the game ball.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the lower plate main body 214 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a trapezoidal shape in plan view with a rear end side longer than a front end side, and is formed in a container shape with upper and rear sides opened. The lower plate main body 214 has a ball hole 214a vertically penetrating through the bottom surface and can be closed by the lower plate hole removing unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball hole 214a. are doing. The lower plate main body 214 can receive and store the game balls discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit base 210, and transfer the game balls from the ball hole 214a to below the plate unit 200. Can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the plate unit base 210 and the upper plate main body 212 at the center in the right and left directions when viewed from the front, and is attached to the attachment base unit 220A. A touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C mounted on the mounting base unit 220A on the left side of the touch unit 220B in a front view, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A. , A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer peripheries of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end of the attachment base unit 220A in a front view.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed at the center in the axial direction on the outer peripheral surface over the entire circumference. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can alleviate the impact when the touch unit 220B is hit to reduce the load (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220 or the dish unit base 210, and also describe the touch unit 220B described later. The transmission of the vibration by the vibrating device 242 to the mounting base unit 220 and the dish unit base 210 can be reduced.

[3-1d-1. Mounting the base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A of the staging operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and has a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 having an open upper side. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and whose rear end is attached to the front end of the upper plate main body 212 and whose upper part is open to accommodate the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate which is attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A front lens member 232, a front plate decoration substrate 233 provided between the front plate member 232 and the unit case 231 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a unit cover covering the front side of the front plate lens member 232. And a translucent upper plate front decoration member 234 attached to the 224.

  The mounting base unit 220A includes a top loading after decorative substrate 235 having a plurality of LED capable of irradiating light upward is attached to the rear end of the unit case 231, the upper post upper tray decorated substrate 235 an upper dish after decoration member 236 having translucency attached to a unit cover 224 is arranged, from the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 and upper tray after decoration substrate 235 sandwiched by the front side after top tray decorative member 236 A linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light to emit light linearly, a cylindrical button mounting member 238 mounted on the unit cover 224 on the right side in front view of the upper decorative member 236, and a button mounting member 238, which is provided so as to be slidable up and down by 238.

  Mounting base 230, the front substantially from the middle of the front and rear, and spaced horizontally penetrates a flat mounting side receiving portion 230a which is inclined to become lower toward the front, a mounting side receiving portion 230a two It has two through-holes 230b and a cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the peripheral edge of the through-hole 230b. Through hole 230b is the inner periphery are formed in a rectangular shape. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed downward (see FIG. 42). More specifically, in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, the front inner peripheral wall extends substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a, and the rear inner peripheral wall is lower than the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a. It is inclined and extends forward as it goes. Further, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to the vertical of the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a.

  Unit case 231 includes a housing recess 231a capable of accommodating a touch unit 220B is open upward, accommodating a front view the left and right ends near the bottom surface of the recess 231a to protrude apart in the longitudinal respectively in a cylindrical shape upward in pairs A horizontal support pin 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a and projecting upward from the vicinity of the bottom end of the housing recess 231a. and includes a central support protrusion 231d protruding upward, and two 受突 portion 231e spaced in the lateral protrudes pyramidal shape so narrowed toward downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the receiving recess 231a, the .

  Further, the unit case 231 penetrates vertically in a circular shape on the left side as viewed from the front with respect to the accommodation recess 231a, and is disposed around an insertion hole 231f through which a lower portion of the button unit 220C is inserted, and an insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends left and right on the rear outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the housing recess 231a and are recessed downward from the upper end are arranged. Notch 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a plan view shape formed by combining a rectangle extending left and right and a trapezoid protruding outward from both left and right sides of the rectangle. Further, in the housing recess 231a, the bottom surface of the rectangular portion is formed to be lower downward than the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion on both the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (length in the axial direction) of the damper 222.

  Four horizontal support pins 231b protrude from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion upward in the accommodation recess 231a, and is insertably formed into cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated conical tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 41). The horizontal support pin 231b has a distance from the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a to the middle of the tapered portion 231i equal to the length of the damper 222, and is formed to be longer than the entire damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222, and are formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the housing recess 231a. The outer periphery of the receiving portion 231e is formed in the shape of a truncated cone having a quadrangular shape. Two 受突 portion 231e is formed at a position corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving protrusion 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and is inclined such that the rear outer wall goes forward with respect to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. And extending. In addition, the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides of the receiving protrusion 231e are inclined and extend so that the lower ends (tips) thereof are slightly closer to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted into the through hole 230a of the mounting base 231 and a slight gap is formed between the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving section 230c.

  The front plate decorative member 234 has a front surface exposed to the outside when the plate unit 200 is assembled. The post-plate decoration board 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for light-emitting decoration of the post-plate decoration member 236, and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for light-emitting decoration of the linear light-emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right than the decoration member 236 after the dish, and a light receiving section 237a and a light receiving section 237a are arranged above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the decoration board 235 after the dish. And a plate-shaped linear light-emitting portion 237b that is continuously fitted into the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. Linear light-emitting lens member 237, by fitting the linear light-emitting portion 237b in the notch 231h of the unit case 231, the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the accommodation recess 231a. In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light-emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside when the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive light from the peripheral LED 235b at the light-receiving portion 237a, guide the light received by the light-receiving portion 237a to the linear light-emitting portion 237b, and generate light of the linear light-emitting portion 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper countersunk button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable up and down, and includes an extension piece 239a extending below the button attachment member 238. By pushing down the upper bowl removing button 239, the upper bowl removing unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper bowl 201 from the upper bowl 201 to the lower bowl 202 (pull out). )be able to.

  Mounting base unit 220A is the damper 222 that are respectively inserted into four horizontal support pins 231b and two front support pins 231c, it is possible to support the touch unit 220B elastically. Further, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two receiving protrusions 231e projecting below the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is mounted, and the mounting base 230 into which the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. forming a slight gap between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. Thus, when a force (shock) such that the unit case 231 moves downward from the touch unit 220B side is not immediately transmitted to the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is stored. The bottom surface of the concave portion 231a bends downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving portion 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, so that the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when transmitting the force from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the bending can reduce the force to some extent and transmit the force to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving portion 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to a surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). As a result, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving portion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in a direction along the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. I do. Thereby, the force from the receiving portion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it is possible to prevent a large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. .

[3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the touch unit 220B of the staging operation unit 220 has a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 with an open upper part, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 mounted in the lower case 240 from above, In the lower case 240, a pair of vibrating devices 242 arranged on both left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and a pair of vibrating devices 242 and the upper plate of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are attached and mounted on the lower case 240 and , A shallow box-shaped base member 243, an upper liquid crystal display device 244 inserted into the base member 243 from above and capable of displaying an image controlled by the upper liquid crystal substrate 241, and an upper liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-shaped grounding metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the grounding metal fitting 245 and the upper surface of the upper liquid crystal display device 244. And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In a state where the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 are assembled, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surface thereof. extends over substantially the entire length of the left and right rear end surface of the case 240 or the like, comprising a sheet-like waterproof seal 248 having a waterproof pasted in a rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243 and the upper cover 247 ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a plate-shaped protrusion 240b protruding in a trapezoidal shape from each of the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and an outer diameter of the damper 222 for each of the protrusions 240b. some with penetrates vertically at the same inner shape and a pair of damper mounting recess 240c formed spaced apart in the longitudinal are open in the lateral direction outwardly protrudes from the inner circumferential surface of the damper mounting recess 240c and And a vibrating device mounting portion 240e that is disposed near the substrate mounting portion 240a between the pair of damper mounting concave portions 240c of the protruding portion 240b and to which the vibrating device 242 is mounted.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 has a C-shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C-shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided substantially at the center of the upper and lower portions of the damper mounting concave portion 240c and over the entire periphery of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting concave portion 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b whose center of gravity is eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a. The vibrator 242, the vibration driven motor 242a by rotating the spindle 242b, it is possible to generate vibration.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting concave portion 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box, an extending portion 243b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting concave portion 243a, A screw hole 243c which penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting concave portion 240c of the lower case 240 at an end of the extension portion 243b, and is formed at a lower end side of the screw hole 243c with a large-diameter counter bore. And a C-chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 41) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 can pass through the tip side of the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231, and the base end side (lower side) of the tapered portion 231i. it is formed to a size that can not pass through.

  The touch panel 246 includes tempered glass that is strong against impact and is not easily broken, a transparent sensor sheet of a capacitance type provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The touch unit 220B can mount the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the open side of the C-shape into the damper mounting concave portions 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240d protruding from the inner circumferential surface of the damper mounting recess 240c is inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222. Thus, the damper 222 in damper mounting recess 240c is to move in the axial direction is restricted. When the damper 222 is attached to the damper attachment recess 240 c, the upper end of the damper 222 contacts the lower surface of the extension 243 b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. projects.

  The touch unit 220B is vibration driven motor 242a of the pair of vibrator 242 is held between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibrating devices 242 can generate vibrations independently of each other.

  The touch unit 220B can visually recognize the image displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 from the upper side through the touch panel 246. Then, an image of a button or the like is displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the button of the image can be operated by touching the touch panel 246 so that the player operates the button of the image.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B has the prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the plate unit 200, the liquid is prevented from entering the touch unit 220B. can be prevented, it is possible to touch unit 220B is prevented from being damaged by the penetration of the liquid.

[3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the button unit 220C of the staging operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the attachment base unit 220A, and An effect button decoration board 251 provided on the side and provided with an LED on the upper surface, and a board cover 252 which covers the lower side of the effect button decoration board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250 are provided.

  The button unit 220 </ b> C includes a cylindrical button base 253 inserted into the unit main body 250 so as to be slidable from above to below, and a button base 253 disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250 to attach the button base 253 upward. a spring member 254 to energize a light guide member 255 light capable of directing upward from the LED is inserted into the button base 253 performance button decorative substrate 251, a plurality is disposed on the upper side of the light guide member 255 minute a prism sheet-like diffusing lens member 256 having a, a disc performance button 257 on having translucency that is attached to the button base 253 covers the upper side of the diffusion lens member 256, attached to the upper surface of the performance button decorative substrate 251 And an effect button press sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the lower end.

  Unit body 250, and three mounting piece 250a attached to the rolled out button unit mounting portion 231g outward from the lower end of the outer circumferential surface, a flange-like ledge 250b extending from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface inward And a pair of through-holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  Button base 253, a cylindrical lower tubular portion 253a that is inserted into the inner periphery of the ledge portion 250b, an upper cylindrical portion 253b of the conical tubular shape having a diameter gradually increases toward the upper end of the lower tubular portion 253a upward, upper A claw extending downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b and having a lower end capable of penetrating through the through hole 250c of the unit main body 250 and protruding outward from the lower end and capable of engaging (contacting) with the lower surface of the unit main body 250. And a pair of engaging claws 253c having an outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b and radially protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b so as to be shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end. comprising a plurality of flat plate-like contact piece 253d, and the detection piece 253e to be detected from the outer circumferential surface of the lower cylindrical portion 253a and the upper tubular portion 253b in which performance button pressing sensor 258 extends into a flat plate outwardly, the There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by a plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 has a disk-shaped main body portion 255a to be fitted on top of the upper tubular portion 253b of the button base 253, extends from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower tubular portion 253a of the button base 253 downwardly And a plurality of columnar light guides 255b. The plurality of light guides 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration board 251 and can guide the light from the LEDs and emit the light from the entire upper surface of the main body 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusion lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down inside the unit body 250 together. it can. These button base 253, etc., by the biasing force of the spring member 254, the upper surface of the upper tray performance button 257 protrudes upward from the upper end of the unit body 250, a pair of engaging pawls 253c is the unit body of the button base 253 By engaging with the lower surface of 250, further elevation is restricted, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are located at the elevation end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button press sensor 258. The pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 contact the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250, and further lowering is restricted. , The upper plate effect button 257 and the like are located at the lower end.

  Moreover, the button unit 220C, by which emission of the LED of the performance button decorative substrate 251 can emit light decorated upper tray performance button 257. The LED of the effect button decoration board 251 is a full-color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be illuminated in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 41, the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240 c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220 </ b> B in the assembled state, as shown in FIG. Also project downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four lateral support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surfaces of the counterbored portions of the screw holes 243c of the base member 243, and are located above the touch unit 220B with respect to the lateral support pins 231b. The movement is restricted by the flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Also, the horizontal support pins 231b of the upper tapered portion is formed on the side 231i, and the screw hole 243c of the lower tapered portion formed at the side 243d of the base member 243, are separated from each other.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, the effect operation unit 220 is configured such that the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the lateral support pin 231b. It protrudes upward. Further, the bottom surface of the receiving recess 231a of the unit case 231, since a gap is formed between the lower surface of the lower case 240, and the upper surface of the damper 222 is inserted into the front support pins 231c of the unit case 231, the lower It is formed a gap in between the lower surface of the case 240. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is the damper 222 that is inserted into the left and right sides of the horizontal support pins 231b, are mounted in a state in which the lower surface is suspended in the air to the mounting base unit 220A.

  Additionally, staging operation unit 220, 窄 in pyramid tubular cylindrical receiving portion 230c which narrowed downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base units 220A, downwards in the unit case 231 of the touch unit 220B from the upper side is attached The lower end of the round pyramid-shaped receiving projection 231e is inserted. And the inner circumferential wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, is formed between the outer peripheral wall of 受突 portion 231e, and a slight gap is formed. Thus, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 while the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the accommodation recess 231a) is floating in the air.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 31 and the like, in the effect operation unit 220, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 along the rear side near the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B has a linear shape ( It is exposed in the form of a band. The length of the upper end of the linear light-emitting portion 237b is approximately 2/3 of the length of the side after the touch unit 220B. The upper plate rear decoration member 236 is arranged behind the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper plate ball removal button 239 is disposed on the right side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 in a front view. Further, the front view left touch unit 220B, the button unit 220C is disposed.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to a game state that changes by hitting a game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying the image on a plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the touch unit 220B, it is possible to entertain presented through the transparent touch panel 246 image (effect image) to the player.

  As an image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating an operation button is displayed, and detection of a touch by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be received, so that an image of the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper tray the liquid crystal display device 244 during the presentation using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, it is possible to display various images.

  Also, the staging operation unit 220, for supporting in a state of being floated from the unit case 231 touch unit 220B by a plurality of dampers 222, by operating the vibrating unit 242 according to the playing state, the touch unit 220B it can be vibrated. By vibrating the touch panel 246 (the touch unit 220B) with the vibration device 242 at the time of the production using the touch panel 246, the vibration by the vibration device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. By transmitting the information, the player can be surprised by the illusion that the player is operating a physical operation button even though the player is operating the operation button on the image. Can be prevented from being degraded by making the player entertain.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the button unit 220C is provided on the left side in the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player is caused to press the upper plate effect button 257 according to the game state, and the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, although the operation buttons of the image on the touch panel 246 only disturb the touch panel 246, they have a disliked lack of operational feeling compared to the actual operation buttons. since it is, without thereby giving uncomfortable feeling to the operation of the upper tray performance button 257, the operation of the upper tray performance button 257 can entertain comfortable, interest in the game can be inhibited from reduction .

  Since this effect operation unit 220 is arranged in the portion of the plate unit 200 that is bulging forward and provided with the upper plate 201, the game operation can be performed even during a stage other than during the effect using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. The user may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of being floated from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 is increased. The impact can be absorbed to some extent by the force. More specifically, when an impact (load) acts on the touch unit 220B from the top, such as being hit, the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the damper 222 into which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted. Is compressed. By damper 222 which is supported on the transverse support pin 231b is compressed, the shock from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 contacts the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B descends. The damper 222 is compressed downward. Thus, the shock from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces on both left and right sides of the housing recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. Thus, the impact from the touch unit 220B is, not via a plurality of dampers 222, and to act directly from the touch unit 220B to unit case 231.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 by the load from the central supporting projection 231d becomes the flex so that its center moves downward. By the elastic force due to bending of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed. When the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is bent, the pair of receiving portions 231e projecting downward from below the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, the impact from the touch unit 220B when 受突 portion 231e is further lowered, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of 受突 portion 231e is brought into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, from touch unit 220B The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are formed in the shape of a pyramid that narrows downward, respectively, from the receiving portion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (the mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is dispersed and transmitted in a direction along the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and in a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is arranged in multiple layers before the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. to can be alleviated, by the impact, it is possible to touch unit 220B, unit case 231, the mounting base 230 such unlikely damage.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 220 includes a linear light-emitting portion of a linear light-emitting lens member 237 extending along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the upper decoration board 235 according to the game state. The upper end of 237b can emit light linearly. Accordingly, the player's interest can attract it to touch units 220B and decrease interest entertaining images and displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect or the like using the touch panel 246 Can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the playing state, thereby emitting decorated top loading post ornamental member 236 disposed on the (rear side of the linear light-emitting portion 237b) the rear side of the touch panel 220B by decorative LED235a after top dish decorated substrate 235 be able to. By causing the upper and emission decorated dishes after decoration member 236, similarly to the light emission of the linear light-emitting portion 237b of the linear light-emitting lens member 237, attracts it interest of the player to the staging operation unit 220 such as a touch unit 220B can be, interest to delight effect presented by staging operation unit 220 can be suppressed.

  Further, the touch unit 220B having the upper tray crystal substrate 241 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the mounting base unit by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of 220A, the dish under the covering portion 262 on which will be described later, of the dish unit cover 260 And a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Accordingly, even when water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). In addition, it is possible to prevent the dewed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and to prevent a trouble from occurring in the touch unit 220B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, the post-plate decoration substrate 235 for decorating the post-plate decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 with light emission is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the plate 201. It is not exposed to the water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as short circuit and corrosion on the decorative substrate 235 after the upper plate.

[3-1e. Dish unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 27 to 30, the plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 extends right and left, and the center of the left and right bulges forward, and is formed in a shell shape opened rearward. . Dish unit cover 260 includes a lower tray openings 261 rear is open forward at the left and right substantially in the center of is closed by the disc unit base 210, the top plate side of the inner peripheral wall of the lower tray openings 261 (upper side) a dish under the covering portion 262 on which covers the lower side of the upper tray body 212 and staging operation unit 220 forms a bass speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 is disposed on the front view left lower tray openings 261 A speaker grill 263 for transmitting sound from the speaker, a dish unit left decorative member 264 arranged above the speaker grill 263 and illuminated by the dish unit left decorative board 345, and arranged on the right side of the lower dish opening 261 in a front view. a handle opening 265 rear passes the handle body 502 of which the handle unit 500 is, by forming a bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  The lower plate opening 261 is closed on the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall by the lower plate main body 214. The speaker grill 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of a punched metal having a plurality of holes formed in a metal plate.

  The plate unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and has a rough surface on the right side. In addition, the right side in the front view has substantially the whole translucency.

  When the plate unit cover 260 is assembled to the plate unit 200, a gap is formed between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower cover portion 262 so as to be gripped by one hand. Accordingly, when the player performs a touch operation on the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261 and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

  More specifically, in an assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the lower cover portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the lower cover portion 262 The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is approximately 50 mm, and the distance before and after the front end of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 from the rear end of the touch unit 220B is approximately 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. This allows the player to grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the lower cover 262 with the hand of the player.

[3-1f. Door lower right direction unit]
The lower right effect unit 270 of the plate unit 200 is disposed above the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, as shown in FIGS. It has a spherical door 270A at the bottom right of the spherical door for luminous decoration. The lower right door effect unit 270 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210 so as to close the escape opening 210g and rotatably supports the lower right door 270A, and is attached to the unit base 271. A lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 meshed with the drive gear 273 and attached to the lower right rotator 270 </ b>A; A shaft member 275 rotatably supporting the gear 274 and attached to the unit base 271.

  Furthermore, the door lower right direction unit 270 includes a rotary section bearing member 276 and a driven gear 274 which is rotatably supported on the unit base 271 is mounted on the opposite side of the door bottom right rotator 270A, the door lower right rotation of the rotary member and the base side bearing member 277 rotatably supports in cooperation with the unit base 271 opposite to the driven gear 274 of 270A, the door lower right rotator 270A is attached to the unit base 271 position and two rotation detecting sensor 278 that can detect, the decorative member 279 is attached to the unit base 271 in a front view the left door bottom right rotator 270A, the front is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271 a plurality of LED a door lower right base decorated substrate 280 having a door lower right drive motor 272 is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, times It includes a detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decorative board 280, and a door lower right relay board 281 that relays connection between a door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 described later and a peripheral control board (not shown). .

  Door bottom right rotator 270A is s respectively constitute an outer shell with hemispherical before shell member 285 and Kosotokara member 286, is being arranged between the front outer shell member 285 and Kosotokara member 286 a rotating body internal unit 290, and a. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are respectively formed with semicircular cutouts 285a and 286a around the rotation axis. Front outer shell member 285, a hemispherical surface having a light-transmitting property, a band decoration 285b extending strip circumferentially has a metallic luster, heart-shaped, which is arranged in the center of the band decorative 285b Heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, Kosotokara member 286, a hemispherical surface having a light-transmitting property, and a band decorative 286b extending strip circumferentially has a metallic luster. When the front shell member 285 and the rear shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear shell member 286 are connected to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the rotator internal unit 290 includes a disc-shaped lower right rotator decoration board 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both surfaces, and a center of the lower right rotator decoration board 291. The first fixed shaft member 292 and the first fixed shaft member 292 which extend vertically to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275 are It is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotator decoration board 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotator decoration board 291, and its tip is attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. And the second fixed shaft member 293. Although not shown, a wiring code for connecting the lower right relay board 281 and the lower right rotating body decorative board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  The rotating body inner unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and is a flat, annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A first glare-shaped reflector 295 attached to the reflector base 294 and opened to the outside in the axial direction in an annular shape, and a hexagonal center attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular shape of the first reflector 295. A second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of radially extending flat ribs.

  The rotating body internal unit 290, a door lower right rotator decorative substrate 291, the first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, the reflector base 294, first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296, It is relatively rotatably separated from each other.

  Unit base 271, plate-shaped and annular ring portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door bottom right rotator 270A, from the site of the front view obliquely upper right with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a to the front Of the first protruding piece 271b, the second protruding piece 271c protruding forward from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first protruding piece 271b, and the second protruding piece 271c. And a bearing groove 271d into which the front end of the second fixed shaft member 293 is recessed in a U-shape from the front end to the rear.

  Door bottom right driving motor 272, the outer side surface of the first projecting piece 271b (right side), it is mounted in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. Driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is mounted to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can non-rotatably support the distal end of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  Rotor side bearing member 276 is provided with a bearing hole 276a of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted rotatably, a flat detection strip 276b that extends outward, the. The base-side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second projecting piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis of the lower right rotating body 270A of the door. The two rotation detection sensors 278 include a rotation position where the heart decoration 285c of the lower right rotator 270A faces forward (see FIG. 50A) and a rotation position where the heart decoration 285c faces rearward (FIG. 50B). ) Can be detected respectively.

  Door lower right direction unit 270 of the present embodiment, according to the playing state, it is possible to rotate the door bottom right rotator 270A by the door bottom right drive motors 272, heart decoration 285c stops to face forward Whether or not a chance can be suggested to the player depending on whether or not it is possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from having an enjoyment and to reduce the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, the door lower right direction unit 270, since the door bottom right rotator 270A inside of the door bottom right rotator decorative board 291 is mounted non-rotatably, during rotation of the door bottom right rotator 270A, the door right When emit lower rotary body decoration board 291 (LED) of, together with the position of the light irradiated from the door bottom right rotator decorative substrate 291 as the rotation of the door bottom right rotator 270A is moved, the first reflector 295 and the since the direction of light reflected induced by the two reflector 296 changes, even without blinking the LED of the door bottom right rotator decorative substrate 291, light-emitting decorative door bottom right rotator 270A so that the light is flashing or is, the door lower right rotator 270A by irradiation with various colors of light from the LED can be or is emitting decorated iridescent, can entertain a player.

[3-1 g. Production unit cover]
The effect unit cover 300 of the plate unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical door lower right rotating body 270A in the lower right door effecting unit 270. A decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side of the plate unit cover 260 when viewed from the front, and a locking unit 700 And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The effect unit cover 300 has a light-transmitting property and is entirely in the shape of a container with an open rear. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover part 301 is decorated with light emission by the door lower right base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover part 301 is the dish unit right decorative board 346. Luminous decoration.

[3-1h. Top dish ball vent unit]
As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the upper plate removing unit 310 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210 so as to cover the opening 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the plate unit base 210 from the front, and A cover 311 having an insertion opening 311a through which an extension piece 239a of the upper tray ball removing button 239 can be inserted, and a through-hole 210e of the tray unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 mounted at the upper left position in a front view, a pressure transmitting member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and rotated by pressing the upper saucer release button 239; And a first spring member 314 which urges the upper plate ball removing button 239 in a direction in which the upper plate removing button 239 rises.

  In addition, the upper dish removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish sending port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear, and a rear base member. A slider 316 disposed between the base plate 315 and the plate unit base 210 and attached to the rear base member 315 so as to be able to move up and down and contacting the pressure transmitting member 313 from above; A second spring member 317 for urging the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel with the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and has a flat base portion 312a attached to the cover 311. A pair of flat base portions 312a extending forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. An extension piece 312b, a shaft support 312c that is recessed rearward from the front end of the extension piece 312b in a U-shape, and a rear end of the first spring member 314 that is provided near the lower end of the front surface of the base 312a. spring locking portion of the hook-shaped (not shown) is provided with a.

  Pressing transmission member 313, rear extension at both ends that extends in front and horizontally cylindrical shaft portion 313a to be rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft support within 312c of the base member 312, flat from the shaft portion 313a to the rear An upwardly extending piece 313c that extends upward from the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the extending piece 313b and the rearwardly extending piece 313b when viewed from the front, and to which the lower end of the extended piece 239c of the button 239 can be contacted. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view of the lower surface of the rearwardly extending piece 313b in a flat shape; and a first spring projecting downward from below the vicinity of the left end in front view of the shaft 313a. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and has a lower end that can contact the slider 316 for removing an upper dish.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the plate unit base 210, and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the plate unit base 210 and a front surface of the base portion 315a, which is separated to the left and right. A slider supporting portion 315b slidably supporting the left and right ends of the ball removing slider 316; and a forward opening at a position corresponding to an upper portion of the upper plate ball sending port 210d of the plate unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base 315a and through which game balls can flow.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 extends downward continuously with the upper entrance 315c on the rear side of the base portion 315a, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved rearward. An L-shaped second guiding path 315e extending downward from the lower side of the one guiding path 315d, extending leftward in front view, and having a left end opened to the left and entirely open rearward, The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of a portion of the guideway 315e that extends to the left and an L-shaped second guideway 315e. It has a penetrating opening 315g, and a spring engaging portion 315h which protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and is engaged with the upper end of the second spring member 317.

  The L-shaped second guiding path 315e of the rear base member 315 is inclined such that a portion extending to the left becomes lower toward the left. As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into the cutout portion 210j of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second guide path 315e The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The slider 316 has a slider base 316a having a flat plate shape and both left and right ends slidably supported by a slider support portion 315b of a rear base member 315, and a slider from the left to the front from the center in front view of the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b extending upward through the receiving piece 210f through the opening 210e of the unit base 210 so that the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d of the pressure transmitting member 313 can contact the upper surface, and a slider below the transmission piece 316b. A triangular-shaped operation transmitting portion 316c projecting rearward from the rear side of the base 316a downward, and a hook-shaped spring engagement projecting from the front surface of the slider base 316a and locking the lower end of the second spring member 317. And a stop 316d.

  In the state in which the dish unit 200 is assembled, the upper tray 315 of the upper dish ball opening unit 310 has an upper entrance 315c of the rear base member 315 opened at the lower end on the right side in front view of the guide passage 212a of the upper dish body 212. Thus, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feed unit 540 via the first guiding path 315d on the rear side of the base 315a.

  In addition, when the upper tray ball removing button 239 is pressed downward by the upper tray ball removing unit 310, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the urging force of the first spring member 314 by the extension piece 239 a of the upper tray ball removing button 239. Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates around the shaft 313a in a direction in which the lower end moves downward. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressure transmitting member 313, the upperly extending ball is removed by the transmitting piece 316b of the upperly extended ball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact. slider 316 slides downward against the biasing force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper bowl removing slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The state where the side 315d communicates with the side of the second guide path 315e is established. Thereby, the game ball in the upper plate 201 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper entrance 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feed unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper ball removing button 239 is released, the upper ball removing slider 316 and the upper ball removing button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317. It can return to the original state.

[3-1i. Lower tray ball vent unit]
As shown in FIG. 54 and the like, the lower plate body removing unit 320 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower plate body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the plate unit cover 260, and A flat-plate-shaped lower ball-pulling base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the punching hole 214a, and a flat-plate-shaped slide lid 322 capable of sliding on the lower-plate-ball pulling base 321 left and right to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front of the plate unit cover 260; and a spring urging the slide lid 322 in a direction in which the opening 321a is closed by the slide lid 322. A member 324, a holding device 325 for holding the slide lid 322 at a position where the opening 321 a is opened against the urging force of the spring member 324, It is provided.

  The opening portion 321a of the lower bowl removing base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right middle in front view. By attaching the lower plate removing base 321 to the lower plate main body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower plate removing base 321 and the lower plate main body 212 left and right. The slide lid 322 has a holding protrusion 322a held by the holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower bowl removing base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b projecting from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and capable of holding the holding protrusion 322a. Holding device 325, open between the pair of holding claws 325a are, when pressed to the body 325a side by inserting the holding projections 322a, it holds the holding projections 322a closes the pair of retaining claws 325b, a pair of holding The claw 325b is maintained in a closed state. In this state, by moving the holding projections 322a to the main body 325a side, a state where the pair of holding claws 325a is opened, the holding of the holding projections 322a is released.

  When the knob 323 (sliding lid 322) is moved to the right in front view, the sliding lid 322 between the opening 321a and the drilling hole 214a of the lower tray main body 214 has a lower lid removing unit 320. position, and a game ball in the lower tray 202, the ball release holes 214a without passing downwards, it is possible to store the game ball into the lower tray 202.

  By operating the knob 323 to the left from this state, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game balls in the lower plate 202 pass through the ball hole 214a and the opening 321a and fall below the plate unit 200, so that the game balls in the lower plate 202 can be pulled out. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can keep pulling out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide lid 322, when slightly operating the knob 323 to the left, holding the holding protrusion 322a opens the pair of holding claws 325b is released, slide the slide lid 322 by the biasing force of the spring member 324 to the right Then, the ball hole 214a is closed. Thus, by operating the knob 323 of the lower tray ball vent unit 320 can be or disconnecting to store the game ball to the lower tray 202, a game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball rental operation unit 330 of the plate unit 200 includes, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, a unit case 331 that is attached to the upper surface near the right end in front view of the effect operation unit 220 and has translucency, A ball lending button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by a player; a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and operable by the player; A display unit 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the return button 333.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and presses a ball lending button 332 to place a predetermined number of game balls in a plate unit. The user can borrow (pay out) the contents into the upper plate 201 of the store 200, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the remaining cash or the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the borrowed amount is returned. The display unit 334 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down, and the like.

[3-1k. Upper tray top decorative member]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, etc., the upper plate top decorative member 340 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the upper left and right center of the upper end of the plate unit base 210 and has a translucent upper plate top lens extending in a left and right band shape. 340a, and an upper plate top decorative substrate 340b mounted below the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface.

  The upper plate top decorative member 340 can cause the LED of the upper plate top decorative substrate 340b to emit light, thereby causing the upper plate top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape. The upper pan top decorative member 340, since it is disposed on the rear side of the staging operation unit 200, similarly to the light-emitting decoration such as decorative member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 after the top tray, the upper tray top decorative member 340 in that emit light decoration, the attention of a player to the staging operation unit 220 such as a touch unit 220B can attract, interest to delight effect presented by staging operation unit 220 suppresses a decrease be able to.

[3-1l. It has the advantages of dish Unit
The plate unit 200 of the present embodiment includes a touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 for storing game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a, and a game ball in the game area 5a. When displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with a game state that is changed by hitting, a band-like shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the upper plate decoration member 236, the upper plate top decoration member 340, and the like can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (sight) Can be noticed by the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like entering from outside, and the line of sight (interest) of the player can be attracted to the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like, that is, the upper liquid crystal display device 244 side. Can. Therefore, when presenting an effect such as an image in accordance with a game state, the upper liquid crystal display device 244 causes the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like to emit light, thereby providing the upper liquid crystal display device 244 to the player. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and the effect of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, since it is provided with upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image in accordance with the gaming state dish unit 200, when so as to display a suggestive image the arrival of chance, disposed outside the game area 5a Since the arrival of a chance is suggested by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 being played, the player plays the game in the game area 5a and the effect on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. And both can be bothered. Therefore, by paying attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244), it is possible to enjoy a tight game with a sense of speed, and the interest of the player is reduced. When displaying an image indicating the arrival of a chance on the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, thereby allowing the player to move to the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Attention can be paid, and the arrival of a chance can be surely recognized and the player can be entertained. In this case, depending on the player, that both within the game area 5a and game region 5a outside anxious, but there is a possibility that both the thus lowering the interest is not concentrate well, gaming state (chances since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like according to the incoming) emits light, until such linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light can be concentrated on the game area 5a, entertain the game in the game area 5a At the same time, when the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, the effect of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, so that the game can be sharpened and it is hard to get tired.

  Further, since and a top loading liquid crystal display device 244 in a dish unit 200 that bulges to the player side in the lower play area 5a, the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed in a position close to the player and Become. As a result, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is easily hidden by a player located in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is difficult to be seen by another player next to or behind. The effect presented by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the performance of the upper liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of being uncomfortable and lowering the interest by being peeped by other players, and also to reduce the upper liquid crystal display device. When the effect is presented by the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like at the time of presentation of the effect by the 244, it is difficult to overlook the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

  Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous as compared with the case of emitting light in a dot-like manner. Even if the consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the display by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246, and the like can be enjoyed, and the interest can be enhanced. it can be suppressed. Further, in order to emit the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like in a band shape, becomes different emission mode to the light emitting such other light emitting decorative body, can be reduced from being misidentified with emission of such light-emitting decorative member, Light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be reliably noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at a position on the rear side of the outer peripheral edge of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 near the game area 5a, when the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, can easily enter the light such as the linear light-emitting lens member 237 in the player's field of vision, it is possible to entertain the effect of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 reminds the emission of such linear light-emitting lens member 237.

  Striking also includes a staging operation unit 200 having the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 or the like on the upper surface of the tray unit 200 has a top tray 201 or the like, on dish 201 dish unit 200 in the game region 5a since the player to confirm the amount of game ball for writing directs the line of sight with some frequency, upper tray when directing the line of sight to the upper tray 201 liquid crystal display device 244 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like It is easy to enter the field of view, and it is easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. In addition, since the player turns his or her gaze to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the line of sight to the upper plate 201 (upper liquid crystal display device 244) from within the game area 5a. Therefore, when the user notices the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like, his / her eyes can be immediately transferred to the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect presented by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, thereby reducing the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the game region 5a is disposed staging operation unit 200 on the lower side of, since the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like to a player from the lower side is illuminated, when placed on the upper side of the play area 5a As compared with, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed by the player, and the player can be surely noticed by the upper liquid crystal display device 244. The effect by the operation unit 200 can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the arranged staging operation unit 200 (upper tray liquid crystal display device 244) to a central position corresponding to the lateral direction of the game region 5a, the center of the player's line of sight is located at the position of the play area 5a in the throat However, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can be surely focused on the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the effect operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the a touch panel 246 to the staging operation unit 200, in addition to the effects by the image effect to operate the touch panel 246 to the player can also be performed, it is possible to entertain the player by a variety effect , by operating the touch panel 246 to the player, it is possible to participate in the effect, interest in actively entertaining effect the player can be prevented from being lowered.

  Further, the touch unit side of the outer peripheral edge linear light-emitting lens disposed along the member after 220B 237 (linear light-emitting portion 237b) is a game ball in the upper tray 201 sphere feed unit 540 to the (spherical launcher 680) In addition to being arranged along the guiding passageway portion 212a to be fed, an upper ball removing button 239 for operating the upper ball removing unit 310 is arranged between the guiding passageway portion 212a. In other words, the player is provided with a linear light-emitting lens member 237 in the vicinity of the location to check the game balls required for the game, the configuration even during a game player has placed a linear light-emitting lens member 237 in a position to care Therefore, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, and the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the effect of the touch panel 246) Touch operation, etc.) can be easily noticed.

  Further, the touch unit 220B having the upper tray crystal substrate 241 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, by a mounting base unit mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of 220A, the top surface of the upper pan under the covering portion 262 of the tray unit cover 260 And a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Even if the condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower coating portion 262), it is possible to prevent the dewed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, since the post-plate decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the post-plate decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the plate 201, It is not exposed to the water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as short circuit and corrosion on the decorative substrate 235 after the upper plate.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200, when the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration device 242, a plurality (two) of the touch units 220B are provided. The vibration of the touch unit 220B (the vibration device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A, since the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibration device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the mounting unit 220A. As a result, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, when the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the touch operation is performed on the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B, only the touch unit 220B vibrates. the feel of 246 can be sufficiently imparted, interest pleasing touch operation of the touch panel 246 to the player can be suppressed.

  Moreover, since it is possible to vibrate the touch unit 220B by vibrating unit 242, in addition to the operational feeling of the touch panel 246 to the player, or startled by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, suggesting timing of operating the touch panel 246 It is possible to entertain an operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the support from below the touch unit 220B by a plurality of dampers 222, even if an impact or load such as is applied to the touch unit 220B and pushing strongly beating the touch unit 220B from above, by the damper 222 since it is possible to absorb the shocks, impact etc. touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A or the like can be reduced from being damaged by, the game is interrupted by damage such as a touch unit 220B Thus, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being reduced.

  In addition, since the touch panel 220B is operated by the touch panel 246, the time during which the player touches the touch panel 246 is longer than when pressing a button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the user touches 246, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the finger (hand) of the player. Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is operated by vibrating the finger of the player, a sufficient operation feeling can be given, and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, by changing the image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it is possible to cope with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to reduce the interest in the game by various effects. Furthermore, due to the provision of a touch panel 246 on the touch unit 220B, as compared with the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch-out, pinch), swipe, touch and Various operations such as holding can be performed. Thus, it is possible to perform more various operations director, interest to delight the player can be suppressed.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to be able to move upward and to be able to move downward, and the elastic force (biasing force) of the plurality of dampers 222 causes the touch unit 220B to be attached. Is pressed against the upper moving end, so that the touch unit 220B cannot be easily moved during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the operation of the touch panel 246 can be easily performed accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B is easily move, it is possible to think that the one in which the touch unit 220B does not move to the player, the touch unit 220B of the thought not move excitation in accordance with the gaming state By vibrating by the device 242, the player can be surprised, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and the interest from being reduced.

  Further, since the so as to vibrate the touch unit 220B by a plurality of vibrating unit 242 apart from each other, for example, by driving the vibration device 242 located near the site where player operates the touch panel 246, a strong Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, if the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player will be different, so that the player is notified that the operation is wrong. becomes possible, it is possible to perform correct operation to a player, amusement entertained operation effect using a touch panel 246 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 that are separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency, strength, and the like of the vibration of each vibration device 242. Can be. Therefore, by controlling each of the vibrating devices 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operational feeling or to surprise the player greatly, interest to delight the player can be suppressed.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B impact or load such as a touch unit 220B with or strongly pressed or tapped from the upper side is applied, left and right end side of the touch unit 220B is attached to the unit case 231 across the damper 222 Therefore, the impact or the like from the upper side can be absorbed to some extent (attenuated) by the damper 222 and the bending of the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, in the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the underside of the mounting base 230, the shock or the load, etc., from the touch unit 220B side through the unit case 231, to the mounting base 230 And can be transmitted widely. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e projecting downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c into which the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner case and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward due to an impact or a load from the touch unit 220B. shock or the like becomes to be transmitted to the mounting base 230 from the unit case 231 Te, by the deflection of the unit case 231, an impact or the like is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in a state of being further attenuated. The inner peripheral wall of the outer peripheral wall and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the 受突 portion 231e is because it is narrowed down, when the 受突 portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c abuts, 受突 portion 231e (unit case 231) The impact, load, and the like from the side are transmitted obliquely to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and along the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. The force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward direction) for bending the mounting base 230 is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even touch unit 220B is or strongly pressed or tapped from the upper side, a plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, mounting base 230, it is possible to effectively attenuate the impact or the like, Ya touch unit 220B mounting base unit 220A can be prevented from being damaged.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. FIG. 57 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  Foul cover unit 520 of the present embodiment, as illustrated, the door frame base unit shallow box-shaped unit body 522 front side is open is attached to the rear side of the 100, it is attached to the front surface of the unit body 522 a flat cover member 524, and a. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in a front view and penetrates the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 210 a of the tray unit 200. a passage 526, a full guideway 862 and communicable full sphere receptacle 528 through ball passageway 526 of front view the lower full sphere path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 is open right in rearward, It has.

  Furthermore, foul the cover unit 520, not reach full ball socket 528 of the front view right side toward the upper opening to which the body frame 4 of the sphere launcher 680 by fired in spite gaming area 5a Ball receiving port 530 for receiving a game ball (a foul ball), and a full ball receiving port 528 which opens forward at the lower right corner in a front view and discharges a game ball received in the foul ball receiving port 530. It includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c of the dish unit 200, together with.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball reception port 528 and the foul ball reception port 530 and the ball discharge port 532 by the unit body 522 and the cover member 524, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible size, a flat movable piece 534 constituting a part of an inner wall of the storage passage 533, and a lower end rotatably attached to the unit body 522; a fill-up detection sensor 535 for detecting the rotation in the direction away from the reservoir passage 533 pieces 534, and a spring 536 which urges the movable piece 534 toward the center of the reservoir passage 533, a.

  If the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 becomes full of game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 520 will have a certain degree in the storage passage 533. Game balls can be stored. When the certain number of game balls into the reservoir passage 533 is stored, the movable piece 534 as the upper end of the movable piece 534 is moved in a direction away from the reservoir passage 533 by the weight of the game ball is rotated, The rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full of game balls, when the full tank detection sensor 535 detects that the game tank is full, the payout of further game balls is stopped, and That fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and can be urged to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 522 and below the penetrating ball passage 526, and the guideway opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 537 to which the operating projection 863e of 863 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 80). The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 537 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact. When the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 537, the guideway opening / closing door 863 turns, and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to an island facility of a game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and that can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view so as to be rotatable, respectively. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, respectively, and the reinforcing frame 660 mounted to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in a front view are provided. .

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to a lower part of the front of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; and attached outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and locking unit 700 for locking between the body frame 4 is mounted on the rearward along the front view upper and left side of the body frame base 600 An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the player side; a board unit 900 attached to a lower rear portion of the main body frame base 600; And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 58 to 61, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game A game board placement portion 602 which forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a left and right end of the lower end of the game board 5 which protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement portion 602. And a game board regulating unit 603 for regulating backward movement.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in a front view for mounting the ball launching device 680, and front and rear right and left sides of the firing device mounting portion 604 in a front view. bass speaker of the cylinder insertion hole 605 and a substrate unit 900 penetrates back and forth left side lower from front view horizontal center of the game board mounting part 602 of the key cylinder 710 is inserted in the lock unit 700 penetrates the Opening 606 that allows the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 to face forward, and a connection opening 606 that allows the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 to face forward. And

  Further, the main body frame 4 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 to the rear in a front view, and has a locking unit 700 mounted on the right side surface, and a back cover 980 rotatably mounted on the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided. The main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the rear surface when viewed from the front. The upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge for mounting the main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are provided. and a mounting portion 610.

  In addition, the main body frame 4 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly below the left and right center of the game board placement unit 602 when viewed from the front, And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 601.

[4-2. Upper hinge member on body frame side and lower hinge member on body frame side]
The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 are mounted on the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

  The main frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L-shape, and a columnar protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The upper hinge member 622 pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621 penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side in the front view of the upper hinge pin 622 to pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. Hinge hole 623 for a door frame for use. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 has a portion of the upper hinge body 621 bent downward, which is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame 4.

  The main frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear part of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L-shape. flat and under the hinge hole for the outer frame (not shown), extending horizontally is disposed on the upper side of the lower hinge first body 641 which is pivotally supported on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 has a lower hinge second body 643 rear shaped for plate material is bent into an L-shape upward, the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second body 643 A door frame lower hinge hole 644 for pivotal support and a door frame extending upward from the left end behind the door frame lower hinge hole 644 at a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a restricting piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the third rotating member. .

  The lower hinge second main body 643 has a horizontally-extended portion with a predetermined interval above the horizontally-extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641, and a portion bent upward has a lower hinge first portion. The body 641 is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward. In the main frame side lower hinge member 640, a portion bent upward of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main body frame 4.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross section in a plan view with a right side opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. A pair of left positioning members 661 are mounted vertically separated from each other.

  The reinforcing frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and also into the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Illegal insertion of a tool can be prevented.

[4-4. Ball launching device]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58, 60, and 61. The ball firing device 680 is a device for driving game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball firing device 680, the hitting strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the flat launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 681 on the right side when viewed from the front. A launch solenoid 682 made of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a hitting hammer 683 having a base end attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 682, and extending obliquely upward and left from near the tip of the hitting hammer 683. And a launch rail 684 on which a game ball can be rolled.

  State the sphere launcher 680, game balls from the door frame 3 spheres feed unit 540 is adapted to be supplied to the upper surface right end of the firing rail 684, that the game ball is supplied to the upper surface right end of the firing rails 684 Then, when the handle lever 504 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting hammer 683. The game ball hit by the ball hammer 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 684, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  Incidentally, during the in relation to the striking intensity and the like of the game ball, if the game ball was hit ball did not reach the game area 5a, a firing rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rails 1001 and inner rails 1002) Then, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 530 of the foul cover unit 520 below, and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the inside of the foul cover unit 520.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 700 protruding forward from the unit base 701 and locking with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower portion of the unit base 701 in a columnar shape, and from the front side. It includes a key cylinder 710 for unlocking one of the locking of the door frame for hooks 702 or the outer frame for hook 703 in accordance with the rotation direction of the inserted unlocking key, a.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the back. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 66 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 68 (a) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 71A is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 71B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. FIG. 72 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the movable ball removing piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 72 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the movable ball removing piece. It is. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of the dispensing blade in the dispensing device.

  FIG. 74 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 74 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 75 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 76A is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 76B is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as exploded from the front, and FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as exploded from the rear. Further, FIG. 79 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank route unit, and FIG. 79 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing a guideway opening / closing door according to an embodiment different from FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63 and the like, the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment is attached to an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and attached to an upper portion of the payout unit base 801. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending left and right and opened upward and attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 in the left direction when viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two front and rear rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 82) that swings downward from above.

  The payout unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner. A payout device 830 which is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board accommodated in a payout control board box 950; , Is provided. Game balls are distributed in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the payout devices 830 pay out game balls one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and plays the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. Guide path 861 that guides the game ball forward to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 from the front end, and guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward to the door frame 3 from the front end. The full-frame taxiway 862 that guides to the full tank receiving port 530, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full-colored taxiway 862 are attached to the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side opened, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side opened, and a front case 822. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and that separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822 from each other. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 mounted thereon, and a pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear 826 mounted rotatably by the shaft member 824 and arranged in the front case and the rear case, respectively. And a broken ball detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational positions of the pair of movable piece members 825 and 826.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding entrance 821a which is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guiding exit which is open at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 821b, and a guiding path 821c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821a and the ball guiding outlet 821b and through which game balls can flow. Induction passage 821c is spherical induction inlet and inlet portion 821d which extends obliquely to be lower at a small angle to the horizontal to near the left end from the 821a, the center of the height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introducing portion 821d a detecting portion 821e which extends straight downwardly to near the meandering portion 821f extends in a meandering shape in the left and right width of the front case 821 from the detecting section 821d, in being configured. Further, the front case 821 has a cutout portion 821g on the right wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding entrance 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guidance exit that opens at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 822b, and a guiding path 822c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a and the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which game balls can flow. The guide passage 822c extends from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end obliquely so as to become lower at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the guide portion 822d. The detection unit 822e includes a detection unit 822e that extends straight down to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 822f that extends from the detection unit 822d in a meandering shape in the width of the left and right sides of the rear case 822. In addition, the rear case 822 includes a cutout portion 822g on the right wall of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 is formed approximately symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, in an assembled state a ball induction unit 820, the guide channel 821c and the induction passage 822c is formed so as to match the front and back there.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 825a. An extension 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a. The extension 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward; A detection piece 825f which extends outward from the right end and which can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position close to the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the cutout portion 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a projects into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The state is brought into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c (detection unit 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is prevented from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (leftward in front view). In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in a direction (to the right in a front view) in which the lower end of the movable piece 825a approaches the wall of the guide path 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f at the front of the movable piece member 825 is in a state of not detecting with respect to the ball out detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 does not detect.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable plate-like movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 826a. An extension 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward, and A detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end and that can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the cutout portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a projects into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is prevented from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, the movable plate assembly before 826, the lower end of the movable piece 826a, is rotated in a direction of approaching (front view right direction) in the wall of the guide channel 822c, the left side of the movable piece 826a, the guide channel 822c Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece member front 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball out detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls being arranged in a row in front and rear by a tank rail 803, and a plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. 822 allows the user to be guided back and forth in two rows to the lower payout device 830 (see FIG. 82). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can flow well. Can be.

  Also, when the game balls flow through the guide paths 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game balls come into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a at the front 825 of the movable piece member and at the rear 826 of the movable piece member, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable member front 825 and the movable member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f at the front of the movable piece member 825 and at the rear of the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that a game ball is present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game balls flow in the guidance passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d increases, and the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d are movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It rebounds to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable balls 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game ball, the vibrations cause the movable pieces 825a and 826a to be caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Scratched dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 is configured to detect the game balls flowing through the guiding paths 821c and 822c using separate movable piece members 825 and 826, respectively. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the rear of one piece 826 is detected by one ball cutout detection sensor 827, when the game ball in any of the guide paths 821c and 822c runs out, the front of the movable piece 825 is lost. Alternatively, the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the rear of the movable piece 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide paths 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball-out detection sensor 827. . Therefore, since the running out of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be quickly replenished, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, by screwing metal screws as weights into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the front movable member 825 and the rear movable member 826, the weight of the front movable member 825, the movable member rear 826, and the weight of the weight. Accordingly, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction in which they project into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. No dust or dust adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. By doing so, it is possible to rotate satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  Thus, the sphere guide units 820 of the present embodiment, guide channel 821c which lower end flows of game balls by gravity, the movable piece 825a of the movable plate assembly before 825 and the movable plate assembly after 826 projecting into the 822c, in 826a By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface in contact with the game ball, the movable piece 825a is formed by the weight of the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member 826 and the weight of the weight. , 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c, 822c. Further, the movable piece 825a, in mounted rotatably outside the guide channel 822c to the upper end of the 826a, lower end guide channel 821c, because you have to project into the 822c, guide channel 821c, dust and dirt within 822c etc. it is, do not adhere movable piece 825a, the upper end and the lower end of 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. Thus, the movable pieces 825a and 826 (the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes, and the front of the movable piece member 825 and the rear of the movable piece member 826 frequently rotate, the weight remains. The front 825 and the rear 826 of the movable member can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the front 825 of the movable member and the rear 826 of the movable member (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e). . Further, the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, thereby simplifying the trouble of attaching the weight. Thus, the cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guide passages 821c and 822c have an introduction portion 822d that guides the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 825c, on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 825c protrude inside. Since the game balls flow through the passages 821c and 822c, and the game balls contact the movable pieces 825a and 826a, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, by vibrating the movable pieces 825a and 826a, it is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like that have been caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front part 825 and the rear part 826 of the movable part can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be favorably rotated, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to erroneous detection or the like. Even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide balls 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that promptness can be obtained. Can be replenished with game balls, and by reducing the time during which the game is interrupted as short as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, a payout opening 831a that is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass, and a game ball that opens near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. Payout exit 831b, a ball extraction outlet 831c that is open near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a payout passage 831d that connects the payout entrance 831a and the payout exit 831b and through which game balls can flow. And a front box 831 that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball extraction outlet 831c and has a ball extraction passage 831e through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A payout opening 832a, which has a box shape with an open front side, and is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. The dispensing outlet 832b is opened to be able to pass through, the ball removing outlet 832c is opened near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that game balls can pass, and the dispensing inlet 832a communicates with the dispensing outlet 832b so that game balls are distributed. There is provided a possible payout passage 832d, and a back box 832 that has a ball free passage 832e that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 832c, and through which game balls can flow.

  The dispensing device 830 is mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open. The dispensing motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, a driving gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834, meshes with the driving gear 835, and can be rotated by the front box 831 and the front cover 833. , A driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 penetrating rotatably, and a front end attached to the front cover 833 and A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates through the front box 831 and is attached to the back box 832, and a shaft member 837 penetrates through the shaft member 837, which is rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the back box 832. A dispensing blade 839 that is disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is mounted between the front box 831 and the back box 832 and detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 839. And

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the back box 832 and has a flat partition plate 841 that separates the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 from the dispensing passage 832d of the back box 832; And a back box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls discharged by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, payout passages 831d and 832d, and a ball empty passage. 831e, 832e are branched from each other, and are rotatably mounted by a front box 831 and a back box 832 so as to close the ball passages 831e, 832e. A ball release lever 844 slidably mounted vertically slidably on the upper right side of the box 832 to make the ball release movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout entrance 831a to the ball ejection outlet 831c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. Bends to extend vertically to the left, near the center of the total height, to the left to extend substantially horizontally, and then extends vertically downward about 1/3 from the left end to the left and right width of the front box 831 again It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located just above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 831e is a form in which a portion extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrance 831a in the payout passage 831d is further extended. It diverges to the height near the center.

  In addition, the front box 831 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout exit 831b in the payout passage 831d, and protruding rearward as it goes downward, and is formed at an upper portion on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the back box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout entrance 832a to the ball ejection outlet 832c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the back box 832. After being bent so as to extend vertically to the left and approximately horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the back box 832. Thus, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the back box 832, and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 832d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 832e is a form in which a portion extending obliquely to the lower right from the payout entrance 832a in the payout passage 832d is further extended. It diverges to the height near the center.

  In addition, the back box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d, and is formed at an upper portion of a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward, and on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The pay-out passages 831d and 832d and the ball empty passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the back box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blades 839 are arranged. Further, between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached. That is, the game balls flowing through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls flowing through the payout passage 832d of the back box 832 are separated by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f from the front and rear of the front box 831 and the back box 832. It is brought near the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angle of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction from a spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detecting pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c projecting rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and having irregularities formed on a peripheral surface at a rear end thereof and connectable to the dispensing blade 839 are provided. .

  The dispensing blade 839 extends cylindrically forward and backward, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in a circumferential direction from a front end of the base cylinder 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted. A plurality (three) of front blades 839b and a plurality of front blades 839b projecting from the rear end of the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be alternated. and the blade 839c after three), the connecting portion connectable uneven and the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837 is formed on the peripheral surface of the front end with protruding in a cylindrical shape forward from a front end of the base tube portion 839a It includes a 839d, a.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the dispensing blade 839 are provided three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is rotated relative to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It extends outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc depressed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Also, the three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the outer periphery of the base cylinder portion 839a about the axis thereof is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In addition, a diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder 839a up to the part closest to the axis of the base cylinder 839a in the arc portion (sphere accommodation portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 73). That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is four times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 to 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball by the arc portion (ball accommodation portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be promptly accommodated between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c) (the ball accommodating portion 839e).

  In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, in a state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the back box 832. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out respectively. In addition, the payout blade 839 is disposed in the payout passages 831d and 832d at a position below the center of the entire height of the front box 821 and the back box 832 and bent in a crank shape. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located immediately below a portion that extends vertically downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 821 and the back box 832. Then, in the portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 62). In the present embodiment, the distance S is set to 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  Thus, dispensing device 830, game balls, which has flowed down onto the payout blade 839, front blade 839b, when in contact with the outer periphery of 839C, it is possible to pass through the region that is bent dispensing passage 831d, the cranked 832d Therefore, it is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, can pass through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d, 832d, and can pass through the payout outlets 831b, 832b. Released downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to be about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball accommodating portion 839e. Since a depth of / 7 to ４ is accommodated, the time required for accommodating game balls can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated quickly, the game balls can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the related art, and the time required for paying out game balls can be reduced.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape up and down and back and forth, and has a body portion 843a whose lower portion is bent to form a letter shape when viewed from the front, and a tubular shape that extends back and forth at the upper end of the body portion 843a. A shaft cylinder portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the back box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer side surface of the main body portion 843a that is bent, and a main body portion 843c. And a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 72) formed of a through hole penetrating back and forth at a lower portion bent in a V-shape.

  When the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is rotatable at a position extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrances 831a and 832a, and at a position outside the wall on the right side in front view slightly higher than the portion bent downward. Mounted on

  The payout device 830 of the present embodiment has a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward in a normal state, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right in front view. In contact. This restricts rotation of the ball-moving movable piece 843 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 72A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball-moving movable piece 843 that is bent in a rectangular shape, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is obliquely lower left in front view. Extending to The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near a portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball emptying passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball removing movable pieces 843 (the main body portion 843a) close the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a partial wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. are doing.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball-moving movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Although a force for rotating the anti-clockwise rotation in a front view is exerted by this, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction is regulated by the ball release lever 844, so that the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protrusion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise in front view. Restrictions on movement are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Note that the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower part of the main body 843a comes into contact with the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the back box 832. (See FIG. 61 (b)). As a result, the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e to be discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball-moving movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, a weight made of a metal screw is screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d to mount the ball-moving lever 843 upward. When the regulation of the counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball-moving movable piece 843 projects into the ball-drawing passages 381e and 832e due to the own weight of the ball-moving movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. it can be easier to direction (viewed from the front counter-clockwise) rotation.

  In a normal state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball-pulling passages 831e and 832e, game balls entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a are transferred to the main body 843a of the ball-pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made with the game ball, the ball-moving movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact with the game ball. Therefore, dust, dust, and the like that are caught or intruded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-moving movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate due to biting, dust, or the like.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d formed as a through hole, the weight can be moved even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball-moving movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without being detached from the (weight attachment portion 843d). Further, the weight can be easily attached to the ball-moving movable piece 843 only by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d. Can be reduced.

  If the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843, or the rotating shaft rusts, and the ball removing movable piece 843 rusts. The movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game balls entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the movable ball removing piece 843, the ball removing passage 831e is formed by the movable ball removing piece 843. , 832e are closed, and when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 843. The ball removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removing lever 844 is operated to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, the ball removing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball can be reliably removed. In addition, workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Top full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to a position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 whose rear side is open, and is mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and its front side is open. The dispenser includes a box-shaped upper full cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving opening 850a that is open upward to allow a game ball to pass therethrough at a position on the left side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface. Is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls flow, a normal discharge port 850d that opens downward at a lower portion of the upper ball storage passage 850c directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a, and an upper ball storage A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a position other than the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d, and a full tank discharge port 850e. And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  In addition, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball emptying path 850g that guides game balls entering from the upper ball emptying entrance 850b downward, and an upper part that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball emptying path 850g. And a ball ejection outlet 850h. In the upper full tank path unit 850, a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball ejection outlet 850h are sequentially opened from the left side in a front view and downward. The upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover attaching portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlet 831b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball removing inlet 850b is It positioned immediately below the ball vent outlet 831c of the dispensing device 830. In addition, when the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball emptying outlet 850h are connected to the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865, each opening directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 82).

  Upper full sphere path unit 850, a game ball that is paid out is released from the payout outlet 831b downward by dispenser 830, it enters from the upper dispensing bulb socket 850a to the upper ball reservoir passage 850c. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a. From the normal discharge port 850d.

  When the inside of the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. The amount of a game ball that is stored above the normal outlet 850d becomes higher than the partition piece 850F, game balls having entered newly in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c is fully overcame partition piece 850F It will be discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 202 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860.

  As described above, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 201 in accordance with the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6d. Bottom full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the upper full tank path unit 850. Lower Kalimantan ball path unit 860 is usually inductive path 861 to induce game ball released from the normal outlet 850d of the upper full sphere path unit 850 from the front end to guide forward into the through ball passageway 526 of the door frame 3 When a full taxiway 862 to induce game ball released from full discharge port 850e of the upper full sphere path unit 850 from the front end to guide forward to full ball socket 530 of the door frame 3, usually A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 by connecting the guideway open / close door 863 to the normal guideway 861. And a closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening in a direction to close the opening.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball emptying outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. And a lower ball-free guideway 865 for discharging air to the sphere.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860, a normal taxiway 861, a full tank taxiway 862, and a lower ball empty taxiway 865 are arranged in order from left to right in front view. The normal guideway 861, the full tank guideway 862, and the lower ball empty guideway 865 have their rear ends opened upward. Further, the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right, and extend forward to near the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower. Further, the full tank taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball empty guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be vertically divided as shown in the figure.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to the front end of the lower case 867 at a position between the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860, a full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is arranged at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disc-shaped base 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely to the upper left from the base 863a and that can close the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending in a flat plate shape to the right from the base portion 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862, and an extension portion 863d extending in a plate shape diagonally to the lower left from the base portion 863a. And an operating projection 863e that projects forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extension 863d and that can abut on the door opening / closing abutment 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 does not require the openings to be closed, but means that the game balls cannot pass through. The operation projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that the front end face projects forward as approaching the end side in the counterclockwise direction. are doing.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 864 so that the second door plate portion 863c is located at the front end of the lower case 867 from below the front end opening of the full guideway 862. By contacting the boss 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has a front end formed with a penetrating ball passage 526, a full tank receptacle 530, and a door opening / closing port in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 80). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guideway opening / closing door 863 does not abut on the operation protrusion 863 e. As a result, it is rotated clockwise in a front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 79). (A)). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway The game ball does not spill from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end face of the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863, and the door frame 3 is activated. by the inclination of the front end surface of the projecting portion 863E, force for turning the front view counterclockwise direction taxiway door 863 against the biasing force of the closing spring 864 acts. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And the front end opening of the full tank guiding path 862 is opened (see FIG. 79 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the second door plate 863c is located above the front end opening of the full guideway 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4 and the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank are full. At the front side of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, the penetrating sphere passage 526 of the foul cover unit 520 and the full tank receiving port 528 of the door frame 3 are located. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving port 528 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different from each other in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are rotated by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the doors are opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be reduced in size. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be more effectively utilized.

  The payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 201. Is paid out, game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank route unit 860 is full of game balls. Then, when game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game balls are normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. beyond partition piece 850f in greeted above the outlet 850d, now flows into the fill-up outlet 850e side, full Tan outlet 850e, full taxiway 862 of the lower Kalimantan ball path unit 860, The payout of the game ball to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 520 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830, and the lower plate 202 in addition to the upper plate 201 becomes full of the game balls and cannot supply the game balls to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 533 of. When the movable piece 534 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535 when the game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is released.

  The stop of the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is performed, for example, until the movable balls 534 are detected in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520. while being, stored path 533 on the upstream side, the number capable of satisfying upper ball reservoir passage 850c of full taxiways 862, and the upper full sphere path unit 850 of the lower Kalimantan ball path unit 860 When the game balls are paid out, the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 may be stopped. Thereby, since more game balls can be stored than the conventional pachinko machine, in the game state where many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are dispensed by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on big hit games and entertain them.

  As described above, in the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, in the upper full tank path unit 850 and the lower full tank path unit 860, more game balls can be stored than the conventional pachinko machine, When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the frame 4, if many game balls are stored in the upper full ball path unit 850 and the lower full ball path unit 860, the load of these game balls is usually induced. This greatly acts on the guideway opening / closing door 863 that closes the front end opening of the road 861 and the full tank guideway 862, and the guideway opening / closing door 863 may be easily damaged. Therefore, a guideway opening / closing door 870 of the embodiment as shown in FIG. 81 may be used.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 870 shown in FIG. 81 includes a disc-shaped base 870a rotatably mounted and a first door that extends obliquely to the upper left from the base 870a and can close the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861. A plate portion 870b, a second door plate portion 870c extending in a flat plate shape to the right from the base portion 870a and capable of closing a front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extending plate shape extending diagonally to the lower left from the base portion 870a. An extension (not shown); and an operating projection 870 e projecting forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extension and capable of abutting against the door opening / closing abutment 537 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3. ing. Further, the guideway opening / closing door 870 includes a plurality of recesses 870 into which a part of a game ball fits, on the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c.

  As shown, the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c of the taxiway opening / closing door 870 are obliquely inclined so as to move rearward as the distance from the base 870a increases. Therefore, when the game ball rolling forward in the normal taxiway 861 or the full tank taxiway 862 abuts on the rear surface of the first door plate portion 870b or the second door plate portion 870c, the rear surface is inclined. It rolls to the base 870a side, and the game balls stored in the normal taxiway 861 or the full tank taxiway 862 can be brought to the base 870a side. Thereby, the load of the game balls stored in the normal taxiway 861 or the full tank taxiway 862 is applied to the base 870a attached to the lower case 867 in the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c. Since the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c are hardly deformed because they act at close positions, the guideway opening / closing door 870 is hardly damaged, and the durability can be enhanced.

  As shown, the plurality of recesses 870d of the taxiway opening / closing door 870 are held at positions on the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c where the game ball is shifted toward the base 870a. Are arranged as follows. As a result, the game balls flowing through the normal taxiway 861 or the full tank taxiway 862 fit into the concave portion 870d, so that the game balls can be reliably shifted to the base 870a side, and the same as described above. Action and effect can be obtained.

  Although not shown, the concave portion 870d extends in an arc around the base 870a so that the guideway opening / closing door 870 can rotate even when a game ball is fitted.

  In this case, it is desirable that the left and right widths W of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 be different from an integral multiple of the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls brought to the base 870a side by the rear surfaces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c have their normal taxiway 861 and full tank taxiway abut on the rear side. When it is in contact with the inner wall on the left and right sides of 862, the direction of the load acting from the rear game ball is directed obliquely forward toward the base 870a, and toward the base 870a attached to the lower case 867. A large load can be applied, and the above-described effects can be reliably exerted.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a bass speaker mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side in front view of the rear side of the board unit base 910, and a power supply board is housed therein, and an interface control mounted on the back side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board box which is attached across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and in which a payout control board for controlling payout of game balls is accommodated. 950.

  The dispensing device 830 is controlled by the dispensing control board housed in the dispensing control board box 950.

[5. Overall structure of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 83 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 89 is a front perspective view showing only the front components and the game panel of the game board, and FIG. 90 is a rear perspective view showing only the front components and the game panel of the game board.

  As shown, the game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is formed. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, which is driven by driving game balls into the gaming area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails, which are in contact with the game balls, are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion located in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  Also, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel 1100. A central liquid crystal display device 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 so as to be visible from the front side; a peripheral control unit 1600 attached to the rear side of the central liquid crystal display device 1500; And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than an inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general prize ports 2001 which are always open, and a plurality of general prize ports 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a game ball, a gate 2003 mounted at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of the game ball, and a game ball passing through the gate 2003 The second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by the player, and the first lottery selected by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A lower winning prize port 2005 and an upper winning prize port 2006 are provided, in which game balls can be accepted in accordance with either the special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  Also, a starting port unit 2100 which is mounted just above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the technique area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, Side unit 2200 which is attached along and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001; 2004, and an attacker unit 2300 having a lower winning opening 2005, and a frame attached above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2300 and having an upper winning opening 2006. And the center role 2500.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-shaped back box 3010 that is open at the front. There is provided a mechanism 3020, a lower left ball passage unit 3030 attached near the lower left front end of the back box 3010, and a lower right ball passage unit 3040 attached near the lower right front end of the back box 3010.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a lamp driving board 3060 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side of the opening 3010a in rear view, a lamp driving board cover 3061 covering the rear of the lamp driving board 3060, and a back box 3010. A motor drive board 3062 mounted on the rear side of the opening 3010a below the rear view, a motor drive board cover 3063 covering the rear side of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear face of the back box 3010 mounted on the lower left corner of the rear view. Panel relay board 3064.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 attached along the upper side and the left side at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back upper movable effect unit mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a lower back front movable effect unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010 a near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable effect attached to the right side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A unit 3300, a back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and an attachment below the opening 3010a and behind the back lower movable effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The back-to-bottom movable production unit 3500, the back-to-back movable production unit 3100 in the back box 3010, and the back-to-bottom movable A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction in front view and extending clockwise in the circumferential direction in front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the area 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper part curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and that a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with. The stop portion 1006 functions as a buffer member for relaxing and relaxing the momentum of the game ball hit into the game area 5a, and is formed of rubber or the like in this example. The material of the stopper 1006 is not limited to rubber as long as it functions as a cushioning member.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened between the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of mounting openings 1112 (see FIGS. 89 and 90) penetrating back and forth for mounting the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a mounting hole for mounting the back unit 3000, and the positioning holes are formed in a plurality of numbers in the rear.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened at the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thus, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding section 1003, and can be discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200, in an assembled state on the game board 5 can cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side. Thereby, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out opening 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged part 1201 (see FIG. 87).

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board (not shown) for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board and is attached to the board holder 1200. Have.

  The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against unauthorized actions on the main control board is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator made up of one LED for displaying a game state, and two state display units for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing a game ball to a gate unit to be described later. A normal symbol display consisting of LEDs, a normal hold display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the passage of game balls to the gate portion, and a lottery drawn by accepting game balls to a first starting port described later. A first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls to the first starting port. A second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying a second special lottery result drawn by accepting a game ball into a second starting port, which will be described later, and a person in charge of receiving a game ball into the second starting port A second special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings, and a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result, such as "big hit", when the upper winning prize opening and lower large winning prize opening described later. A round indicator comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening / closing pattern.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Central liquid crystal display]
Next, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. The center liquid crystal display device 1500 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

  As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 has two left fixing pieces 1501 protruding outward from the left side in front view, and right fixing pieces protruding outward from the right side in front view. 1502. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is provided with two fixing grooves, which are opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view, in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, and After inserting two left fixing pieces 1501 from obliquely behind 3010, the right fixing piece 1502 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1502 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism, and the lock mechanism is slid downward. Thereby, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The peripheral control unit 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Although not shown, the peripheral control unit 1600 displays a peripheral control board that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control substrate, and a display of an effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. An image display control board to be controlled, a ROM board having a ROM in which effect images, effect sounds, effect control programs, etc. are stored, and a peripheral control board, an image display control board, and a peripheral housing the ROM board And a control board box 1620.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 94A is a perspective view of the side unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 94B is a perspective view of the side unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 95A is a perspective view of the attacker unit of the front unit as viewed from the upper front, FIG. 95B is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the upper rear, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 97 is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the back.

  The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The front end protrudes forward from the front of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the mounting opening 1112. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are capable of receiving a game ball hit into the gaming region 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are located in the gaming region 5a. A first start port 2002 which is always open to accept a game ball at a different position, a gate portion 2003 mounted at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of the game ball, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing through the section 2003, and a lottery performed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The lower special winning opening 2005 and the upper special winning opening 2006 that allow the reception of a game ball in either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate section 2003 is disposed on the right side in the game area 5a and downward from the center in the up-down direction. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The lower large winning opening 2005 is located below the second starting opening 2004 and near the lower end in the game area 5a. The upper winning opening 2006 is located near the upper end of the gaming area 5a above the second starting opening 2004.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002. Side unit 2200 which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality (three in this case) of general winning openings 2001, and one general winning which is mounted on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100. An attacker unit 2300 having a mouth 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a lower winning opening 2005, and is mounted above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2300. And a frame-shaped center item 2500 having a special winning opening 2006.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The starting port unit 2100 is disposed in the game area 5a, near the lower end in the left-right direction, immediately above the out port 1111 and attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002.

  The starting port unit 2100 includes a unit base 2101 attached to the panel plate 1110, a ball receiving member 2102 attached to an upper front portion of the unit base 2101 and protruding forward to form a first starting port 2002; A box frame-shaped front decoration base 2103 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2101 below the ball receiving member 2102 and protrudes forward and extends left and right, and a front surface of the unit base 2101 in the front decoration base 2103. And a front center decorative substrate 2104 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the front decoration base 2103, is provided with a predetermined decoration, and is decorated with light by the front center decoration substrate 2104. And a guide passage member 2106 for guiding a game ball received in the first start port 2002 downward, and a game ball attached to the guide path member 2106 and received in the first start port 2002 is detected. A first starting port sensor 2107.

  The ball receiving member 2102 is formed in a container shape in which the upper part and the rear part are opened, and can receive a game ball from above as the first starting port 2002 and guide it to the rear part. The front decoration base 2103 extends evenly to the left and right around the ball receiving member 2102 (first starting port 2002), and is inclined so that the upper surface becomes lower toward both left and right ends. The front decoration member 2105 has a fake portion 2105a formed in a plate shape and having substantially the same size and shape as a lower large winning opening door member 2352 that opens and closes a lower large winning opening 2005 described later. ing. By the fake portion 2105a, it is possible to give an illusion to the player as if there is a special winning opening below the first starting opening 2002.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. 94 and the like. The side unit 2200 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

  The side unit 2200 is mounted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002. And two first ball receiving members 2202 projecting forward to form a general winning opening 2001, and a general winning opening attached to the front of the unit base 2201 to the left from the center in the left-right direction and projecting forward. A second ball receiving member 2203 forming 2001, a side decoration substrate 2204 disposed behind the unit base 2201 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and covering the side decoration substrate 2204 from behind. A substrate cover 2205 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2201.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left as viewed from the front. Further, the unit base 2201 has a first shelf 2201a that is inclined leftward and lower at a position above and to the left of a portion where the second ball receiving member 2203 is attached. And a protruding portion 2201b protruding from The unit base 2201 has a light-transmitting property, and is light-emitting decorated by the side decoration substrate 2204.

The first ball receiving member 2202 is formed in a container shape with the upper part and the rear part opened, and can receive a game ball from above as a general winning opening 2001 and can be guided to the rear part.
The second ball receiving member 2203 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and has a second shelf 2203a that is inclined on the upper surface so as to be lower rightward, and a second shelf 2203a below the second shelf 2203a. And a ball receiving portion 2203b that opens to the upper left on the side and forms a general winning opening 2001.

  The substrate cover 2205 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open front, and is opened upward at a portion behind the ball receiving portion 2203b of the two first ball receiving members 2202 and the second ball receiving member 2203. And has a gutter-shaped guiding portion 2205a that extends backward and forward and guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward.

  The side unit 2200 has the board cover 2205 inserted into the attachment port 1112 in a state where the board cover 2205 is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). It can be guided behind the plate 1112.

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. 95 and the like. The attacker unit 2300 is disposed at the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2300 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a lower winning opening 2005. Specifically, a second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and a gate section 2003 is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2004. Below the second starting opening 2004, a lower winning opening 2005 is arranged. The lower large winning opening 2005 extends left and right from directly below the second starting opening 2004 to immediately to the left beyond directly below the general winning opening 2001.

  The attacker unit 2300 has a general winning opening 2001 and a gate portion 2003, and has a unit base 2301 attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front and a front base of the unit base 2301 and has a second starting opening 2004 in front of it. The starting port front member 2302 to be decorated, the shelf member 2303 attached to the front of the unit base 2301 between the starting port front member 2302 and the lower big winning opening 2005 and protruding forward, and the unit base 2301 A ball guiding member 2304 mounted on the rear side for guiding a game ball received by the second starting port 2004; a gate sensor 2305 mounted on the unit base 2301 for detecting the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003; , Is provided.

  Further, the attacker unit 2300 is disposed at a position corresponding to a position between the starter front member 2302 and the shelf member 2303 on the rear side of the unit base 2301 and has a lower attacker decorative board 2306 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A board cover 2307 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 so as to cover the back of the lower attacker decorative board 2306; and a lattice frame-shaped light shield attached between the lower attacker decorative board 2306 and the unit base 2301. (Not shown).

  The attacker unit 2300 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and opens and closes the second starting port 2004. And a lower large winning opening unit 2350 that opens and closes.

  In the unit base 2301, the gate 2003 protrudes forward from the upper end, and one general winning opening 2001 protrudes forward from the lower left portion of the gate 2003 when viewed from the front. Further, the unit base 2301 includes a gutter-like gutter portion 2301a for guiding a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward. This unit base 2301 has translucency.

  The starting port front member 2302 includes a pair of side walls 2302a (see FIG. 175 (a)) extending forward along both left and right sides of the second starting port 2004 and an upper end of the left side wall 2302a when viewed from the front. A guiding portion 2302b extending so as to be higher toward the left; a flat outer wall portion 2302c extending forward from the right side wall portion 2302a in a front view with a distance allowing the game ball to pass therethrough; , A pair of side wall portions 2302a, a guiding portion 2302b, and a flat front plate portion 2302d connecting the front ends of the outer wall portions 2302c. The guide portion 2302b has a left end extending leftward from the gate portion 2003.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (a) and the like, the upper surface of the shelf member 2303 extends from directly below the right side wall 2302a of the starting port front member 2302 to immediately below the left and right center of the general winning opening 2001 so that the left end becomes lower. ing. Thereby, when the lower game winning opening 2005 is in the open state, when the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the shelf member 2303 and is discharged from the left end, the game ball is accepted into the lower special winning opening 2005 with extremely high probability. The ball guiding member 2304 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2307. In addition, the ball guiding member 2304 passes the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 through the second starting port unit 2320 and the lower large winning port unit 2350 behind the unit base 2301 to form a lower winning port. After being guided backward from the unit 2350, it is formed so as to be discharged downward.

  The second starting port unit 2320 includes a front case 2321 mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 2301 with a second starting port 2004 opened at the front end, and a rear case 2322 mounted on the rear side of the front case 2321. A second starting port door member 2323 supported in the front case 2321 so as to be able to protrude forward from the second starting port 2004 so as to be slidable forward and backward; A starting port solenoid 2324 mounted in the case 2322 and a second starting port sensor 2325 mounted to be sandwiched between the front case 2321 and the rear case 2322 and detecting a game ball received in the second starting port 2004. And

  When assembled to the attacker unit 2300, the second starting port unit 2320 has the front end of the front case 2321 penetrating the unit base 2301 from behind, and is located on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the unit base 2301. Thus, the second start port 2004 is opened forward. In a normal state where the starting port solenoid 2324 is not energized, the second starting port door member 2323 is immersed in the front case 2321, and the game ball flowing down in front of the second starting port 2004 is the second starting port. Without entering 2004, it flows down past the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, when the starting port solenoid 2324 is energized, the second starting port door member 2323 projects to the front from the second starting port 2004. In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the second start port 2004, the game ball contacts the second start port door member 2323, and the flowing direction changes from below to the rear, and the game ball enters the second start port 2004. Accepted. The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is guided by the ball guiding member 2304 and discharged downward after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2325.

  The lower big winning opening unit 2350 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 and has a rectangular lower winning opening 2005 extending left and right on the front surface, and a unit case 2351 and a lower case winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed. The lower winning opening door member 2352, which is a horizontally long rectangular flat plate and is rotatably attached to the 2351, and the lower winning opening door member 2352 which is mounted in the unit case 2351 and which is opened and closed according to the game state. Lower big winning opening solenoid 2353, lower big winning opening sensor 2354 attached to unit case 2351 and detecting a game ball received in lower big winning opening 2005, and attached to the lower surface of unit case 2351 and attached to the upper surface Lower winning award opening decorative board 2355 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and lower winning award opening solenoid 235 Includes inferior vena winning hole sensors 2354, starting opening the solenoid 2324, and a second start hole sensor 2325 or the like, the attacker unit relay board 2356 relaying the connection between the main control board, the.

  The lower college winning opening 2005 is open forward. The lower winning opening door 2352, which can open and close the lower winning opening 2005, is rotatably attached to the left and right ends of the lower side by a unit case 2351, and rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward. By doing so, the lower large winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

  In the lower special winning opening unit 2350, the lower special winning opening door member 2352 stands upright and the lower special winning opening 2005 is closed when the lower special winning opening solenoid 2353 is in a normal state in which power is not supplied. Then, when the lower large winning opening solenoid 2353 is energized according to the gaming state, the lower large winning opening door member 2352 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly higher than the lower side. It will be located. That is, the lower large winning opening door member 2352 is inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the lower large winning opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the lower winning a prize opening 2005 and abuts against the lower winning prize opening door member 2352, the distribution direction changes from downward to backward due to the inclination of the lower winning prize opening door member 2352, It will be accepted at the lower prize winning opening 2005. Then, the game balls received in the lower winning a prize port 2005 are discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2351 after being detected by the lower prize winning port sensor 2354.

[5-8d. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. The center role item 2500 is disposed slightly above the starting port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 at the approximate center in front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the center liquid crystal display device 1500 disposed behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. The center role item 2500 has an upper winning prize opening 2006 that can receive a game ball according to a game state. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, a part of the lower center part 2500 extends downward between the starter unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 to the vicinity of the lower right rail 1004 as shown in FIG. 83 and the like. That is, the center role 2500 divides the game area 5a into right and left.

  The center role 2500 is a flat frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the mounting opening 1112 that is largely opened at the center of the panel plate 1112, and projects forward from the flange portion 2511. A frame-shaped center base having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 for preventing game balls from entering the cage frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 protruding rearward from the flange portion 2511 and inserted into the mounting port 1112. 2510.

  The front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 is formed over substantially the entire periphery of the flange portion 2511 except for a part of the lower side. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is highest at a position slightly leftward from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

  In addition, the center role item 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 and the warp entrance 2520 in which the game ball in the game area 5a is open on the outer peripheral surface at the lower left side in the front view on the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center base 2510 so that the game ball can enter. Passage 2521 that guides the played game ball to the lower side near the left end in front view within the frame of the center base 2510, a warp exit 2523 that is open at the downstream end of the warp passage 2521 so that the game ball can pass, and a warp exit 2523 And a stage 2530 that is capable of rolling the game balls released from the base, extends right and left along the lower side within the frame of the center base 2510, and discharges the supplied game balls into the game area 5a. ing.

  The stage 2530 is curved so that both left and right ends are high and the left and right sides of a portion corresponding to the center in the left and right direction of the game area 5a are lowest, and swells so as to be slightly higher between the lowest portions. I have. The stage 2530 is formed at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and is formed at a center guiding groove 2531 cut away from the front end to the rear, and at two lowermost portions, respectively. And a fan-shaped side guide groove 2532 that lowers toward the right and spreads left and right. In a state in which the game board 5 is assembled, the first starting port 2002 is located immediately below the central guiding groove 2531, and the game balls discharged from the central guiding groove 2531 into the game area 5a have a very high probability of the first ball. It is received in the starting opening 2002.

  In addition, the center role item 2500 is attached to the right end of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball, which comes into contact with the stop portion 1006 and rebounds, toward the upper game space 2541 described later. A portion 2540 is provided. The guide portion 2540 is formed of a separate member from the center accessory 2500 and is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to extend the upper right edge of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 in the front view rightward direction. The guiding portion 2540 is formed of a resin having a higher strength than the center role 2500. Specifically, the center role 2500 is formed of a PC resin (polycarbonate resin), while the guide portion 2540 is formed of a POM resin (polyacetal resin) which is more durable than the PC resin.

  As described above, when the game ball hit into the game area 5a comes into contact with the stop portion 1006, the game ball looses its momentum. The part 2512 is rebounded toward the upper side. In addition, most players rotate the handle lever 504 to the maximum to drive the game ball in order to make the game ball abut on the stop portion 1006. It is stronger than normal games that aim to win. Then, when the game ball hit in this way is bounced back by the impact portion 1006, the center ball 2500 may be damaged by frequently dropping on the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500. Therefore, the right end of the upper side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 when viewed from the front is attached to the center role 2500 as a guide member 2540 of a separate member, and the center role 2500 is prevented from being damaged by being formed of a highly durable POM resin. ing. In this example, since only the guiding portion 2540 is formed of the POM resin without forming the center role 2500 entirely with the POM resin, even if the guiding portion 2540 is damaged, only the guiding portion 2540 is replaced. Can be repaired, and can be easily repaired even when damaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 176 to be described later, the guide portion 2540 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to have a step with the front peripheral wall portion 2512. In this example, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is attached such that the upper side thereof is higher than the upper side of the guide portion 2540 in front view. Thus, when the game ball rebounded by the impact portion 1006 reaches this step, the ball is returned to the upper game space 2541 without exceeding the step. In addition, the upper side of the guide portion 2540 has a low friction coefficient due to a smooth mirror surface finish, and allows the game ball, which cannot exceed the step between the front peripheral wall portion 2512 and the guide portion 2540, to quickly flow down to the upper game space 2541. Therefore, occurrence of clogging of the ball due to the game ball staying on the upper side of the guiding section 2540 can be suppressed.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 176 to be described later, the upper side of the guide portion 2540 is formed by a three-dimensional member longer than the right side (left and right sides). The upper side of the guide section 2540 needs a certain length or more to receive the game ball bounced back by the impact section 1006, but by making the upper side and the right side (left and right sides) approximately the same, the space in the game area 5a is obtained. And the degree of freedom in designing a gaming machine is reduced. Therefore, by forming the right side (left and right sides) of the guide portion 2540 shorter than the upper side, a space in the up-down direction in the front view of the game area 5a is secured, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine is not reduced.

  The center role 2500 is sandwiched between the guiding portion 2540 and the stop portion 1006 and has an upper right entrance where a game ball in the game area 5a is open to enter, and an upper side of the center base 2510 below the upper right entrance. The upper game space 2541 having a predetermined size in which the upper winning prize opening 2006 is formed on the right side of the center base 2510 from the right end in front view at the bottom of the upper game space 2541 along the right side of the center base 2510. A right passage 2542 through which game balls can flow, and a lower right exit 2543 opening downward at the lower end of the right passage 2542. .

  The upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the upper part is widened upward. The upper game space 2541 is formed to have a size that allows the game balls to move sufficiently in the vertical and horizontal directions. In the upper gaming space 2541, an upper winning prize opening 2006 is opened to the left in a front view from the upper right entrance. In addition, the upper game space 2541 has a guide portion 2541a that is inclined so as to become lower rightward in a front view immediately below the upper right entrance. By this guide portion 2541a, the game ball falling through the upper right entrance is rolled along the bottom surface of the upper game space 2541 without jumping up in the upper game space 2541, and is smoothly guided to the right passage 2542. Can be done.

  The right passage 2542 is provided with a plurality of ridges 2542a extending left and right on the front and rear wall surfaces alternately in the vertical direction. Can be attenuated. The lower right exit 2543 opens right above the gate 2003 in the attacker unit 2300 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) also between the lower right exit 2543 and the gate portion 2003.

  In addition, the center role 2500 includes an upper winning opening door member 2550 that closes the upper winning opening 2006, and an upper winning opening solenoid 2551 that opens and closes the upper winning opening door member 2550 in accordance with a game state. , An upper winning prize port sensor 2552 for detecting a game ball received in the upper prize winning port 2006, and a rear guide path 2553 for guiding the gaming sphere detected by the upper winning prize port sensor 2552 to the rear of the flange portion 2511 ( 175), a rear discharge port 2554 which is open at the rear end of the rear taxiway 2553 and through which a game ball can pass, and which branches off from the middle of the rear taxiway 2553 and which is located on the right side of the center base 2510 in a front view. An escape passage 2555 that guides the game ball downward along therewith, and a discharge port 2556 that is open at the lower end of the escape passage are provided.

  The upper winning opening door member 2550 opens and closes the upper winning opening 2006 which is open to the left in front view from the upper right entrance in the upper gaming space 2541. The upper winning a prize entrance door member 2550 is rotatably mounted on an axis extending downward and forward near the bottom surface of the upper gaming space 2541 on the lower left side of the upper right entrance, and the upper end is in an upright state. It extends to near the ceiling of the upper game space. The upper winning opening door member 2550 is upright in a normal state, and closes the upper winning opening 2006. Then, when power is supplied to the upper winning prize opening solenoid 2551 in accordance with the gaming state, the upper end rotates so as to move rightward in front view, and the upper winning prize opening 2006 is received so that a game ball can be received. Open. In this state, the upper end of the upper winning a prize entrance door member 2550 is higher than the lower end and is located to the right in front view of the upper right entrance. Accordingly, the game ball that has dropped into the upper winning opening door member 2550 through the upper right entrance is guided by the upper winning opening door member 2550 and is received in the upper winning opening 2006.

  The game ball received in the upper winning opening 2006 is detected by the upper winning opening sensor 2552 disposed at the lower left of the upper winning opening door member 2550, and thereafter is moved to the rear of the flange portion 2551 by the rear guide path 2553. Be guided. The rear discharge port 2554 which is open at the rear end of the rear guideway 2553 is usually formed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is closed. Therefore, when the game ball is not discharged from the rear discharge port 2554, the game ball enters the escape passage 2555 branched just before the rear discharge port 2554, and is discharged downward from the discharge port 2556 through the release passage 2555. .

  In addition, the center role item 2500 includes a front movable effect unit 2560 attached to the upper side of the center base 2510 and a front movable effect unit 2570 attached to the lower side of the center base 2510. The top movable effector unit 2560 of the center role item 2500 is attached to the center base 2510 so as to be able to move up and down and is decorated with a decoration according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1; A front movable decorative body decorative board (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the upper movable decorative body 2561 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, and a game state mounted on the rear side of the center base 2510 And a top drive motor 2563 that raises and lowers the top movable decorative body 2561 according to.

  The front and bottom movable effecting unit 2570 is attached to a portion extending below the stage 2530 on the lower side of the center base 2510, and is a flat, translucent table with a decoration on the front surface. After the lower decorative body 2571, the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574, which are rotatably mounted in front of the front and lower decorative bodies 2571, and after the center base 2510. And a rear drive motor 2575 for rotating the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 in accordance with a gaming state, and a rear side of the front and lower decorative body 2571. And a front and bottom movable decorative body decoration board 2576 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  In the front and rear movable rendering unit 2570, the first rotating decorative body 2572, the second rotating decorative body 2573, and the third rotating decorative body 2574 are formed in a shape imitating a shuriken. , Rotate in the same direction.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. In addition, a central liquid crystal display device 1500 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with a front opening and a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the liquid crystal display device 1500, and a game ball attached near the lower left front end of the back box 3010 and guided to the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 by guiding the game ball downward to the substrate. A lower left ball passage unit 3030 discharging onto the holder 1200 and a game ball attached to the lower right side front end of the back box 3010 and received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 and received in the upper winning opening 2006. The outlet 3303a of the rear lower right base 3303 in the rear right movable rendering unit 3300 described later. A lower right ball passage unit 3040 and a lower left ball passage unit for guiding the discharged game balls and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 2556 of the escape passage 2555 of the center role 2500 downward and discharging them onto the substrate holder 1200. A general winning opening sensor 3050 which is attached to the 3030 and the lower right ball passage unit 3040, respectively, and detects a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 to the left of the opening 3010a in rear view, and drives a decorative board based on a control command from a peripheral control board. A lamp driving board cover 3061 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear of the board 3060, and a control command from the peripheral control board attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a in rear view. A motor drive board 3062 for driving each drive motor based on the motor drive board, a motor drive board cover 3063 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear view of the back face of the back box 3010. It is installed in the lower left corner and relays the connection between the main control board and each winning opening sensor and each winning opening solenoid. That the panel relay board 3064, and a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 attached along the upper side and the left side at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back upper movable effect unit mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a lower back front movable effect unit 3200 attached below the opening 3010 a near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable effect attached to the right side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A unit 3300, a back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and an attachment below the opening 3010a and behind the back lower movable effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The back-to-bottom movable production unit 3500, the back-to-back movable production unit 3100 in the back box 3010, and the back-to-bottom movable A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The back box 3010 has a box-like shape with an open front, and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a frame-like liquid crystal mounting projecting rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a in a flat plate shape. A portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear and into which the left fixing piece 1501 of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is inserted, and a rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. And a notch portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the left side.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface in a rear view so as to be slidable up and down.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

  Although a detailed description of the back box 3010 is omitted, bosses and mounting holes for mounting the movable effect units and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Lower left ball passage unit]
Next, the lower left ball passage unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 is attached to a portion corresponding to the rear of the side unit 2200 in the back box 3010. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 has an L-shape in a front view shape in which a side extending vertically is shorter than a side extending left and right, and is formed hollow. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 has three entrances 3031 that are open frontward on the front surface and through which game balls can pass. These three entrances 3031 are formed at positions corresponding to the three guiding portions 2205a in the side unit 2200.

  In the lower left ball passage unit 3030, the hollow interior is inclined so as to become lower rightward when viewed from the front, and the game balls entering from the three entrances 3031 are discharged downward near the right end of the lower surface. You. A general winning opening sensor 3050 is attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030, and a game ball that has entered the inside from the entrance 3031 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030.

[5-9c. Lower right ball passage unit]
Next, the lower right ball passage unit 3040 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is attached to a portion of the back box 3010 corresponding to the rear of the attacker unit 2300. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is opened forward and has a first entrance 3041 through which a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 can enter, and a back right movable rendering unit 3300 described later. A second entrance 3042 that opens upward just below the outlet 3303a that opens on the lower surface of the bottom, and a center that opens upward right and upward in the front view of the second entrance 3042. A third entrance 3043 through which the game ball discharged from the outlet 2556 through the escape passage 2555 of the accessory 2500 can enter.

  The lower right ball passage unit 3040 discharges the game balls that have entered the first entrance 3041, the second entrance 3042, and the third entrance 3043 downward through independent paths. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 3050 for detecting a game ball that has entered the first entrance 3041. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

[5-9d. Back peripheral decoration unit]
Next, the back peripheral decoration unit 3080 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The back peripheral decoration unit 3080 is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front end of the back box 3010 at a portion corresponding to the upper side, the left side, and the lower left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a. This rear peripheral decoration unit 3080 is attached to the rear peripheral decorative member 3081 extending in a C-shape and having translucency and a rear peripheral decorative member 3081. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. And a substrate cover 3083 that covers the rear side of the rear peripheral decorative member 3081 and covers the rear side of the rear peripheral decorative substrate 3082.

  The back peripheral decoration unit 3080 can make the back peripheral decoration member 3081 emit light by appropriately lighting the LED of the back peripheral decoration substrate 3082. Further, in a state where the game board 5 is assembled, the front surface of the back peripheral decoration member 3081 can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1110, and the outside of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a is decorated.

[5-9e. Movable production unit on the back]
Next, the back upper movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper decorative body unit of the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. Further, FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper back sub-decorative body in the upper back movable decorative body unit. FIG. 108 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the back upper decorative unit of the back upper movable effect unit is in the retracted position. FIG. FIG. 110 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism at the appearance position, and FIG. 110 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the back upper decorative body unit of the back upper movable effect unit is at the second appearance position.

  FIG. 111 (a) is a front view showing a part of the internal mechanism of the back upper movable effect unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is a perspective view of a part of the internal mechanism different from (a) viewed from the front. , (C) is a perspective view of (b) viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of a part of the internal mechanism of the back upper movable effect unit. FIG. 113 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state of main members constituting the internal mechanism at the retracted position, and FIG. 113 (b) shows a state in which the first transmission member rotates from the state of FIG. FIG. 114C is a diagram illustrating a state in which transmission of rotation to the transmitted member has been started. FIG. 114C illustrates a state in which the first transmitted member is further rotated together with the first transmitted member from the state illustrated in FIG. 113B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the upper decorative body unit is descend | falling from a retreat position to a 1st appearance position, (d) The 1st transmission member rotates further with the 1st transmission member from the state of (c). It is an explanatory view showing the state where transmission of rotation to the first transmitted member was completed, and the upper back decoration object unit reached the first appearance position.

  Further, FIG. 115 (e) shows that the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism that has been rotated together with the first transmission member from the state of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which started, and (f) is a 2nd transmission member rotates with a 2nd transmission member from the state of (e), and a decoration unit on the back changes from a 1st appearance position to a 2nd appearance position. FIG. 116 (g) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the second transmitted member rotates together with the second transmitting member from the state shown in FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the state where the body unit is rotating while further descending toward the second appearance position, and (h) shows that the second transmitted member rotates further together with the second transmission member from the state of (g). The transmission of the rotation to the second transmitted member ends, and the back upper decorative body unit is in the first appearance position. While descending from the state is an explanatory view showing a state that has reached the second occurrence position by half turn.

  The upper back movable rendering unit 3100 is mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The rear upper movable effecting unit 3100 is mounted in the back box 3010 and extends left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 3101 to form a space between the unit base 3101 and the unit base 3101. A rear cover 3102, a rear upper drive motor 3103 attached to the front surface near the right end of the unit base 3101 when viewed from the front, and having a rotating shaft protruding between the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102 through the unit base 3101; , Is provided.

  In addition, the back upper movable rendering unit 3100 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3104 fixed to the rotation shaft of the back upper drive motor 3103, and a spur gear-shaped first large-diameter gear 3105a meshed with the drive gear 3104. And a first small-diameter gear 3105b that is smaller in diameter than the first large-diameter gear 3105a and that rotates integrally with the first large-diameter gear 3105a on the rear side of the first large-diameter gear 3105a. The first driven gear 3105 disposed on the other side, and a smaller diameter than the second large diameter gear 3106a and the second large diameter gear 3106a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first small diameter gear 3105b of the first driven gear 3105 And a second small-diameter gear 3106b that rotates integrally with the second large-diameter gear 3106a in front of the second large-diameter gear 3106a, and is disposed on the left side of the first driven gear 3105 in a front view. It has a second driven gear 3106 and a first transmission gear 3107a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the second small-diameter gear 3106b of the second driven gear 3106, and is disposed to the left of the second driven gear 3106 in a front view. A first transmission member 3107, and a second transmission gear 3108a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107, and are disposed on the left side of the first transmission member 3107 in a front view. (See FIG. 111 (a) and the like).

  The first driven gear 3105, the second driven gear 3106, the first transmission member 3107, and the second transmission member 3108 are rotatable between the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102 by the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102. Installed.

  The first transmission member 3107 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3107b protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3107a in parallel with the rotation axis, and a revolution of the first transmission pin 3107b. A disc-shaped first lock projection 3107c projecting concentrically forward from the front surface of the first transmission gear 3107a with a radius smaller than the radius, and a portion between the first lock projection 3107c and the first transmission pin 3107b, From a uniform range on both sides of an axis connecting the center of the first transmission gear 3107a and the center of the first transmission pin 3107b on the outer peripheral surface of the first lock projection 3107c, toward the center of the first lock projection 3107c. And a first notch 3107d cut out in a fan shape.

  The second transmission member 3108 includes a cylindrical second transmission pin 3108b protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3108a in parallel with the rotation axis, and a revolving motion of the second transmission pin 3108b. A disc-shaped second lock projection 3108c projecting concentrically forward from the front surface of the second transmission gear 3108a with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the second lock projection 3108c and the second transmission pin 3108b, From an even range on both sides with an axis connecting the center of the second transmission gear 3108a and the center of the second transmission pin 3108b on the outer peripheral surface of the second lock projection 3108c toward the center of the second lock projection 3108c. And a second cutout 3108d cut out in a fan shape.

  The first transmission gear 3107a and the second transmission gear 3108a of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 have the same diameter. The first transmission pin 3107b and the second transmission pin 3108b of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 have the same cylindrical diameter and the same orbital radius. The first lock projection 3107c and the second lock projection 3108c of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 have the same diameter. Further, the first notch 3107d and the second notch 3108d of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are formed at an angle of 72 degrees with respect to the circumference of the first lock projection 3107c and the second lock projection 3108c. It is formed in a fan shape in the angle range.

  Furthermore, the rear upper movable effecting unit 3100 has a columnar slide shaft 3109 having a lower end attached to the unit base 3101 at the front surface near the left end in front view of the unit base 3101 and extending vertically, and an upper end of the slide shaft 3109. A shaft mounting member 3110 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3101, a left slider 3111 having a flat plate detecting piece 3111a mounted slidably up and down by a slide shaft 3109 and extending rearward; A back-up / down detection sensor 3112 which is attached to the unit base 3101 by detecting the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111, and an upper part is attached to the front of the unit base 3101 on the left side in front view of the back upper drive motor 3103. , Lower end is unit base 310 A rail bracket 3113 extending vertically so as to protrude downward from the lower surface of the rail, a slide rail 3114 attached to a left side surface of the rail bracket 3113 in a front view, and having a right slider 3114a that slides vertically; A rack member 3115 attached to a right slider 3114a of a rail 3114 and having a rack gear 3115a extending vertically, and a first movable plate having left and right ends attached to a left slider 3111 and a rack member 3115, respectively. And a base 3116.

  In addition, the back upper movable rendering unit 3100 has a flat first substrate portion 3117a formed in a droplet shape, and a columnar first substrate portion 3117a having a columnar first projection protruding forward from the tip of the droplet shape. It has a working pin 3117b, and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 so that the first working pin 3117b revolves at a position on the front surface of the unit base 3101 on the right side of the first transmission member 3107 when viewed from the front. A first transmitted member 3117 capable of transmitting the rotation of the first transmitting member 3107, and a first bearing slit 3118a into which the first working pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction. And a bearing member 3118 attached to the rear surface of the first movable base 3116.

  The first movable base 3116 has an opening 3116a penetrating back and forth and extending from the lower end to near the center in the vertical direction. On the rear surface of the first movable base 3116, a rack member 3115 is mounted to the right of the opening 3116a in a front view. The rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 extends along the opening 3116a with the tip of the rack facing leftward in front view.

  The first movable base 3116 is slidably moved up and down (movable up and down) by a slide shaft 3109 and a slide rail 3114 via a left slider 3111 and a right slider 3114a. Further, the position of the first movable base 3116 in the vertical direction is regulated by the first working pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 inserted into the first bearing slit 3118a of the bearing member 3118. Therefore, when the first transmitted member 3117 is rotated to revolve the first working pin 3117b to change the vertical position of the first working pin 3117b, the first working pin 3117b moves inside the first bearing slit 3118a. While sliding in the left-right direction, the first movable base 3116 slides in the up-down direction. That is, when the first transmitted member 3117 is rotated, the first movable base 3116 slides up and down.

  The first base plate portion 3117a of the first driven member 3117 has a shape in a front view, the base circle having substantially the same diameter as the root diameter of the gear teeth of the second large-diameter gear 3106a of the second driven gear 3106, and the base circle thereof. And two sides extending so as to be in contact with each other from outside. The first driven member 3117 has a center of rotation of the base circle in the first base portion 3117a as a center of rotation, and the center of rotation is coaxial with the center of the second driven gear 3106. The first working pin 3117b protrudes from the vicinity of the intersection of two sides in contact with the base circle of the first substrate portion 3117a (flow-drop-shaped tip).

  The first transmitted member 3117 has the same diameter as the base circle of the first substrate portion 3117a and has a cylindrical first transmitted main body portion 3117c projecting rearward from the rear surface of the first substrate portion 3117a; A first transmission slit 3117d recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3117c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3107b is slidably inserted, and a first transmission slit 3117d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3117c. And a pair of first lock recesses 3117e that are recessed in an arc from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The first lock recess 3117e is recessed by an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3107c of the first transmission member 3107. Further, the pair of first lock recesses 3117e are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective concave arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state where the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is assembled, the first transmitted member 3117 includes the first transmitted pin 3107b and the first lock projection 3107c of the first transmitted member 3107, The position in the front-back direction is the same. Thereby, the first transmission pin 3107b can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d, and rotation can be transmitted through the first transmission pin 3170b and the first transmission slit 3117d. In addition, a part of the first lock projection 3107c can be inserted into the first lock recess 3117e, and the first lock projection 3107c is inserted into the first lock recess 3117e, whereby the first lock projection 3107c is inserted. The rotation of the transmitted member 3117 can be restricted (locked).

  In addition, the upper back movable rendering unit 3100 has a second bearing slit 3119a penetrating front and rear and extending left and right at an upper end portion, and a bearing hole 3119b penetrating front and rear at substantially the center in the vertical direction. The second movable base 3119 is vertically slidably mounted on the rear surface of the first movable base 3116 so that the bearing hole 3119b faces forward from the opening 3116a, and is disposed in front of the first movable base 3116. And a back upper decorative body having a shaft portion 3151a rotatably inserted into a bearing hole 3119a of the second movable base 3119 and imitating a head including a face of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Unit 3150 and a rear end of the shaft 3151a of the upper back decoration unit 3150 penetrating the second movable base 3119. A spur gear-shaped decorative body rotating gear 3120 meshing with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115, and a flat gear mounted on the rear surface of the second movable base 3119 so as to cover the rear of the decorative body rotating gear 3120. And a cover 3121.

  When the second movable base 3119 is slid relative to the first movable base 3116, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 attached to the bearing hole 3119b of the second movable base 3119 is also together with the second movable base 3119. Slide to. At this time, the decorative body rotating gear 3120 mounted on the shaft 3151a of the back upper decorative body unit 3150 meshes with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 mounted on the first movable base 3116. When the two movable bases 3119 slide, the decorative body rotating gear 3120 rotates together with the back upper decorative body unit 3150.

  Further, the back upper movable effecting unit 3100 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 below the front view second transmitting member 3108 and in front of the unit base 3101 so that the rotation of the second transmitting member 3108 can be transmitted. A second transmitted member 3122, a rotating link member 3123 mounted on the front surface of the second transmitted member 3122 so as to be slidable in a direction along the rotation surface, and a second transmitted member on the front surface of the rotating link member 3123. It is slidably mounted in a direction intersecting the sliding direction with respect to 3122, and is rotatably mounted behind the first movable base 3116, and projects rearward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center. A cylindrical second working pin 312 slidably inserted into the second bearing slit 3119a of the movable base 3119. Includes a second movable base driving member 3124 to have a, a shaft member 3125 are rotatably mounted relative to the second movable base driving member 3124 first movable base 3116, a.

  The second transmitted member 3122 includes a disk-shaped second substrate portion 3122a rotatably attached to the unit base 3101, and a cylindrical second transmitted main body portion 3122b protruding rearward from a peripheral edge of the second substrate portion 3122a. A second transmission slit 3122c that is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body 3122b toward the center and into which the second transmission pin 3108b is slidably inserted, and an outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body 3122b On both sides of the second transmission slit 3122c, a pair of second lock recesses 3122d recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center, and a pair of second lock recesses 3122d recessed rearward from the front surface of the second substrate portion 3122a and with respect to the rotation axis. And a groove-shaped first transmission guide portion 3122e extending at a right angle and having one end opening to the outer peripheral surface of the second substrate portion 3122a. (See, etc. FIG. 111 (b) and (c)).

  In the second transmitted member 3122, the radius of the second substrate portion 3122a (the second transmitted main body portion 3122b) is shorter than the distance from the rotation center to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and the second lock projection is formed. It is formed longer than the distance to the outer peripheral surface of 3108c. The second lock recess 3122d is recessed by an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3108c of the second transmission member 3108. The pair of second lock recesses 3122d is formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective concave arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  The first guide transmission portion 3122e extends at an angle of 54 degrees with respect to the direction in which the second transmission slit 3122c extends. Further, the first guide transmission portion 3122e is opened on the peripheral surface in a direction opposite to the direction in which the second transmission slit 3122c is opened on the peripheral surface.

  The rotary link member 3123 has a flat link body 3123a and a flat plate protruding from the rear surface of the link body 3123a and slidably inserted into the first transmission guide 3122e of the second transmitted member 3122. A pair of first transmitted guide portions 3123b, a front projection 3123c projecting from the front surface of the link main body portion 3123a, and a first transmitted guide portion 3123b extending from the front surface of the front projection portion 3123c and extending backward. 111b (FIG. 111 (b) and (b)), which extends in a direction intersecting the direction in which the second projection is formed, and has a groove-shaped second transmission guide 3123d whose both ends are open to the outer peripheral surface of the front projection 3123c. c) etc.).

  The pair of first transmitted guide portions 3123b of the rotary link member 3123 are provided symmetrically with respect to an axis passing through the center of the link main body 3123a, and are provided eccentrically from the center. The second transmission guide 3123c is provided on an axis passing through the center of the link main body 3123a. The first transmitted guide portion 3123b and the second transmitted guide portion 3123c each extend in a direction intersecting at an angle of 95 degrees.

  The second movable base driving member 3124 protrudes rearward from a position where the second action pin 3124a is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation, and includes a driving main body 3124b rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116; A second transmitted guide portion that projects rearward from the rear surface of the portion 3124b, passes through the center of rotation, and extends perpendicular to the rotation axis, and is slidably inserted into the second transmission guide portion 3123d of the rotary link member 3123. 3124c (see FIGS. 111B and 111C).

  As shown in FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 includes a decorative body base 3151 having a flat plate-shaped shaft portion 3151a protruding from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape, and a decorative body base 3151. Attached to the front of the body 3152, which is three-dimensionally imitating the head of a predetermined character and has two elliptical openings 3152a. And a C-shaped upper back decoration board 3153 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side.

  Further, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is disposed substantially at the center of the front surface of the decorative body base 3151 behind the back upper decorative body 3152, and has a cylindrical guide shaft 3154 extending left and right, and both ends of the guide shaft 3154. A pair of shaft brackets 3155 attached to the front surface of the decorative body base 3151 and a guide shaft 3154 are attached so as to be able to guide left and right, and have a guide slit 3156a extending vertically at the lower center in the left-right direction. A slider 3156 for a sub-decorative body in the form of a flat plate and a slider 3156 for the sub-decorative body, which has a pair of openings 3152a of the upper back decoration 3152 closed and an elliptical portion facing the opening 3152a. The sub-decoration body 3157 provided with the sub-decoration 3157a of FIG. Includes a backing on a secondary decorative substrate 3158 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the front surface of the decorative body slider 3156 is mounted, the.

  Further, the upper back decoration unit 3150 is attached to the back upper sub-drive motor 3159 and the rotation shaft of the back upper sub-drive motor 3159 near the lower end of the front surface of the decoration base 3151 so that the rotation axis extends left and right. A worm gear 3160, a disc-shaped main body 3161 a rotatably mounted on the decorative body base 3151 above the worm gear 3160, and extending along the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3161 a and meshing with the worm gear 3160. Gear 3161b, an extension piece 3161c extending rearward of the sub-decorative body slider 3156 from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3161a on the side opposite to the gear part 3161b, and protruding forward from the tip of the extension piece 3161c. It is slidably inserted into guide slit 3156a of sub decoration body slider 3156. Columnar slide pin 3161D, a gear member 3161 that has a, and a.

  In the upper back decoration unit 3150, the two openings 3152a of the upper back decoration 3152 form the outer periphery of the eyes of a predetermined character, and the back upper decoration body 3157 facing forward from the two openings 3152a. The decoration 3157a forms the pupil. The back upper decorative body 3152 and the back upper decorative body 3157 have a light-transmitting property, and are illuminated and decorated by the LEDs of the back upper decorative board 3153 and the back upper decorative board 3158 that are arranged behind them. .

  As shown in the drawing, in the normal state, the back upper decorative unit 3150 is in a state where the head of a predetermined character simulated by the upper back decorative body 3152 is upside down. In addition, the upper back decoration unit 3150 can slide the upper back decoration 3157 to the left and right with respect to the upper back decoration 3152 by the rotational driving of the upper back drive motor 3159. Thereby, a movable effect in which the pupil (sub-decoration 3157a) of the predetermined character simulated by the back upper decorative body 3152 is left and right can be performed.

  Next, the operation of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. First, the operation of the upper back decoration 3157 in the upper back decoration unit 3150 will be described. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), in a normal state, the extension piece 3161c of the gear member 3161 is attached in a state of extending vertically upward. In this state, the sub decorative body slider 3156 is located substantially at the center of the sliding range extending left and right, and the two sub sub decorative bodies 3157 attached to the front surface of the sub decorative body slider 3156 are attached. The decorations 3157a are respectively located at substantially the centers in the two openings 3152a of the upper back decoration 3152. That is, in a normal state, a predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152 is looking at the front.

  In this normal state, for example, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated clockwise in the right side view by the back upper sub-drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161b meshed with the worm gear 3160 causes the gear member 3161 to be opposed to the front view. It rotates clockwise and revolves so that the sliding pin 3161d located above the center of rotation moves to the left. Due to the revolving movement of the sliding pin 3161d to the left, the sliding pin 3161d slides downward in the guide slit 3156a, and the sliding pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guide slit 3156a to the left. The body slider 3156 slides to the left. As a result, the sub-decoration 3157a moves to the left, so that the predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152 is looking to the left (see FIG. 107 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view by the back upper sub-drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161 rotates in the clockwise direction in front view by the gear portion 3161b meshing with the worm gear 3160. Then, the sliding pin 3161d located above the rotation center revolves to move rightward. Due to the revolving movement of the sliding pin 3161d rightward, the sliding pin 3161d slides downward in the guide slit 3156a, and the sliding pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guide slit 3156a rightward, so that the sub decoration is formed. The body slider 3156 slides to the right. As a result, the sub-decoration 3157a moves rightward, so that the predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152 is looking rightward (see FIG. 107 (c)).

  In this manner, the sub decoration 3157a can be moved right and left by the rotation of the rear upper driving motor 3159, so that a predetermined character simulated by the rear decoration 3152 can be seen depending on the game state. It is possible to perform a movable production in which the direction in which the user changes is changed. In addition, by moving the sub-decoration 3157a back and forth to the left and right, it is also possible to perform a moving effect of swaying the eyes of a predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152, and present a variety of moving effects to the player. can do.

  Subsequently, the up-and-down operation of the back upper decorative body unit 3150 in the back upper movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. The back upper movable effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment can raise and lower the back upper decorative body unit 3150 and rotate the back upper decorative body unit 3150 by 180 degrees.

  First, the internal mechanism of the upper back movable effect unit 3100 for raising and lowering the upper back decoration unit 3150 will be described. As shown in FIG. 108, FIG. 111, and the like, a rear upper drive motor 3103 having a rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction is disposed at the right end in front view. The center of rotation of the first driven gear 3105 that meshes with the drive gear 3104 attached to the rotation shaft of the upper back drive motor 3103 is disposed at the lower left in front view with respect to the center of rotation of the drive gear 3104. The rotation center of the second driven gear 3106 meshing with the first driven gear 3105 is disposed at the upper left of the rotation center of the first driven gear 3105 in a front view and substantially at the same height as the rotation center of the driving gear 3104. I have. In addition, the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107 having the first transmission gear 3107a meshing with the second driven gear 3106 is lower than the rotation center of the second driven gear 3106 at the lower left in front view, and the rotation of the first driven gear 3105 It is located at approximately the same height as the center. Furthermore, the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 having the second transmission gear 3108a meshing with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107 is located at the upper left of the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107 in front view, It is arranged at a position higher than the rotation center of the second driven gear 3106.

  The rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117 to which the rotation from the first transmission member 3106 is transmitted is at the upper right of the rotation center of the first transmission member 3106 in a front view, and is coaxial with the second driven gear 3106. Is located in the position. On the other hand, the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 to which the rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted is slightly leftward from directly below the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 when viewed from the front, and the rotation center of the second transmission member 3107 is It is arranged at a position lower than the rotation center. The rotation center of the second movable base driving member 3124 to which the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is transmitted is arranged on an axis vertically extending vertically passing through the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122.

  In the normal state, the upper back decoration unit 3150 is located at the rising end in the vertical up and down range, and the top and bottom of the predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152 is reversed. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like, most of the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is located behind the center role 2500, and only a small part of the frame is the center role 2500. It can be visually recognized from the player side through the inside. That is, in the normal state, the upper back decoration unit 3150 is located at the evacuation position where it is hardly visible from the player side.

  When the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the retracted position, the first transmission pin 3107b of the first transmission member 3107 is in front of the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107, as shown in FIGS. It is located at the upper left of the view (a position inclined about 27 degrees to the left from the vertical line), and the second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmission member 3108 is located at the upper right of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 ( (A position inclined about 13 degrees to the right from the vertical line). In the retracted position, the first working pin 3117b of the first transmitted member 3117 is at the upper left (in a position inclined about 45 degrees leftward from the vertical line) with respect to the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3117. ), And the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 has an angle smaller than the axis connecting the rotation center and the first working pin 3117b with respect to the horizontal (about 72 degrees with respect to the vertical line). (Angle of degree) and extends toward the upper left in front view.

  In the retracted position, the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122 extends from the rotation center toward the upper left in front view (approximately 36 degrees leftward from the vertical line). The second movable base driving member 3124 has a rotation center located above the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122 and slightly below the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and has a second action. The pin 3124a is located at the upper right of the front view (position inclined about 45 degrees rightward from the vertical line) with respect to the rotation center of the second movable base driving member 3124.

  Further, when in the retracted position, the first lock projection 3107c of the first transmission member 3107 is inserted into the first lock recess 3117e of one of the first transmitted members 3117 (closer to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107). ing. As a result, since the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 is restricted (locked), the first movable base 3116 does not slide up and down. Also, the second lock projection 3108c of the second transmission member 3108 is inserted into one of the second transmitted members 3122 (closer to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108) in the second lock recess 3122d. Thus, since the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is restricted (locked), the second movable base driving member 3124 does not rotate, and the second movable base 3119 does not slide up and down.

  Further, when the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the retracted position, the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 on which the first movable base 3116 is slidable up and down is detected by the back up / down detection sensor 3112.

  When the upper back drive motor 3103 rotates the drive gear 3104 in the counterclockwise direction in front view with the back upper decoration body unit 3150 in the retracted position, the first driven gear 3105 and the second driven gear 3105 The first transmission member 3107 rotates in the clockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the two driven gears 3106 at the same speed. Then, first, the first transmission pin 3107d of the first transmission member 3107 starts to enter the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 (see FIG. 113 (b)).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated in the clockwise direction, the first notch 3107d is rotated to the position of the first lock recess 3117e. The first lock projection 3107c is removed from the inside of the first lock recess 3117e, and the first transmission pin 3107b contacts the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3117d to press the first transmission slit 3117d downward. Accordingly, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117, and the first transmitted member 3117 rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. At this time, the first notch 3107d is located at the position of the first lock recess 3117e, and the first lock projection 3107c is released (locked) from the inside of the first lock recess 3117e. Therefore, the first transmitted member 3117 rotates without being prevented from rotating by the first lock projection 3107c (see FIG. 114 (c)).

  By rotating the first transmitted member 3117 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the first working pin 3117b revolves downward and the first working pin 3117b is slidably inserted. The first movable base 3116 slides downward through the one bearing slit 3118a. Since the upper back decoration unit 3150 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the back upper decoration unit 3105 slides downward together with the first movable base 3116.

  When the first movable base 3116 slides downward, the second transmission guide 3123d of the rotary link member 3123 extends vertically, so that the second transmission guide 3123d is attached to the first movable base 3116 and the second transmission guide 3123d. The second movable base driving member 3214 having the second transmitted guide portion 3124c guided by the first movable base 3116 can move downward together with the first movable base 3116, and the first movable base 3116 slides smoothly.

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, the first transmission pin 3107b is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3117d, and The lock projection 3107c enters another first lock recess 3117e different from the first lock recess 3117e into which the first lock projection 3107c was originally inserted. As a result, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3117 stops, and the downward sliding of the first movable base 3116 stops (see FIGS. 109 and 114 (d)). In this state, the first movable base 3116 is located at the lower end of the elevating range, and the upper decorative body unit 3150 is located at the first appearance position. In the first transmission member 3107, the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3107b is inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d of the first transmitted member 3117 is the first specific rotation range.

  In the state where the upper back decoration unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the upper and lower sides of the back upper decoration body 3152 are approximately half as shown in FIG. , Faces the player from within the frame of the center role 2500. In the state of the first appearance position, the pair of openings 3152a of the upper back decoration 3152 and the sub-decoration 3157a facing the opening 3152a can be partially visually recognized from the player side. Thereby, it is possible to present a movable effect as if a predetermined character simulated by the back upper decorative body 3152 is looking upside down from above.

  In the state where the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the second transmission pin 3108b of the second transmission member 3108 rotating together with the first transmission member 3107 is moved by the second transmission pin 3108 of the second transmitted member 3122. It has not reached the slit 3122c. Further, the rotation center of the second movable base driving member 3124 attached to the first movable base 3116 is located below the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3122, and the second rotation of the rotation link member 3123. Only the upper portion of the second transmitted guide portion 3124c of the second movable base driving member 3124 is guided by the transmission guide portion 3123d.

  From the state where the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated in the clockwise direction, and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated. Is further rotated counterclockwise in front view, the first transmission pin 3107b moves away from the first transmission slit 3117d, and the second transmission pin 3108b enters the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122. (See FIG. 115 (e)).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the second notch 3108d is rotated to the position of the second lock recess 3122d. The second lock projection 3108c is disengaged from the second lock recess 3122d, and the second transmission pin 3108b contacts the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3122c to press the second transmission slit 3122c rightward in front view. Accordingly, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmitted member 3122, and the second transmitted member 3122 rotates clockwise in front view. At this time, the second notch 3108d is located at the position of the second lock recess 3122d, and the second lock protrusion 3108c is released from the inside of the second lock recess 3122d (lock is released). Therefore, the second transmitted member 3122 rotates without being blocked by the second lock projection 3108c (see FIG. 115 (f)).

  When the second transmitted member 3122 rotates clockwise in a front view, the first transmitted guide portion 3122e formed on the front surface of the second transmitted member 3122 also rotates. The rotary link member 3123 having the first transmitted guide portion 3123b that is slidably guided also tries to rotate in the same clockwise direction. On the other hand, the upper part of the second transmitted guide portion 3124c of the second movable base driving member 3124, which is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116, slides on the second transmission guide portion 3123d on the front surface of the rotary link member 3123. Guided as possible. Thus, when the rotation link member 3123 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the first transmitted member 3122, the second transmission guide portion 3123d is also rotated, and the second transmission guide portion 3123d and the second transmitted guide are also rotated. An attempt is made to revolve the second movable base drive member 3124 around the rotary link member 3123 via the portion 3124c.

  However, since the second movable base driving member 3124 is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 and cannot revolve around the rotary link member 3123, the force acting on the second transmitted guide portion 3124c. Conversely, the rotation link member 3123 is about to revolve around the second movable base driving member 3124. At this time, the rotation link member 3123 intersects the direction in which the first transmission guide portion 3122e extends (first direction) and the direction in which the second transmission guide portion 3123d extends (first direction). (The second direction extending in the second direction), the rotation link member 3123 slides in the first direction and the second direction so that the force acting on the rotation link member 3123 is reduced. Becomes Accordingly, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3122 is transmitted to the second movable base driving member 3124 by the rotation of the rotary link member 3123 and the sliding in the first direction and the second direction, and the second movable base driving member 3124 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front (see FIGS. 115 (f) to 116 (h)).

  In other words, the rotation link member 3123 is forcibly rotated by the second transmitted member 3122 by the first transmitted guide portion 3122e and the first transmitted guide portion 3123b. When the rotation link member 3123 rotates clockwise in front view, the second transmission guide portion 3123d, which has been vertically extended in FIG. 115 (e), is inclined and inclined so that the upper end thereof moves rightward. (See FIG. 115 (f)). When the second transmission guide portion 3123d rotates and tilts, the second movable base driving member 3124 attempts to revolve via the second transmitted guide portion 3124c guided by the second transmission guide portion 3123d. Since the base driving member 3124 is attached to the first movable base 3116 and cannot revolve, the rotation link member 3123 causes the first transmission by the reaction force of the force acting from the rotating link member 3123 to the second movable base driving member 3124. It slides largely to the open side (right side in front view) along the guide portion 3122e, and slightly slides to the rotation center side (downward) of the second movable base drive member 3124 along the second transmission guide portion 3123d. Then, the second movable base driving member 3124 rotates at the same angle as the angle at which the second transmission guide portion 3123d is inclined.

  When the second movable base driving member 3124 rotates clockwise in front view, the second working pin 3124a revolves so as to move downward, so that the second working pin 3124a is slidably inserted. The second movable base 3119 slides downward via the second bearing slit 3119a. Since the upper back decoration unit 3150 is attached to the second movable base 3119, the back upper decoration unit 3105 slides further downward from the first appearance position together with the second movable base 3119. At this time, the back upper decorative body unit 3150 is rotatably mounted by the shaft 3151a and the bearing hole 3119b of the second movable base 3119, and the decorative body rotation mounted on the rear end of the shaft 3151a. Since the gear 3120 is meshed with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 attached to the first movable base 3116, when the second movable base 3119 slides downward, the decoration body rotating gear 3120 and the back decoration body are rotated together. The unit 3150 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 115 (f) and the like).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmitted member 3122 is further rotated in the clockwise direction via the second transmission member 3108, the rotating link member 3123 is connected to the second transmitted member 3122. It rotates in the clockwise direction at the same angle, further slides to the open side along the first transmission guide portion 3122e, and the center of the rotary link member 3123 is second movable along the second transmission guide portion 3123d. The second movable base driving member 3124 further rotates in the clockwise direction by sliding so as to approach the rotation center of the base driving member 3124. Accordingly, the back upper decoration unit 3150 slides further downward together with the second movable base 3119, and the back upper decoration unit 3150 further rotates counterclockwise (see FIG. 116 (g)).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the second transmission pin 3108b is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3122c and the second lock The protrusion 3108c enters another second lock recess 3122d different from the second lock recess 3122d into which the second lock protrusion 3108c was originally inserted. Accordingly, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is stopped, the downward sliding of the second movable base 3199 is stopped, and the upside-down decoration unit 3150 is turned 180 degrees with respect to the first appearance position. It stops in a rotated state (see FIGS. 110 and 116 (h)). This state is a state where the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are located at the lower end of the elevating range, and the upper decorative body unit 3150 is located at the second appearance position. . In the second transmission member 3108, the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3108b is inserted into the second transmission slit 3122c of the second transmitted member 3122 is the second specific rotation range.

  In the state where the back upper decorative body unit 3150 (back upper decorative body 3152) is in the second appearance position, the second lock projection 3108c of the second transmission member 3108 is located in the second lock recess 3122d of the second transmitted member 3122. Since it is inserted, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3122 is prevented, and the second movable base 3119 does not slide further downward. When the back decoration unit 3150 is in the second appearance position, as shown in FIG. 148, the top and bottom of the predetermined character simulated by the back decoration 3152 is in a normal state, and The upper decorative body 3152 is located substantially at the center in the frame of the center role 2500, and substantially the entire back upper decorative body 3152 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  When the back upper decorative body unit 3150 descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the back upper decorative body 3152 descends while rotating 180 degrees while descending while the upper back is reversed. Then, it is possible to present to the player a movable effect located substantially at the center of the frame of the center role 2500 (the front surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500) in a state where the top and the bottom are normal, which greatly surprises the player. Can be.

  When the drive gear 3104 is rotated in the range direction (clockwise in front view) by the back upper drive motor 3103 in a state where the back upper decorative unit 3150 is in the second appearance position, the back upper decorative unit 3150 is rotated. Rises toward the retreat position through the first appearance position while performing the reverse operation, and when the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 is detected by the back-up / down detection sensor 3112, the drive gear by the back-up drive motor 3103 The rotation of 3104 stops, and the upper back decoration unit 3150 returns to the retracted position.

  The back upper movable effect unit 3100 can raise and lower the back upper decorative body unit 3150 in two stages from the retreat position to the first appearance position, and further from the first appearance position to the second appearance position. Apart from this, the back upper sub-decoration body 3157 (sub-decoration 3157a) can be slid left and right with respect to the back upper decoration body 3152 (in a direction perpendicular to the up-down direction of the back upper decoration body 3152), so that their movements By appropriately combining, various movable effects can be presented.

[5-9f. Movable production unit in front of the back]
Next, the rear lower front movable effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 118 (a) is an explanatory view showing the front lower back first decorative body and the rear lower front second decorative body of the front lower back movable effect unit from the front in a normal retracted position, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the front lower back first decorative body and the rear lower front second decorative body of the lower back front movable effect unit from the front in the appearance position.

  The lower back front movable rendering unit 3200 is disposed below the opening 3101a near the front end in the back box 3010. The lower back front movable rendering unit 3200 is mounted on a flat unit base 3201 attached to the front of the back lower rear movable rendering unit 3500, and at the upper left corner of the rear surface of the unit base 3201 when viewed from the front. The lower back front drive motor 3202 that penetrates forward through 3201, the drive gear 3203 attached to the rotation shaft of the lower back front drive motor 3202, meshes with the drive gear 3203 from the lower right in front view. A transmission gear 3204 rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 and a pinion gear 3205 meshed with the transmission gear 3204 from the lower right in front view and rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 are provided.

  The lower back front movable rendering unit 3200 also has a rack gear 3206a that meshes with the pinion gear 3205 from the right in front view and extends vertically, and a flat detection piece 3206b that projects rightward in front view. The rack member 3206 is attached to the unit base 3201 so as to be slidable up and down, and the drive gear 3203, the transmission gear 3204, the pinion gear 3205, and the rack member 3206 are attached to the front surface of the unit base 3201. The unit includes a unit cover 3207 that covers from the front, and a lower back front movable detection sensor 3208 attached to the unit cover 3207 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206.

  Furthermore, the lower back front movable effecting unit 3200 has a link pin 3209a projecting rearward from a position between the center and the left end in the left-right direction in front view, and the left end in front view is the upper end of the rack member 3206. And a translucent front first decorative body 3209 provided with a three-dimensional decoration and attached to the unit base 3201 so that the right end thereof in front view is slidable up and down. A lower back front first decorative substrate 3210 attached to the back of one decorative body 3209 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, a strip-plate-shaped first lower back front decorative body 3209 and a unit base The unit base 3201 and the unit cover 3207 are rotatably mounted near the center of the unit base 3201 in the left-right direction between the unit base 3201 and the unit cover 3201. A link member 3211 having an arc-shaped link slit 3211a into which the slide member 9a is slidably inserted, and a lower back front attached to the tip of the link member 3211 and imitating a predetermined character's hand. It comprises a second decorative body 3212 and a lower back front second decorative substrate 3213 attached to the rear surface of the lower back front second decorative body 3212 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  Next, the operation of the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 in the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the back lower front movable effecting unit 3200 moves down in the rack member 3206 to which the first lower back front decorative body 3209 is attached in the normal state, in the vertical sliding direction. A link member 3211 that is located at the end and to which the lower back front second decorative body 3212 is attached extends obliquely so that the tip is located slightly above the horizontal.

  In this state, the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 are located below the frame of the center role 2500 and cannot be visually recognized from the player side (FIG. 83 etc.). That is, in the normal state, the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 are in a retracted position where they cannot be visually recognized by the player. In a state where the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3212 are in the retracted position, the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the lower back front movable detection sensor 3208.

  In the normal state, when the lower back front drive motor 3202 rotates the drive gear 3203 in the counterclockwise direction in front view, the pinion gear 3205 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, The rack member 3206 is moved up by the rack gear 3206a meshing with the pinion gear 3205. Since the lower back front first decorative body 3209 is attached to the upper end of the rack member 3206, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 also moves up together with the rack member 3206.

  When the back lower front first decorative body 3209 rises, the link pin 3209a inserted into the link slit 3211a of the link member 3211 also rises. The slide member 3211 slides in the slit 3211a, and the link member 3211 rotates clockwise in the front view around the base end. Since the lower back front second decorative body 3212 is attached to the tip of the link member 3211, the lower back lower front second decorative body 3212 moves upward with the rise of the back lower front first decorative body 3209. Rotate to move.

  Thereafter, when the rack member 3206 reaches the rising end, the rotation of the lower back front drive motor 3202 stops, the raising of the lower back front first decorative body 3209 stops, and the rotation of the lower back lower second decorative body 3212. Stops. In this state, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the link member 3211 is in a state of being substantially upright, and the lower back lower second decorative body 3212 is located above the lower back lower first decorative body 3209. .

  In a state where the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3212 are raised, as shown in FIG. , Is located within the front view frame of the center role item 2500 and can be sufficiently viewed from the player side (front). That is, the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 are in the appearance positions where they can be visually recognized from the player side. As shown in FIG. 148, the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 are located in front of the back upper decorative body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 in the appearance position. It does not come into contact with the upper back decoration 3152. The lower back front second decorative body 3212 is formed so as to partially move forward and backward with respect to the upper back decorative body 3152 at the second appearance position by moving to the appearance position.

  In the state where the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 are in the appearance position, the drive gear 3103 is moved by the back lower front drive motor 3102 in the opposite direction (clockwise direction in front view). ), The back lower front first decorative body 3209 descends and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 rotates to move leftward in front view. Then, when the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the lower back front movable detection sensor 3208, the rotation drive of the lower back front drive motor 3102 stops, and the lowering of the lower back front first decorative body 3209 stops, and Then, the rotation of the lower back front second decorative body 3212 stops, and the lower back lower first decorative body 3209 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3212 return to the retracted position.

  As described above, the back lower front movable rendering unit 3200 sets the lower back lower first decorative body 3209 and the lower back lower second decorative body 3212 outside the frame (retreat position) and within the frame (appearance position) of the center role 2500. , The player can be surprised by appearing in the frame of the center role 2500. In addition, the lower back front first decorative body 3209 is raised, and the lower back lower second decorative body 3212 is rotated and appears. Since 3212 appears differently from each other, it is possible to give an illusion that the movement of the movable effect is a complicated movement, and to entertain the player.

[5-9 g. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the back right movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view of the back right movable rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 120 (a) is a front view of the back right movable rendering unit showing the first decoration surface of the back right rotating decorative body facing the front, and (b) is a back right rotating decorative body in (a). It is a front view of the back right movable production unit which shows the state which opened the shutter of (a), (c) is a front view of the back right movable production unit which shows the state in which the 2nd decorative surface of the back right rotary decoration body is turned to the front. (D) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit showing the third decoration surface of the back right rotating decorative body facing the front.

  The rear right movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in front view in the rear box 3010. The back right movable rendering unit 3300 includes a back right sheet metal base 3301 mounted in the back box 3010 and extending vertically in a U-shape in front view, and a back upper right base mounted on the upper front of the back right sheet metal base 3301. 3302; a lower right lower base 3303 attached to the lower front of the lower right sheet metal base 3301; a lower right drive motor 3304 mounted to the lower surface of the lower right base 3303; And a column-shaped back right rotating decorative body 3310 rotatably attached by a back upper right base 3302 and a back lower right base 3303.

  The back right sheet metal base 3301 is formed of a metal plate. The back upper right base 3302 has a low cylindrical cover portion 3302a that covers the upper part of the back right rotating decorative body 3310, and a cutout portion 3302b that cuts out a predetermined range in the circumferential direction of the cover portion 3302a. . The rear lower right base 3303 has a discharge port 3303a penetrating vertically. The notch 3302b of the rear upper right base 3302 is located immediately after the rear discharge port 2554 in the center role 2500 when the gaming board 5 is assembled. The outlet 3303a of the lower right rear base 3303 is located immediately above the second entrance 3042 of the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

  The back right rotating decorative body 3310 has a first decorative surface 3310a, a second decorative surface 3310b, and a third decorative surface 3310c that divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. The back right rotating decorative body 3310 includes an opening 3311 extending vertically and opening on the first decorative surface 3310a, and a pair of openings 3311 that are closed from the center of rotation and are respectively slidably mounted vertically. , An inner decoration 3313 attached to the center of the opening 3311 in the vertical direction on the rotation center side of the pair of shutters 3312, and attached to the rotation center side of the inner decoration 3313 and facing outward. A first right back decorative board (not shown) in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface on which it is mounted, and a pair of shutters 3312 which are attached to the center of rotation with respect to the first right back decorative board and approach or separate from each other. And a back-right shutter solenoid (not shown) that slides as described above.

  On the first decorative surface 3310a of the back-right rotating decorative body 3310, usually, a pair of shutters 3312 is in close contact with each other (see FIG. 120 (a)). Then, when the pair of shutters 3312 is separated by driving the back right shutter solenoid according to the game state, the inside decoration 3313 faces the outside from between the pair of shutters 3312, and in this state, the back right first decoration. By lighting the LED on the substrate, the player can see the inner decorative body 3313 decorated with light emission.

  Although not shown in detail in the second decorative surface 3310b of the back right rotating decorative body 3310, a predetermined right character is formed in a relief shape, and a translucent back right character decoration 3318 is provided. Have. On the rotation center side of the second decorative surface 3310b, a back right second decorative substrate (not shown) having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a surface facing outward is attached. The second decorative surface 3310b (back right character decoration 3318) can be illuminated by the decorative substrate.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), the third decoration surface 3310c of the back right rotating decoration body 3310 is opened so that a game ball can enter the same height as the cover 3302a of the back upper right base 3302. Game ball which is communicated with the rear right ball entrance 3320 and the discharge port 3303a of the rear lower right base 3303, and is disposed closer to the rotation center than the outer peripheral surface. And a ball guiding member 3322 mounted in the back right production space 3321 and spirally rolling a game ball having entered the back right ball entrance 3320 downward. And a back right third decorative board 3323 extending up and down adjacent to the right effect space 3321 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  Subsequently, an operation of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 will be described. The back right movable effect unit 3300 can rotate the back right rotary decorative body 3310 in any direction about the axis extending in the vertical direction by the rotational driving of the back right drive motor 3304. In the back right movable effect unit 3300, in a normal state (first decorative state), the first decorative surface 3310a faces forward as shown in FIG. In the first decorative surface 3310a, a pair of shutters 3312 disposed closer to the rotation center than the opening 3311 usually abut each other to close the opening 3311.

  In the first decorative state, the cutout 3302b of the cover 3302a on the back upper right base 3302 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a. Therefore, when the back right movable rendering unit 3300 is in the first decorative state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the center role 2500 that matches the cutout 3302b is also closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310a. Thereby, in the first decoration state, when a game ball is received in the upper winning winning opening 2006 of the center role 2500, the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear taxiway 2553 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decoration surface 3310a. Therefore, the game ball received at the upper winning a prize entrance 2006 enters the escape passage 2555 branched near the rear end of the rear taxiway 2553, passes through the escape passage 2555, and passes through the discharge opening 2556 to the back right ball passage. It is delivered to the third entrance 3043 of the unit 3040 and discharged downward through the inside of the rear right ball passage unit 3040.

  When the back right shutter solenoid (not shown) is energized in the first decoration state in the back right movable rendering unit 3300, the pair of shutters 3312 is separated in the vertical direction, and the inner decorative body 3313 is moved from between the pair of shutters 3312. It is in a state of facing outward (see FIG. 120 (b)). Then, an LED (high-brightness LED) on the back right first decorative board (not shown) arranged closer to the rotation center side than the inner decorative body 3313 emits light, and the inner decorative body 3313 facing from between the pair of shutters 3312 emits light. Decorate. Thereby, the arrival of a chance or the like can be suggested to the player.

  The back right movable effect unit 3300 may be in a state (second decoration state) in which the second decoration surface 3310b of the back right rotary decorative body 3310 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back right drive motor 3304. (See FIG. 120 (c)). In this second decoration state, the LED of the back right second decoration board (not shown) emits light, so that the back right character decoration 3318 made of predetermined characters formed on the second decoration surface 3310b can be made to emit light. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player. In the second decoration state, similarly to the first decoration state, the cutout 3302b of the cover 3302a is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the second decoration surface 3310b.

  Furthermore, the back right movable rendering unit 3300 may be in a state (third decoration state) in which the third decoration surface 3310c of the back right rotary decorative body 3310 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back right drive motor 3304. (See FIG. 120 (d)). In the third decoration state, as shown in the drawing, the back right rendering space 3321 through which game balls can be distributed can be visually recognized from the player side. In the third decoration state, the back right ball entrance 3320 is located at the cutout 3302b of the cover 3302a. Accordingly, in the third decoration state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the center role 2500 and the back right ball entrance 3320 coincide with each other, and the game balls are communicated so as to be able to flow.

  Then, in the third decoration state, the game ball received at the upper winning award opening 2006 of the center role 2500 enters the rear right ball entrance 3320 from the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear taxiway 2553, and the rear right rendering space 3321. Flows downward while rotating multiple times (here, eight times) around an axis extending vertically in the back right effecting space 3321 by the ball guiding member 3322 (see FIG. 175 (a)). . As a result, the game balls received in the upper winning opening 2006 can be spirally flown down in the back right production space 3321, so that the player can surely recognize the gaming balls received in the upper winning opening 2006. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for paying out game balls by accepting the game balls into the upper winning prize opening 2006, and to entertain the player with the spirally flowing game balls. Can be suppressed. In addition, by rotating the game balls received in the upper winning prize opening 2006 while rotating in a spiral manner, a larger number of balls than the number actually entered in the upper winning prize opening 2006 is entered. The effect that a player can be illusioned is also exerted.

  Thereafter, the game ball flowing down in the back right production space 3321 is discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the back right lower base 3303, and enters the second entrance 3042 of the lower right ball guiding unit 3040 which is opened right below. Are discharged into the lower substrate holder 1200 through the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

  As described above, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9h. Back left movable directing unit]
Next, the rear left movable effect unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 122 (a) is a front view of the back left movable decorative unit showing the first decoration surface of the back left rotating decorative body facing the front, and (b) is a second decoration of the back left rotating decorative body. It is a front view of the back left movable production unit which shows the state which turned the surface to the front, and (c) is a front view of the back left movable production unit which shows the state in which the 3rd decoration surface of the back left rotating decorative body faces the front. (D) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing the state where the back left projecting decorative body of the back left rotating decorative body is in the appearance position in the state of (a). Further, FIG. 123 is a sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 122 (a).

  The rear left movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in front view in the rear box 3010. The back left movable rendering unit 3400 includes a back left sheet metal base 3401 mounted in the back box 3010 and extending vertically in a U-shape in front view, and a back left upper base mounted on the upper front of the back left sheet metal base 3401. 3402, a lower back left base 3403 attached to the lower front of the lower left sheet metal base 3401, a back left drive motor 3404 attached to the lower surface of the back left lower base 3403, and a back left drive motor 3404, which are rotated. And a column-shaped back left rotating decorative body 3410 rotatably attached by the back left upper base 3402 and the back left lower base 3403. The back left sheet metal base 3401 is formed of a metal plate.

  The back left rotating decorative body 3410 has a first decorative surface 3410a, a second decorative surface 3410b, and a third decorative surface 3410c that divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the back left rotating decorative body 3410 has a door decoration 3411 imitating a door on a first decorative surface 3410a. The back left rotating decorative body 3410 is arranged on the rotation center side of the first decorative surface, and has a back left first decorative substrate 3412 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on a surface facing outward. . The first decorative surface 3410a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED on the back left first decorative substrate 3412.

  Although not shown in detail in the second decorative surface 3410b of the back left rotating decorative body 3410, a character different from the back right character decoration 3318 of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 is formed in a relief shape. The back left character decoration 3413 having translucency is provided. On the rotation center side of the second decorative surface 3410b, a back left second decorative substrate 3414 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a surface facing outward is attached. The second decorative surface 3410b (back left character decoration 3413) can be illuminated.

  Further, on the third decorative surface 3410c of the back left rotating decorative body 3410, the back left projecting portion 3415 forming the outer peripheral surface and the rotation center side with respect to the back left projecting portion 3415 are arranged to have a light transmitting property. And a rear left third decorative board 3417 on which a plurality of color LEDs are mounted on a surface facing the center of rotation with respect to the projection film 3416 and facing outward. Although not shown, the projection film 3416 has a red symbol projected in red and a blue symbol projected in blue, which are represented by a single color and are different from each other. The part where the design and the blue design overlap is made milky or transparent, and the part other than the red design and the blue design is made black or opaque. In the third decorative surface 3410c, when the red light is emitted on the back left third decorative substrate 3417, the red symbol can be projected on the back left projection portion 3415, and when the blue light is emitted, the blue symbol can be projected on the back. The image can be projected on the left projection unit 3415.

  In addition, the third decorative surface 3410c is provided with a pair of door members 3420 that are vertically arranged at the end near the first decorative surface 3410a in the back left projection unit 3415 and that can be opened and closed. A pair of back left protrusions disposed on the rotation center side and slidably mounted between a retracted position inside the outer circumferential surface of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and an appearance position protruding outside the outer circumferential surface. It comprises a decorative body 3421 and a pair of back left decorative body solenoids 3422 mounted in the back left rotating decorative body 3410 and slidably driving each back left protruding decorative body 3421.

  As shown, the door member 3420 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. Although not shown, the door member 3420 is rotatably mounted at both ends of a vertically extending side far from the first decorative surface 3410a, and has a third vertically extending side at the opposite side. It opens and closes so as to move outside the decorative surface 3410c. In addition, the door member 3420 has a hook-shaped closing claw 3420a that is rotatably mounted and protrudes from an inner surface near the vertically extending side.

  The back left projecting decorative body 3421 is attached such that the sliding direction is the left-right direction when the first decorative surface 3410a is directed forward (front). The back left protruding decorative body 3421 is formed in a shape imitating a shuriken as shown in FIG. 122 (d) and the like. The back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes from the vicinity of the front end in a direction away from the first decorative surface 3410a, and has a closing piece 3421a that can be engaged with the closing claw 3420a of the door member 3420.

  Subsequently, an operation of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 in the back left movable effect unit 3400 will be described. The back left movable effect unit 3400 can rotate the back left rotating decorative body 3410 in any direction about the axis extending in the up-down direction by rotating the back left drive motor 3404. In the normal state (first decorative state), the back left movable rendering unit 3400 stops the first decorative surface 3410a facing forward as shown in FIG. 122 (a). In this first decoration state, the first decoration surface 3410a can be illuminated by appropriately lighting the LED of the back left first decoration substrate 3412. Since the first decorative surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 imitating a door, the first decorative surface 3410a is illuminated and decorated to make the player think that the door decoration 3411 may be opened. This can increase the player's sense of expectation.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, in a normal state, the back left projecting decorative body 3421 of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 is housed inside the back left rotating decorative body 3410 by the urging force of a spring (not shown). It is located at the evacuation position. In this retracted position, the outer surface of the door member 3420 is in a closed state in which the outer surface is flush with the third decorative surface 3410c, and the closing piece 3421a of the back left projecting decorative body 3421 is closed by the closing claw of the door member 3420. 3420a. Thereby, even if centrifugal force acts on the back left projecting decorative body 3421 or the door member 3420 by rotating the back left rotating decorative body 3410 around, the urging force of a spring (not shown) moves the back left projecting decorative body 3421 to the appearance position. Can be prevented, and the closing piece 3421a is locked by the closing claw 3420a, so that the door member 3420 can be prevented from opening.

  When the back left decorative body solenoid 3422 is driven (energized) in the first decoration state, the back left protruding decorative body 3421 slides outward against the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the back left protruding side. The door member 3420 is opened by being pushed by the tip of the decorative body 3421, and the decorative body 3421 at the rear left side is in an appearance position in which the decorative body 3421 projects outside the third decorative surface 3410c. Thereby, the back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes from the back left rotating decorative body 3410 which rotates in a cylindrical shape, which can surprise the player. Further, since the pair of back left protruding decorative bodies 3421 can be protruded independently of each other, various movable effects can be presented to the player.

  When the drive of the back left decorative body solenoid 3422 is stopped in the appearance position, the back left protruding decorative body 3421 slides to the retracted position by a spring (not shown). At this time, the closing piece 3421a is locked by the closing claw 3420a, and the door member 3420 can be turned from the open state to the closed state, and automatically returns to the normal state.

  The rear left movable effect unit 3400 may be in a state (second decoration state) in which the second decoration surface 3410b of the rear left rotary decorative body 3410 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the rear left driving motor 3404. (See FIG. 122 (b)). In the second decoration state, the LED on the back left second decoration board 3414 is appropriately illuminated, so that the back left character decoration 3413 can be illuminated and decorated, suggesting the arrival of a chance to the player. Can be.

  Further, the back left movable rendering unit 3400 may be in a state (third decoration state) in which the third decoration surface 3410c of the back left rotary decorative body 3410 is stopped forward by the rotational driving of the back left driving motor 3404. (See FIG. 122 (c)). In this third decoration state, when the red light is emitted by the LED of the back left third decoration substrate 3417, the red design can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415, and when the blue light is emitted, the blue design can be displayed. The image can be projected on the rear left projection unit 3415. Thereby, the arrival of a chance or the like can be suggested to the player by the symbol projected on the back left projection unit 3415, and the player can be entertained or have an increased sense of expectation.

  As described above, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9i. Back under after moving production unit]
Next, the rear-facing movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the movable effect unit behind the back of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of the movable effect unit behind the back of the back unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the up-and-down unit of the rear-facing movable effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the state of the elevating unit when the back decoration unit is at the lower end position, and FIG. 128 is an illustration of the elevating unit when the back decoration unit is at the upper end position. It is explanatory drawing which shows a state from the front.

  Further, FIG. 129 (a) is a front view of the under-rear-movable effect unit, and FIG. () Is a perspective view of the lower back rotating ornamental body unit of the lower back rear movable effect unit as viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the rear decoration unit after disassembly after disassembly, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the rear decoration unit after disassembly after disassembly. FIG. 132 is a sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 129 (a).

  Further, FIG. 133 (a) is a front view showing a state in which the back-and-bottom rotating decoration body of the back-and-back bottom rotation decoration unit has stopped rotating, and FIG. It is a front view showing the state where it is rotating in the direction of rotation, and (c) is a front view showing the state just before the back decoration under rotation opens and rotates clockwise in front view, and (d) () Is a front view showing a state in which the back decoration is rotating clockwise in front view. FIG. 134 (a) is an explanatory view showing a configuration of a drive mechanism relating to a back-bottom rear rotation drive motor in the back-bottom rear rotation decorative body unit, and (b) of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of such a differential mechanism, (c) is the connection which connects the drive mechanism which concerns on a lower back rear rotation drive motor, and the differential mechanism which concerns on a rotation damper in a back lower rotation decoration body unit. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration of a mechanism.

  Also, FIG. 135 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the coupling mechanism when the rotating decorative body is closed and stopped rotating after the bottom of the back. (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when the back decoration after rotation is rotating in the counterclockwise direction. Also, FIG. 136 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state of the coupling mechanism when the rotating decorative body is closed and rotation is stopped after the underside, (B) is an explanatory view showing a state of the coupling mechanism when the coupling ring of the drive mechanism is rotating clockwise and the back decorative body is opening after the back, (C) is an explanatory view showing a state of the coupling mechanism when the coupling ring of the drive mechanism further rotates clockwise and the back decoration is completely opened after the back, (D) is an explanatory view showing the state of the connecting mechanism when the back and back rotating decorative body in the opened state is rotating in the clockwise direction together with the connecting mechanism of the drive mechanism.

  The back lower movable effect unit 3500 is attached below the opening 3010 a near the rear end in the back box 3010. The under-rear-movable effect unit 3500 is mounted in a back box 3010 and has an under-rear-front movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the front surface thereof, and a back-and-under-rear rotating decoration body which is vertically moved by the elevating unit 3510. And a unit 3550.

  The elevating unit 3510 of the rear-facing rear movable production unit 3500 is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3511 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the front surface of the rear wall, and the lower left corner of the unit base 3511 in front view. A back-and-bottom rear elevating drive motor 3512 having a rotating shaft protruding forward through the unit base 3511; a spur gear-shaped elevating and lowering drive gear 3513 attached to the rotating shaft of the back-and-bottom rear elevating drive motor 3512; A first transmission gear 3514a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the lifting drive gear 3513, and a second transmission gear 3514b that rotates integrally with the front surface of the first transmission gear 3514a and has a smaller diameter than the first transmission gear 3514a. A transmission gear member 3514 rotatably mounted on the unit base 3511; And A member second transmission gear 3514b engaged to and unit base 3511 lifting drive pinion gear 3515 rotatably mounted in and spur gear shape of 3514, and a.

  The elevating unit 3510 also has a guide slit 3516a extending vertically at the approximate center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a plate-shaped detection piece 3516b projecting leftward from the lower left end in front view. An elevating base 3516 mounted on the front surface of the elevating unit 3510 so as to be slidable up and down, and on the rear surface of the elevating base 3516 having a guide slit 3516a so as to slidably move the back and forth rotating decorative body unit 3550 up and down. A lifting drive rack gear 3517 that is attached to the rear surface near the left end in front view and extends vertically and meshes with the lifting drive pinion gear 3515, and extends vertically and the upper end is the same height as the upper end of the unit base 3511. Fixed rack gear 35 attached to the front of the unit base 3511 8 is meshed with the fixed-side rack gear 3518 and is also meshed with the vertically extending movable-side rack gear 3551b attached to the rear surface of the back-and-back rear decoration unit 3550, and is rotatably attached to the elevating base 3516. And an acceleration gear 3519 in the form of a spur gear.

  Further, the lifting unit 3510 is attached to the front of the unit base 3511 so as to cover the front of the lifting drive gear 3513, the transmission gear member 3514, the lifting drive pinion gear 3515, and the fixed rack gear 3518 on the left side of the lifting base 3516 when viewed from the front. Gear cover left 3520, a back-and-back elevating detection sensor 3521 attached to the front surface of the gear cover left 3520 and capable of detecting the detecting piece 3516b of the elevating base 3516, and a unit on the right side of the elevating base 3516 in front view A guide pinion gear 3522 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the front surface of the base 3511, and meshing with the guide pinion gear 3522, extending vertically and attached to the rear surface of the lifting base 3516 on the right end side in front view. Guide rack gear 3523 and guide rack gear 3523 The gear cover right 3524 is attached to the front of the unit base 3511 and the lower end is attached to the elevating base 3516, and the upper end is attached to the gear cover left 3520 and the gear cover right 3524, respectively. And a pair of assist springs 3525 for urging the spring upward.

  The lifting unit 3510 includes a board base 3526 attached to a rear surface on the right end side of the unit base 3511 in a front view and a back surface of the board base 3526. Detection sensor 3521, lower back rear rotation drive motor 3553, lower back lower rotation detection sensor 3570, and lower back rear relay board which relays the connection between lower back decoration board 3572, motor drive board 3062, and lamp drive board 3060. 3527.

  Next, an operation of the lifting unit 3510 in the rear lower movable effect unit 3500 will be described. The back lower movable effect unit 3500 is located at a lower end position where the lower back rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is most lowered in a normal state. In the state of the lower end position, as shown in FIG. 127, at the upper ends of the elevating drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 attached to the elevating base 3516, the elevating drive pinion gear 3515 attached to the unit base 3511 and the guide. The pinion gears 3522 mesh with each other. The acceleration gear 3519 attached to the elevating base 3516 meshes with the lower end of the fixed rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511, and is movable to the lower back and rear rotating decorative body unit 3550. It meshes with the upper end of the side rack gear 3551b.

  Also, in the state of the lower end position, the guide pin 3552b of the back-and-back rear decorative body unit 3550 inserted into the guide slit 3516a of the elevating base 3516 via the guide bush 3528 is located at the lower end of the guide slit 3516a. ing. Further, in the state of the descending end position, the detecting piece 3516b of the elevating base 3516 is detected by the back-and-back elevating detection sensor 3521, and the pair of assist springs 3525 extend to urge the elevating base 3516 upward. are doing.

  When the under-rear movable decoration unit 3550 is at the lower end position, the under-rear rotational decoration 3568 is lower than the lower end of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 as shown in FIG. A part is visible from the player side above the stage 2530 in the frame of the center role 2500 below.

  When the back-and-back bottom rotating decoration body unit 3550 is at the lower end position and the back-and-back bottom lifting drive motor 3512 rotates the lifting drive gear 3513 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the lifting drive pinion gear 3515 rotates counterclockwise. The lifting base 3516 is lifted by the lifting drive rack gear 3517 meshing with the lifting drive pinion gear 3515. When the elevating base 3516 moves up, the acceleration gear 3519 rotatably attached to the elevating base 3516 also moves up together with the elevating base 3516. Since the acceleration gear 3519 meshes with the fixed rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511, when the elevating base 3516 (acceleration gear 3519) is raised with respect to the unit base 3511, the acceleration gear 3519 is inverted from the front. It will rotate clockwise.

  This acceleration gear 3519 is on the opposite side to the fixed side rack gear 3518, and the movable side rack gear 3551b attached to the back and back rotating decorative body unit 3550 meshes, so that the acceleration gear 3519 moves in the counterclockwise direction. When rotated, the rear decorative body unit 3550 moves up and down relative to the lift base 3516 via the movable rack gear 3551b. At this time, the back-and-back lower decorative body unit 3550 is moved up at twice the speed of the lifting base 3516 by the acceleration gear 3519 meshing with the fixed rack gear 3518 of the unit base 3511.

  Further, in the elevating unit 3510, since the guide rack gear 3523 on the opposite side of the elevating drive rack gear 3517 in the elevating base 3516 meshes with the guide pinion gear 3522 rotatably attached to the unit base 3511, The elevating base 3516 can be raised straight without the right end of the base 3516 being twisted. Furthermore, in the elevating unit 3510, since the elevating base 3516 is urged upward by the pair of assist springs 3525, the load on the back-to-back lower elevating drive motor 3512 is reduced. In addition, in the pair of assist springs 3525, the right assist spring 3525, which is far from the elevation drive rack gear 3517 in front view, is extended longer than the left assist spring 3525 to increase the urging force, and the assist base 3516 is hardly tilted. are doing.

  Then, when the back decoration rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is located at the highest rising end position, the back bottom lifting drive motor 3512 stops. In the state of the rising end position, as shown in FIG. 128, the guide pin 3552b of the back-and-back rear decorative body unit 3550 is located at the upper end of the guide slit 3516a of the lifting base 3516. In addition, in the state of the rising end position, the lifting drive pinion gear 3515 and the guide pinion gear 3522 attached to the unit base 3511 are located at the lower ends of the lifting drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 attached to the lift base 3516, respectively. Are engaged. The acceleration gear 3519 attached to the elevating base 3516 meshes with the upper end of the fixed-side rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511, and the movable gear attached to the back and back rotating decorative body unit 3550. It meshes with the lower end of the side rack gear 3551b.

  As shown in FIG. 152, when the back-and-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is at the rising end position, the back-and-back bottom rotating decorative body 3568 is positioned within the frame of the center role 2500 (front surface of the central liquid crystal display device 1500) as viewed from the front. ) Is located in the approximate center. In addition, when the back-and-back lower elevating drive motor 3512 rotates the elevating drive gear 3513 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with the back-and-back lower rotatable decorative body unit 3550 at the ascending end position, the opposite operation is performed. Then, the rotating decorative body unit 3550 descends, and returns to the descending end position.

  Next, the back-bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550 of the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500 will be described. The back-and-back lower rotating decorative body unit 3550 includes a cylindrical shaft tube portion 3551a extending forward from the upper portion, and a movable rack gear 3551b extending vertically at the lower rear surface and meshing with the acceleration gear 3159. A shallow container-shaped decorative body base 3551 extending vertically and open at the front; Have a through-hole 3552a inserted concentrically, and a guide pin 3552b that projects forward from the lower part in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the guide slit 3516a of the elevating unit 3510, and the rear is open. And a base cover 3552 attached to the front surface of the decorative body base 3551 in a shallow box shape.

  In addition, the back-bottom rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 includes a back-bottom rear rotation drive motor 3553 attached to a lower rear surface of the base cover 3552, and a spur gear shape attached to a rotation shaft of the back-bottom rear rotation drive motor 3553. , A spur gear-shaped first driven gear 3555 meshed with the rotation driving gear 3554, and rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552; A spur gear-shaped second driven gear 3556 meshed with the third driven gear 3555 and rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552; and a decorative body base 3551 meshed with the second driven gear 3556. A third spur gear-shaped driven gear 3557 rotatably mounted between the motor and the base cover 3552; A spur gear-shaped fourth driven gear 3558 rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and an annular drive ring gear 3559a meshing with the fourth driven gear 3558 A plurality (three in this case) of engagement projections 3559b projecting forward from the front end of the drive ring gear 3559a while being spaced apart from the front end thereof, and projecting outward in a flange-like manner from the rear end of the drive ring gear 3559a. A drive gear member 3559 having a drive detection piece 3559c that is partially notched in the cage circumferential direction, four mounting holes 3560a formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and forward from the rear end. The drive gear member 3559 includes a plurality of engagement recesses 3560b into which the plurality of engagement protrusions 3559b of the drive gear member 3559 are inserted and engaged. It has substantially the same size as the outer diameter and coupling ring of the ring-shaped formed on the inner diameter 3560, the.

  The outer diameter and the inner diameter of the drive ring gear 3559a and the connecting ring 3560 are formed smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 3552a of the base cover 3552, and larger than the outer diameter of the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551. The drive ring gear 3559a and the connection ring 3560 have the same inner shape. In the back-bottom rear decoration body unit 3550, the back-bottom rear rotation drive motor 3553, the rotation drive gear 3554, the first driven gear 3555, the second driven gear 3556, the third driven gear 3557, the fourth driven gear 3558, and the driving gear member The drive mechanism 3550 </ b> A that is directly driven to rotate by the lower back rear drive motor 3553 includes the 3559 and the connection ring 3560 (see FIG. 134 (a) and the like).

  Further, the back-and-under rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 passes through the through-hole 3552a of the base cover 3552, the connecting ring 3560, and the driving gear member 3559 from the front, and the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551 is inserted. A cylindrical outer tube portion 3561a, a plurality of connection recesses 3561b that are recessed forward from the rear end of the outer tube portion 3561a and are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction, and an outer tube portion 3561a in front of the base cover 3552. A flat base portion 3561c extending outward from the front end of the outer cylindrical portion, and four guide slits 3561d penetrating back and forth through the base portion 3561c and radially extending around the axis of the outer cylindrical portion. A rotating decorative body base 3561 which is inserted into the outer cylindrical portion 3561a of the rotating decorative body base 3561 and the decorative body base. A cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 3562a through which the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a of the 3551 is inserted, a ring-shaped differential ring gear 3562b formed on the outer periphery of the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 3562a behind the drive gear member 3559, a differential ring A plurality of connection protrusions 3562c that project from the front surface of the gear 3562b at intervals in the circumferential direction and are inserted and connected into the connection recesses 3561b of the rotary decorative body base 3561, and a flange outward from the rear end of the differential ring gear 3562b. And a differential gear member 3562 having a differential detecting piece 3562d which is projected in a circular shape and a part of which is cut off in the circumferential direction is meshed with the differential ring gear 3562b of the differential gear member 3562. Spur gear-shaped differential transmission gear 3 rotatably mounted coaxially with fourth driven gear 3558 between body base 3551 and base cover 3552. 63, a spur gear-shaped damper gear 3564 meshing with the differential transmission gear 3563, and a damper gear 3564 rotatably mounted on the damper gear 3564 in a state of imparting rotational resistance to the rear surface of the decorative body base 3551. And a rotating damper member 3565.

  The outer diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 3561a in the rotating decorative body base 3561 is slightly smaller than the inner diameters of the drive gear member 3559 and the connection ring 3560, and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylindrical portion 3561a enables the drive gear member 3559 and the connection ring 3560 to rotate. Installed. Further, the inner diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 3561a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 3562a of the differential gear member 3562. Base portion 3561c is formed to be larger than through hole 3552a of base cover 3552. The guide slit 3561d is formed at an interval of 90 degrees with respect to the circumferential direction of the outer cylindrical portion 3561a.

  The inner cylindrical portion 3562a of the differential gear member 3562 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551, and is rotatably mounted by the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a. Although not shown in detail, the rotary damper member 3565 imparts rotational resistance to a rotary shaft to which the damper gear 3564 is attached, by viscous resistance of a viscous fluid sealed therein. In the back-and-forth back decoration body unit 3550, the rotation decoration body base 3561, the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, the damper gear 3564, and the rotation damper member 3565 directly apply rotation resistance to the rotation damper member 3565. (See FIG. 134 (b) and the like).

  In addition, the rear decorative body unit 3550 has a columnar slide pin 3566a that penetrates the guide slit 3561d and protrudes rearward. It has four decorative body sliders 3566 respectively slidably mounted by slits 3561d, and a distal end hole 3567a which penetrates back and forth and through which a slide pin 3566a of the decorative body slider 3566 is rotatably inserted. And has a proximal pin 3567b protruding rearward in a columnar shape and rotatably inserted into the mounting hole 3560a of the coupling ring 3560, and has four strip-shaped coupling arms 3567, Four undersides attached to the front of each decorative body slider 3566 and decorated on the front A rotary decoration member 3568, and a, and four rotation restricting member 3569 which regulates the range of rotation of the connecting arm 3567 is attached to the rear surface of the backing under the rotated decorative body 3568.

  The back-and-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 has a substantially square shape in a front view, one of the four vertices is formed at a right angle, and the opposite vertex on a diagonal passing through the right-angled vertex. Are formed at an acute angle. The back-and-forth back decoration 3568 directs the right-angled vertex toward the rotation center axis of the rotating decoration base 3561, and the diagonal line passing through the right-angled vertex indicates the sliding direction of the decoration slider 3566 (the rotation decoration body 3561). It is attached to decorative body slider 3566 so as to extend in the direction in which guide slit 3561d extends). The four back lower rotating decorative bodies 3568 can slide so as to approach and separate from each other by the guide slit 3561d of the rotating decorative body base 3561.

  In the back-bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550, the decorative body slider 3566, the connecting arm 3567, the back-bottom rotating decorative body 3568, and the rotation restricting member 3569 connect the drive mechanism 3550A and the differential mechanism 3550B to rotate. A transmission mechanism 3550C for transmission is configured (see FIG. 134 (c) and the like).

  Further, the back-and-back rear decorative body unit 3550 is attached between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and the drive detection piece 3559c of the drive gear member 3559 and the differential detection piece 3562d of the differential ring gear 3562b. And a fixed decorative body base 3571 that passes through the center of the rotary decorative body base 3561 from the front and the rear end of which is attached to the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551. A back lower back decoration board 3572 attached to the front of the fixed decoration base 3571 in front of the rotation decoration body base 3561 and behind the rear lower rotation decoration 3568 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front thereof; Attached to the front surface of the fixed decorative body base 3571 between the back lower decorative board 3572 and the lower back rotating decorative body 3568. And are decorated on the front is provided with a disk-shaped subplantar after fixing the decorative body 3573 having a light-transmitting property with are subjected.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back-and-under-the-back rotating decorative body 3568 of the under-the-under-the-bottom-rotating decorative body unit 3550 in the under-the-under-the-bottom movable rendering unit 3500 will be described. In the back bottom rotating decorative body unit 3550, in a normal state, the four back bottom rotating decorative bodies 35 slide toward the rotation center side of the rotating decorative body base 3561 and are in contact with each other. In a normal state, the drive gear member 3559 stops the cutout portion of the drive detection piece 3559c to the left in front view (see FIG. 134 (a)). Further, the differential gear member 3562 stops the cutout portion of the differential detection piece 3562d to the right in front view (see FIG. 134 (b)). Also, the four connecting arms 3567 are connected to the center of the base pin 3567b rotatably mounted in the mounting hole 3560a of the connecting ring 3560 and the center of the distal end hole 3567a by the axis of the connecting ring 3560. The slide pin 3566a of the decorative body slider 3566 that extends so as to be in contact with the circle about the rotation center and that is rotatably attached to the distal end hole 3567a is located on the rotation center side of the guide slit 3561d in the rotary decorative body base 3561. Located at the end. In the normal state of the four connection arms 3567, the distal end holes 3567a are separated from the proximal end pin 3567b in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 134 (c) and the like).

  In this normal state (see FIG. 135 (a) and the like), when the rotation drive gear 3554 is rotated clockwise in front view by the rear bottom rotation drive motor 3553, the connection ring 3560 is formed together with the drive gear member 3559. Will rotate in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. When the connecting ring 3560 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the connecting arm 3567 is connected via the proximal pin 3567b attached to the mounting hole 3560a, and the distal end hole 3567a of the connecting arm 3567 is connected to the decorative body slider. The slide pin 3566a attached to the distal end hole 3560a moves from the guide slit 3561d of the rotary decorative body base 3561 attached via the slide pin 3566a of the 3566a to the guide slit 3561d. At the center of rotation.

  However, in this normal state, the slide pin 3566a is located at the end on the rotation center side of the guide slit 3561d, and cannot slide further to the rotation center side. Accordingly, the connecting arm 3567 pulls the rotary decorative body base 3561 through the guide slit 3561d so as to rotate in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. Since the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565 acts on the rotary decorative body base 3561 via the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564, the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565 is prevented. As a result, the rotating decorative body base 3561 rotates in the counterclockwise direction.

  When the rotary decorative body base 3561 rotates counterclockwise in the front direction, the slide pin 3566a of the decorative body slider 3566 is positioned at the rotation center side end of the guide slit 3561d. The back-and-under rotation decoration 3568 attached to 3566 is rotated toward the center of rotation and in contact with each other (see FIG. 135 (b)). In addition, during rotation of the four rear lower back decoration members 3568 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the connection arm 3567 attaches the connecting arm 3567 to the decoration slider 3566 to which the rear lower rotation decoration members 3568 are attached. Since the force for sliding is applied, the back decoration 3568 does not slide outward due to centrifugal force.

  On the other hand, in a normal state (see FIG. 136 (a) and the like), when the rotation drive gear 3554 is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the rear bottom rotation drive motor 3553, it is connected together with the drive gear member 3559. Ring 3560 will rotate in a clockwise direction. When this connecting ring 3560 is to be rotated in the clockwise direction, the connecting arm 3567 is moved through the proximal pin 3567b attached to the attaching hole 3560a, and the distal end hole 3567a of the connecting arm 3567 is slid on the decorative body slider 3566. The slide pin 3566a attached to the distal end hole 3560a is moved through the guide slit 3561d because the slide pin 3566a attached to the tip hole 3560a attempts to move in the direction approaching the guide slit 3561d of the rotating decorative body base 3561 attached via the pin 3566a. An attempt is made to rotate the rotating decorative body base 3561 in the clockwise direction.

  However, since the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565 acts on the rotary decorative body base 3561 via the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564, the rotary decorative body base 3561 rotates clockwise. 136A, the slide pin 3566a moves outward from the center of rotation along the guide slit 3561d (see FIG. 136 (b)). As a result, each of the slide pins 3566a (decorative body slider 3566) slides outward, so that the lower and lower rear rotating decorative bodies 3568 slide outward so as to be separated from each other.

  When the connecting ring 3560 further rotates clockwise in front view and the mounting hole 3560a reaches the axis of the guide slit 3561d in the rotary decorative body base 3561, the connecting arm 3567 extends along the guide slit 3561d. At this time, the side surface of the connecting arm 3567 contacts the rotation restricting member 3569, and further rotation of the connecting arm 3567 is prevented. In this state, the decorative body slider 3566 is slid to the outermost position via the connecting arm 3567, and the back and forth rotating decorative bodies 3568 are most separated from each other and open (see FIG. 136 (c)). ). In addition, in a state in which the under-the-bottom rotating decorative body 3568 is open, the under-the-bottom rear fixed decorative body 3573 disposed behind the under-the-bottom rear rotating decorative body 3568 is visually recognized from between the under-the-bottom rear rotating decorative bodies 3568. (See FIGS. 133 (c) and (d)).

  When the connecting ring 3560 further rotates clockwise in the front view in a state where the back decoration lower rotation decoration body 3568 is opened, the rotation of the connection arm 3567 is restricted by the rotation restricting member 3569. The base 3561 rotates in the clockwise direction against the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565, and rotates in the clockwise direction with the back decoration 3568 opened (FIG. 136 ( d)). When the rotating decorative body 3568 is opened after the underside, it becomes larger and more conspicuous, which can surprise the player.

  In addition, in the case of closing the back bottom rotating decoration body 3568 in the open state, the connection ring 3560 is rotated by the back bottom rear rotation drive motor 3553 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view opposite to the above, so that After the back, the rotating decorative body 3568 slides toward the center of rotation, and is in a closed state.

  In this way, the under-bottom-movable effect unit 3500 moves the under-back under-rotation decorative body 3568 to the rising end position to move the under-back under-rotation decorative body 3568 within the frame of the center role item 2500 (game area 5a). ) Can be moved to the center, and the back decoration 3568 can be made to stand out. In this state, when the back bottom rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the player can be surprised by rotating at the center of the game area 5a. In addition, when the back lower rotating decorative body 3568 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the lower back rotating decorative body 3568 opens and rotates in a larger state, so that the player can be further surprised. A variety of movable effects can be presented to the player.

[5-9j. Back four corner movable production unit]
Next, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 145. FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the back four corner movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the back four corner movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner movable production unit in the back four corner movable production unit when viewed from the front. FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner movable production unit in the rear four corner movable production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner movable unit in the back four corner movable rendering unit, as viewed from the front. FIG. 142 is an exploded view of the back four corner second unit in the rear four corner movable stage unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen.

  FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit in the normal retracted position state, and FIG. 143 (b) is a state in which the back four corner first decorative body is in the appearance position. It is a front view of a back four corners first unit, and (c) is a front view of the back four corners first unit in the state where a back four corners second decoration object appears. Further, FIG. 144 (a) is an explanatory view showing, from the left side, the state of the drive mechanism when the back four corner first decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of the back four corners 1st decoration body from the retreat position to an appearance position from a left side surface, (c) is a back four corners 1st decoration unit in a back four corners first decoration body of an appearance position. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of the driving mechanism at the time from the left side. FIG. 145 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing, from the left side, the state of the driving mechanism when the back four corner second decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism in the middle of the back four corner second decoration body from the retreat position to the appearance position from the left side surface, and (c) is a back four corner second decoration body in the back four corner first unit in the appearance position. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of the driving mechanism at the time from the left side.

  The four back corner movable effect units 3600 are attached to the four corners outside the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The four back corner movable effect units 3600 are four back corner first units 3610 attached to the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the four corners in the back box 3010, and the back four corner second units attached to the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the four corners in the back box 3010. 3650. The back four corner first unit 3610B attached to the lower left corner is attached to the back four corner first unit 3610A attached to the upper right corner while being rotated by 180 degrees around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The back four corner second unit 3650B attached to the lower right corner is attached to the rear four corner second unit 3650A attached to the upper left corner by being rotated by 180 degrees around the axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  Hereinafter, the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) attached to the upper right corner and the back four corner second unit 3650 (3650A) attached to the upper left corner will be described, and the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610B) attached to the lower left corner. ) And the back four corner second unit 3650 (3650B) attached to the lower right corner are rotated only 180 degrees with respect to those attached to the upper right corner and the upper left corner, and therefore description thereof is omitted.

  First, as shown in FIG. 139 and FIG. 140, the back four corner first unit 3610 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a shallow box-shaped unit base 3611 opened at the rear and the lower side, and a front surface of the unit base 3611. A shallow box-shaped motor base 3612 which is attached to the approximate center in the left-right direction and is open on the left side (the one facing the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010), and is attached to the left side surface of the motor base 3612. The motor base 3612 is attached to the left side of the motor base 3612 at a position behind the front of the motor base cover 3613 which covers the front side of the open left side of the motor base 3612 from substantially the center in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped motor base cover rear 3614 that is open on the right and front, and a right side surface of the motor base 3612 The back four corner drive motor 3615 which is attached to the front part and has a rotation axis protruding into the motor base 3612, and is attached to the rotation axis of the back four corner drive motor 3615 so that the left side is covered by the motor base cover front 3613. And a transmission member 3616 housed in the motor base 3612.

  The transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical mounting shaft portion 3616a mounted on the rotation shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3615, a disk-shaped base portion 3616b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the mounting shaft portion 3616a, and a base. A detecting piece 3616c protruding rightward from a surface facing rightward in the portion 3616b, a first transmitting portion 3617 provided on a surface facing leftward of the base portion 3616b, and a base portion. And a second transmission portion 3618 provided on the surface of the right side of the second transmission portion 3616b.

  The first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3617a protruding leftward from the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3616b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b, and a revolution of the first transmission pin 3617a. A cylindrical first lock protrusion 3617b projecting concentrically leftward from the left surface of the base portion 3616b with a radius smaller than the radius, and a first lock protrusion 3617b and a first transmission pin 3617a. A fan-shaped notch is formed from an even range on both sides of an axis connecting the center of the base portion 3616b and the center of the first transmission pin 3617a on the outer peripheral surface of the lock projection 3617b toward the center of the first lock projection 3617b. And a first notch 3617c.

  The second transmission portion 3618 of the transmission member 3616 includes a cylindrical second transmission pin 3618a protruding rightward in the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3616b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b, and a revolution of the second transmission pin 3618a. A cylindrical second lock protrusion 3618b projecting concentrically rightward from the right surface of the base portion 3616b with a radius smaller than the radius, and a second lock protrusion 3618b and a second transmission pin 3618a. A fan-shaped notch is formed from an even range on both sides with an axis connecting the center of the base portion 3616b and the center of the second transmission pin 3618a on the outer peripheral surface of the second lock projection 3618b toward the center of the second lock projection 3618b. And a second notch 3618c formed therein.

  In the transmission member 3616, the orbital radii of the first transmission pin 3617a and the second transmission pin 3618a are the same. In addition, the second transmission pin 3618a protrudes from the first transmission pin 3617a from a position rotated by 180 degrees about the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b. Further, the diameters of the first lock projection 3617b and the second lock projection 3618b are the same. Further, the transmission member 3616 is configured such that the first notch 3617c of the first transmission portion 3617 and the second notch 3618c of the second transmission portion 3618 are formed around the first lock projection 3617b and the second lock projection 3618b. On the other hand, it is formed in a fan shape in an angle range of 72 degrees.

  In addition, the first unit 3610 at the back four corners is a columnar transmitted shaft member 3619 having both ends attached to the motor base 3612 and the rear of the motor base cover 3614 at positions rearward of the transmitting member 3616, and a transmitted shaft. It has a working arm 3620a which is rotatably mounted by the member 3619 penetrating therethrough, rotates by transmitting the rotation of the transmitting member 3616 from the first transmitting portion 3617, and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A first transmitted member 3620, a link shaft member 3621 having both ends attached to the motor base 3612 and the motor base cover rear 3614 below the first transmitted member 3620 immediately below the transmitted shaft member 3619. The link shaft member 3621 is rotatably mounted by penetrating the base end side. A link arm 3622 extending in the direction perpendicular to the same length as the operation arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620, and an upper end rotatably attached to the tip of the operation arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620. The link arm 3622 is rotatably mounted such that the link arm 3622 extends below the upper end of the link arm 3622 in parallel with the operation arm 3620a, and a link member 3623 extending downward and a lower end of the link member 3623 are provided. A back four corner first decorative body 3624 attached to the front side and imitating a shuriken, and a back four corner first decorative board 3625 mounted on the back side of the back four corner first decorative body 3624 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side And

  The first transmitted member 3620 has a shaft portion 3620b through which a working arm 3620a extends from the left end and a transmitted shaft member 3619 penetrates, and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis from the right end of the shaft portion 3620b. A disc-shaped first transmitted main body 3620c, a first transmission slit 3620d that is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3620c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3617a is slidably inserted; On both sides of the first transmission slit 3620d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3620c, a pair of first lock concave portions 3620e that are concave in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center are provided.

  The direction in which the first transmission slit 3620d opens on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3620c is substantially the same as the direction in which the operation arm 3620a extends. The first lock concave portion 3620e is recessed by an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3617b of the first transmission portion 3617. Further, the pair of first lock recesses 3620e are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective concave arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3620 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state in which the first four back corner first unit 3610 (the back four corner movable rendering unit 3600) is assembled, the first transmitted member 3620 includes the first transmitted pin 3617a of the first transmitted portion 3617 and the first transmitted pin 3617a of the first transmitted portion 3617. The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the first lock projection 3617b. Accordingly, the first transmission pin 3617a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d, and rotation can be transmitted through the first transmission pin 3617a and the first transmission slit 3620d. Further, a part of the first lock protrusion 3617b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3620e, and the first lock protrusion 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e, so that the first lock protrusion 3617b is inserted. The rotation of the transmitted member 3620 can be restricted (locked).

  To the link member 3623, the tip of the operation arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 and the tip of the link arm 3622 are rotatably attached by link pins 3626, respectively. Further, a link cover 3627 is attached to an upper part of the front surface of the link member 3623. The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a parallel link with the motor base 3612, the operation arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620, the link arm 3622, and the link member 3623, and the first transmitted member 3620 , The back four corner first decorative body 3624 can be moved up and down via the link member 3623.

  Further, the back four corner first unit 3610 has a flat base cover 3628 which closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3611 and is attached to the unit base 3611, and a columnar transmitted shaft member extending right and left. It has a second action pin 3629a that revolves around 3619, and is rotatably mounted by the transmission shaft member 3619 penetrating between the motor base 3612 and the first transmission member 3620. The second transmitted member 3629, which rotates by transmitting the rotation from the second transmitting portion 3618 in the transmitting member 3616, and revolves around an axis extending in the front-rear direction due to the revolution of the second working pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629. It has a first connecting pin 3630a that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and has a unit base behind the transmitted shaft member 3619. A rotation connecting member 3630 rotatably mounted by the base 3611 and the base cover 3628, and a rotatable mounting around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit base 3611 and the base cover 3628 below the rotation connecting member 3630. And a second decorative base 3631 having four back corners having second connecting pins 3631a protruding rearward in a columnar shape at a position eccentric from the center of rotation.

  In addition, the back four corner first unit 3610 has one end side rotatably attached to the first connection pin 3630a of the rotary connection member 3630, and the opposite end side of the back four corner second decorative body base 3631. A strip-shaped connecting arm 3632 rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3631a, and a back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the front surface of the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 and extending in an arc shape. A back four corner second decorative board 3634 attached to the rear surface of the back four corner second decorative body 3633 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, and a rear face near the front end of the back four corner second decorative body 3633 A board cover 3635 covering a part of the rear side of the second decorative board 3634 on the back side; A back corner lift detection sensor 3636 that can detect 6c, and a.

  The second transmitted member 3629 includes a disc-shaped second transmitted main body 3629b centering on the transmitted shaft member 3619, and a second transmitted main body 3629b. The second transmission slit 3629c which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface toward the center and into which the second transmission pin 3618a is slidably inserted, and on both sides of the second transmission slit 3629c on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body 3629b. , And a pair of second lock recesses 3629d that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The direction in which the second transmission slit 3629c of the second transmitted member 3629 is opened on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body 3629b faces in the direction opposite to the second operation pin 3629a with the transmitted shaft member 3619 interposed therebetween. It is suitable. The second lock concave portion 3629d is recessed by an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3618b of the second transmission portion 3618. Further, the pair of second lock recesses 3629d are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective concave arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3629 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state in which the back four corner first unit 3610 (the back four corner movable rendering unit 3600) is assembled, the second transmitted member 3629 is configured such that the second transmitted main body 3629b is connected to the second transmission pin 3618a of the second transmission portion 3618 and the second transmitted pin 3618a of the second transmitted portion 3618. The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the second lock projection 3618b. Accordingly, the second transmission pin 3618a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3629c, and rotation can be transmitted through the second transmission pin 3618a and the second transmission slit 3629c. In addition, a part of the second lock protrusion 3618b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3629d, and the second lock protrusion 3618b is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d, so that the second lock protrusion 3618b can be inserted. The rotation of the transmitted member 3629 can be restricted (locked).

  The rotation connection member 3630 extends from the center of rotation in a fan shape in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a flat main body 3630b having a first connection pin 3630a protruding rearward from the peripheral edge of the rear surface, and a plate extending forward from the periphery of the main body 3630b. A protruding piece 3630c protruding in a shape and a part of the protruding piece 3630c are cut out so that the second working pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629 is slidably inserted from the front end toward the rear. And a second affected part 3630d.

  The rotation connection member 3630 has a rotation center mounted at the same height as the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3629. As the second transmission member 3629 rotates and the second operation pin 3629a revolves, the second connection portion 3630d is pressed by the second operation pin 3629a and rotates.

  The back four corner second decorative body 3633 is formed in a shape imitating the cutting edge of a cutting tool such as a shuriken or a sword, and the thinned side of the blade is attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631.

  The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a rotation link with the base cover 3628, the rotation connection member 3630, the back four corner second decorative body base 3631, and the connection arm 3632, and when the rotation connection member 3630 rotates. Then, the second decorative body base 3631 on the back four corners rotates in the same direction via the connecting arm 3632. Thus, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 can be rotated (rotated) such that the tip side thereof faces downward.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 141 and 142 and the like, the back four corner second unit 3650 is attached to the inside of the back box 3010 and has a shallow box-shaped unit base 3651 opened at the rear and the lower side. A shallow box-shaped motor base 3652 which is attached at the approximate center in the left-right direction on the front surface and is open on the right (the one facing the center in the left-right direction of the back box 3010), and is attached to the right side of the motor base 3652. The motor base 3652 is mounted on the right side of the motor base 3652 in front of the motor base cover 3653 which covers the front side of the open right side of the motor base 3652 from substantially the center in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped motor base cover rear 3654 that is open at the left and front, and a left side of the motor base 3652. And the rear four-corner drive motor 3655 whose rotation axis protrudes into the motor base 3652, and is mounted on the rotation axis of the back four-corner drive motor 3655, and the right side is covered by a motor base cover front 3653. Transmission member 3656 housed in the motor base 3652 as described above.

  The transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical mounting shaft portion 3656a mounted on the rotating shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3655, a disk-shaped base portion 3656b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the mounting shaft portion 3656a, and a base. A detecting piece 3656c protruding rightward from the surface of the portion 3656b in a plate shape, a first transmitting portion 3657 provided on a surface of the base portion 3656b facing right, and a base portion. And a second transmitting portion 3658 provided on the left-facing surface of 3656b.

  The first transmission portion 3657 of the transmission member 3656 includes a cylindrical first transmission pin 3657a protruding rightward in the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3656b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b, and a revolution of the first transmission pin 3657a. A cylindrical first lock protrusion 3657b projecting concentrically rightward from the right surface of the base portion 3656b with a smaller radius than the first lock protrusion 3657b and a first transmission pin 3657a. A fan-shaped notch is formed from an even range on both sides of an axis connecting the center of the base portion 3656b and the center of the first transmission pin 3657a on the outer peripheral surface of the one lock projection 3657b toward the center of the first lock projection 3657b. And a first notch 3657c.

  The second transmitting portion 3658 of the transmitting member 3656 includes a cylindrical second transmitting pin 3658a protruding leftward in the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3656b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b, and a revolving motion of the second transmitting pin 3658a. A cylindrical second lock projection 3658b projecting concentrically to the left from the left surface of the base portion 3656b with a radius smaller than the radius, and a second lock projection 3658b and a second transmission pin 3658a. A fan-shaped notch is formed from an even range on both sides of an axis connecting the center of the base portion 3656b and the center of the second transmission pin 3658a on the outer peripheral surface of the second lock projection 3658b toward the center of the second lock projection 3658b. And a second notch 3658c formed therein.

  In the transmission member 3656, the orbital radii of the first transmission pin 3657a and the second transmission pin 3658a are the same. Further, the second transmission pin 3658a protrudes from a position rotated by 180 degrees about the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b with respect to the first transmission pin 3657a. Further, the diameters of the first lock protrusion 3657b and the second lock protrusion 3658b are the same. Further, the transmitting member 3656 is configured such that the first notch 3657c of the first transmitting portion 3657 and the second notch 3658c of the second transmitting portion 3658 are formed around the first lock protrusion 3657b and the second lock protrusion 3658b. On the other hand, it is formed in a fan shape in an angle range of 72 degrees.

  In addition, the rear four corner second unit 3650 includes a columnar transmitted shaft member 3659 having both ends attached to the motor base 3652 and the motor base cover rear 3654 at positions rearward of the transmission member 3656, and a transmitted shaft. It has a working arm 3660a that is rotatably mounted by the member 3659 penetrating therethrough, rotates by transmitting rotation from the first transmitting portion 3657 of the transmitting member 3656, and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A first transmitted member 3660, and a link shaft member 3661 having both ends attached to the motor base 3652 and the motor base cover rear 3654 below the first transmitted member 3660 immediately below the transmitted shaft member 3659. The link shaft member 3661 is rotatably mounted by penetrating the base end side. A link arm 3662 extending in the direction perpendicular to the same length as the operation arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660, and an upper end is rotatably attached to a tip of the operation arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660. The link arm 3662 is rotatably mounted such that the link arm 3662 extends in parallel with the operation arm 3660a below the upper end, and a link member 3663 extending downward and a lower end of the link member 3663 A back four corner first decorative body 3664 attached to the front surface and imitating a shuriken, and a back four corner first decorative substrate 3665 mounted to the rear surface of the back four corner first decorative body 3664 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface And

  The first transmitted member 3660 has a shaft portion 3660b through which a working arm 3660a extends from the left end and a transmitted shaft member 3659 penetrates, and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis from the right end of the shaft portion 3660b. A disc-shaped first transmitted main body 3660c, a first transmission slit 3660d which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3660c toward the center and into which the first transmission pin 3657a is slidably inserted; On both sides of the first transmission slit 3660d on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body portion 3660c, a pair of first lock concave portions 3660e that are concave in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center are provided.

  The direction in which the first transmission slit 3660d opens on the outer peripheral surface of the first transmitted main body 3660c is substantially the same as the direction in which the operation arm 3660a extends. The first lock recess 3660e is recessed by an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock protrusion 3657b of the first transmission portion 3657. Further, the pair of first lock recesses 3660e are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective concave arcs and the rotation center of the first transmitted member 3660 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In a state where the back four corner second unit 3650 (the back four corner movable rendering unit 3600) is assembled, the first transmitted member 3660 is configured such that the first transmitted main body portion 3660c is connected to the first transmission pin 3657a of the first transmission portion 3657 and The position in the left-right direction is the same as that of the first lock protrusion 3657b. Thus, the first transmission pin 3657a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3660d, and rotation can be transmitted through the first transmission pin 3657a and the first transmission slit 3660d. Further, a part of the first lock protrusion 3657b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3660e, and the first lock protrusion 3657b is inserted into the first lock recess 3660e, so that the first lock protrusion 3657b is inserted. The rotation of the transmitted member 3660 can be restricted (locked).

  To the link member 3663, the tip of the operation arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660 and the tip of the link arm 3662 are rotatably attached by link pins 3666, respectively. In addition, a link cover 3667 is attached to an upper part of the front surface of the link member 3663. The back four corner second unit 3650 forms a parallel link with the motor base 3652, the operation arm 3660a of the first transmitted member 3660, the link arm 3662, and the link member 3663, and the first transmitted member 3660 By rotating the first decorative body 3664 at the back four corners via the link member 3663, the first decorative body 3664 can be moved up and down.

  Further, the second unit 3650 at the back four corners closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3651 and has a flat base cover 3668 attached to the unit base 3651, and a columnar transmission shaft member extending left and right. It has a second action pin 3669a that revolves around 3659, and is rotatably mounted by penetrating a transmitted shaft member 3659 between the motor base 3652 and the first transmitted member 3660. The second transmitted member 3669, which rotates by transmitting the rotation from the second transmitting portion 3658 in the transmitting member 3656, and revolves around an axis extending in the front-rear direction due to the revolution of the second operating pin 3669a of the second transmitted member 3669. And a first connecting pin 3670a extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a unit base behind the transmitted shaft member 3659. A rotation connecting member 3670 rotatably mounted by the screw 3651 and the base cover 3668, and a rotatable mounting around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit base 3651 and the base cover 3668 below the rotation connecting member 3670. And a second decoration base 3671 at the back four corners having a second connection pin 3671a protruding rearward in a columnar shape at a position eccentric from the center of rotation.

  Further, the back four corner second unit 3650 has one end side rotatably attached to the first connection pin 3670a of the rotary connection member 3670, and the opposite end side of the back four corner second decorative body base 3671. A strip-shaped connecting arm 3672 rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3671a, and a back four corner second decorative body 3673 attached to the front surface of the back four corner second decorative body base 3671 and extending in an arc shape. A back four corner second decorative board 3674 attached to the back of the back four corner second decorative body 3673 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a back face near the tip of the back four corner second decorative body 3673 A board cover 3675 covering the rear four corners of the second decorative board 3675 and a detection piece 36 of the transmission member 3656 attached to the motor base 3652. A back corner lift detection sensor 3676 that can detect 6c, and a.

  The second transmitted member 3669 has a disc-shaped second transmitted main body portion 3669b centering on the transmitted shaft member 3659, and a second transmitted main body portion 3669b. A second transmission slit 3669c which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface toward the center and into which the second transmission pin 3658a is slidably inserted, and on both sides of the second transmission slit 3669c on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body 3669b. , And a pair of second lock recesses 3669d that are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The direction in which the second transmission slit 3669c of the second transmitted member 3669 is opened on the outer peripheral surface of the second transmitted main body 3669b is opposite to the direction of the second working pin 3669a with the transmitted shaft member 3659 interposed therebetween. It is suitable. The second lock concave portion 3669d is recessed by an arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the second lock protrusion 3658b of the second transmission portion 3658. In addition, the pair of second lock recesses 3669d are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective concave arcs and the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3669 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state in which the second unit 3650 (the four back corner movable effect units 3600) is assembled, the second transmitted member 3669 includes the second transmitted pin 3658a of the second transmitted unit 3658 and the second transmitted main body 3669b. The position in the left-right direction is the same as the second lock protrusion 3658b. Accordingly, the second transmission pin 3658a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3669c, and rotation can be transmitted through the second transmission pin 3658a and the second transmission slit 3669c. In addition, a part of the second lock protrusion 3658b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3669d, and the second lock protrusion 3658b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3669d, so that the second lock protrusion 3658b is inserted. The rotation of the transmitted member 3669 can be restricted (locked).

  The rotation connection member 3670 extends from the center of rotation in a fan shape in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a flat main body 3670b having a first connection pin 3670a protruding rearward from a peripheral edge of a rear surface. And a part of the protruding piece 3670c is notched so that the second working pin 3669a of the second transmitted member 3669 is slidably inserted from the front end toward the rear. And a second affected part 3670d.

  The rotation connection member 3670 has a rotation center attached at the same height as the rotation center of the second transmitted member 3669. When the second transmission member 3669 rotates and the second operation pin 3669a revolves, the rotation connection member 3670 rotates when the second operation portion 3670d is pressed by the second operation pin 3669a.

  The back four corner second decorative body 3673 is formed in a shape imitating the cutting edge of a knife such as a shuriken or a sword, and the thinned side of the blade is attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3671.

  The back four corner second unit 3650 forms a rotation link with the base cover 3668, the rotation connection member 3670, the back four corner second decorative body base 3671, and the connection arm 3672, and when the rotation connection member 3670 rotates. Then, the second decorative body base 3671 on the back four corners rotates in the same direction via the connecting arm 3672. Accordingly, the back four corner second decorative body 3673 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3671 can be rotated (rotated) so that the tip side thereof is directed downward.

  Subsequently, operations of the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 in the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. The back four-corner movable rendering unit 3600 includes a back four-corner first unit 3610 and a back four-corner second unit 3650, a back four-corner second decorative body 3633, 3673, a back four-corner second decorative board 3634, 3673, and a board cover 3635, 3675. , Except that the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673, the back four corner second decorative substrates 3634 and 3675, and the substrate covers 3635 and 3675 are formed point symmetrically. Therefore, only the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) at the upper right corner in front view will be described here, and the description of the other back four corner first unit 3610B and back four corner second unit 3650 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (a) and the like, the back four-corner first decorative body 3624 moving up and down approaches the unit base 3611 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the rotating back four corner second decorative body 3633 is in a state of extending horizontally. In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the back four-corner first decorative body 3624 and the back four-corner second decorative body 3633 are located at the evacuation positions that are hardly visible from the player side.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIGS. 144 (a) and 145 (a), in the transmission member 3616, the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 is located immediately above the rotation center, and The second transmission pin 3618a of the second transmission portion 3618 is located immediately below the rotation center. In a normal state, the operation arm 3620a of the first transmitted member 3620 extends diagonally upward and forward, and the first transmission slit 3620d opens diagonally upward and forward, and the first transmission slit 3620d The first lock protrusion 3617b of the first transmission portion 3617 is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e below the first lock recess 3620e. Thereby, the first decorative body 3624 on the four back corners is located at the rising end via the link member 3623, and the first transmitted member 3620 is locked so as not to rotate.

  In a normal state, in the second transmitted member 3629, the second action pin 3629a is positioned obliquely upward and rearward with respect to the center of rotation, and the second transmission slit 3629c opens obliquely downward and forward. The second lock projection 3618b of the second transmission portion 3618 is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c. Thus, the back four corner second decoration body 3633 extends substantially horizontally via the rotation connection member 3630, the connection arm 3632, and the back four corner second decoration body base 3631, and the second transmitted member 3629 cannot rotate. Locked. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner elevation detection sensors 3636.

  In this normal state, when the transmission member 3616 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the back four corner drive motor 3615 so that the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 moves backward, the first The transmission pin 3617a revolves so as to move backward and enters the first transmission slit 3620d of the first transmitted member 3620, and at the same time, the first lock projection 3617b is disengaged from the inside of the first lock recess 3620e, and the lock is released. The first transmitted member 3620 is released and becomes rotatable. In addition, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner elevation detection sensors 3636 are in a non-detection state. When the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the first transmission pin 3617a presses the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3620d downward, and the first transmitted member 3620 pushes the transmitted shaft member 3619. It will rotate clockwise around the center.

  When the first transmitted member 3620 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the tip of the operation arm 3620a extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis rotates so as to move downward, so that the operation arm 3620a The four back corner first decorative bodies 3624 are moved downward via the link members 3623 attached to the tips (see FIG. 144 (b)). At this time, since the link member 3623 is attached by the parallel link formed by the action arm 3620a and the link arm 3622, the four back corner first decorative bodies 3624 move downward in the same posture.

  On the other hand, in the second transmitting portion 3618 of the transmitting member 3616, the second transmitting pin 3618a revolves in the direction away from the second transmitted member 3629, and the second lock projection 3618b is inserted into the second lock concave portion 3629d. Accordingly, the second transmitted member 3629 does not rotate, and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 do not rotate from the retracted position.

  When the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side and comes off the first transmission slit 3620d, the rotation of the first transmitted member 3620 stops, and the back four corner first decorations The downward movement of the body 3624 stops (see FIGS. 143 (b) and 144 (c)). When the first transmission pin 3617a is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3620d, the first lock projection 3617b enters the first lock recess 3620e above the first transmission slit 3620d, and the first lock projection 3617b causes the first lock projection 3617b to enter the first lock projection 3617b. The rotation of one transmitted member 3620 is locked. Therefore, the first transmitted member 3620 does not rotate in the clockwise direction any more, and the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 are kept stopped. In this state, as shown in FIG. 154, the four back corner first decorative bodies 3624 are located within the frame of the center role 2500 and can be visually recognized from the player side. That is, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 are in the appearance position.

  When the transmission member 3616 is rotated in the opposite direction (clockwise in left side view) by the back four corner drive motor 3615 in the state where the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 are in the appearance position, the reverse of the above is performed. By operating, the first transmitted member 3620 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 are raised via the action arm 3620a, and return to the normal state (the state of the retracted position). Then, when the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corners up / down detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 stops. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (first transmission portion 3617), the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3617a is inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d is the first specific rotation range.

  In the normal state (the state shown in FIG. 145 (a)), the back four corner first unit 3610 has a transmission member 3616 so that the second transmission pin 3618a of the second transmission part 3618 is moved rearward by the back four corner drive motor 3615. When rotated in a clockwise direction in a left side view, the second transmission pin 3618a revolves to move rearward, enters the second transmission slit 3629c of the second transmitted member 3629, and simultaneously The lock projection 3618b is released from the inside of the second lock concave portion 3629d, the lock is released, and the second transmitted member 3629 becomes rotatable. In addition, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner elevation detection sensors 3636 are in a non-detection state. Then, when the second transmission pin 3618a revolves further clockwise, the second transmission pin 3618a presses the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3629c upward, and the second transmitted member 3629 is centered on the transmitted shaft member 3619. , And rotate in the counterclockwise direction.

  When the second transmitted member 3629 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the second working pin 3629a of the second transmitted member 3629 revolves to move downward, and the second working pin 3629a moves below the second working pin 3629a. With the movement of the rotation connection member 3630, the rotation connection member 3630 rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction (counterclockwise direction in front view) such that the second affected part 3630d of the rotation connection member 3630 moves downward. Then, when the rotation connecting member 3630 rotates, the back four corner second decorative body bases 3631 connected by the connecting arm 3632 rotate in the same direction as the rotary connecting member 3630, and are attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631. The four back corner second decorative bodies 3633 also rotate in the same direction (the direction in which the tip side moves downward, that is, the direction around anti-hemismesis in front view) (see FIG. 145 (d)).

  On the other hand, in the first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616, the first transmission pin 3617a revolves in the direction away from the first transmitted member 3620, and the first lock projection 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e. Therefore, the first transmitted member 3620 does not rotate, and the first decorative body 3624 on the back four corners does not move from the retracted position.

  Then, when the second transmission pin 3618a further revolves clockwise in the left side view and comes off the second transmission slit 3629c, the rotation of the second transmitted member 3629 stops, and the back four corner second decorative body The downward rotation of the tip side of 3633 stops (see FIG. 143 (c) and FIG. 145 (c)). When the second transmission pin 3618a comes off the second transmission slit 3629c, the second lock projection 3618b enters the second lock recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c, and the second lock projection 3618b causes the second lock projection 3618b to move into the second lock projection 3618b. The rotation of the second transmitted member 3629 is locked. Therefore, the second transmitted member 3629 does not further rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 are maintained in a state where the rotation is stopped. In this state, as shown in FIG. 143 (c), the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 are inclined about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and as shown in FIG. 153, the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 are in the center. It can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the accessory 2500. That is, the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 are in the appearance position.

  When the transmission member 3616 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise as viewed from the left side) by the back four corner drive motor 3615 in the state where the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 are in the appearance position, the reverse of the above is performed. The second transmitted member 3629 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the above operation, and the four back corner second decorative bodies 3633 are rotated via the rotation connecting member 3630 and the connecting arm 3632 so that the tip side thereof rises. Then, it returns to the normal state (the state of the retreat position). Then, when the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corners up / down detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 stops. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (second transmission portion 3618), the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3618a is inserted into the second transmission slit 3629c is the second specific rotation range.

  As described above, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 causes the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664 to appear and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 to appear by the rotation of one back four corner drive motors 3615 and 3655. And the back four corner first unit 3610A of the upper right corner, the back four corner first unit 3610B of the lower left corner, the back four corner second unit 3650A of the upper left corner, and the back four corner second unit 3650B of the lower right corner, Since each of them can be operated independently and separately, a more versatile movable effect can be presented to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-10. Movable effects on gaming boards]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 154. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the front movable decorative body of the front movable effect unit in the center role. FIG. 147 is a front view of the gaming board showing the state in which the back upper decorative body of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit is in the first appearance position, and FIG. 148 is the back upper decoration of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the body is in the second appearance position, and the first lower back front decorative body and the lower back front second decorative body of the back lower front movable effect unit are in the appearance position.

  FIG. 149 shows a pair of shutters opened with the first decoration surface of the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable rendering unit in the back unit facing forward, and a back left rotation of the back left movable rendering unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the appearance position where the back left protruding decorative body appears with the first decorative surface of the decorative body facing forward. Further, FIG. 150 is a game board showing the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable rendering unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable rendering unit in the back unit with their respective second decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG. FIG. 151 is a game board showing the back right rotating decorative body of the back right movable rendering unit and the back left rotating decorative body of the back left movable rendering unit in the back unit with their respective third decorative surfaces facing forward. FIG.

  Further, FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-and-under rear movable decoration of the back and back movable effect unit in the back unit is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view at the rising end position. In addition, FIG. 153 shows that the back and back rotating decorative body of the back and back movable effect unit in the back unit is rotated clockwise in the front view at the rising end position, and the back and four corners of the back four corner movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the decoration body in the appearance position. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing the back four corner first decorative bodies of the back four corner movable effect unit in the back unit in the appearance position.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 disposed rearward through the frame of the center role object 2500 can be visually recognized from the player side. can do. In the normal state, the front movable decorative body 2561 of the front movable effect unit 2560 in the center role 2500 is raised, and the first rotary decorative body 2572 and the second rotary decorative body of the front movable effect unit 2570 are raised. The body 2573 and the third rotating decorative body 2574 have stopped rotating. Further, in the normal state, the upper back decorative body 3152 of the upper back movable effect unit 3100 is located at the evacuation position above and behind the frame of the center role 2500 with the top and bottom reversed, and a part thereof is It is in a state where it protrudes downward from the upper side in the frame of the center role object 2500 and can be visually recognized from the player side.

  In a normal state, the lower back front first decorative body 3209 and the lower back front second decorative body 3212 of the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 are located behind the lower side of the center role 2500 and are visible from the player side. It is located in an evacuation position that is difficult to access. In the normal state, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 and the back left rotating decorative body 3410 of the back right movable rendering unit 3300 and the back left movable rendering unit 3400 respectively move the first decorative surfaces 3310a and 3410a forward (front). And the pair of shutters 3312 of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 are closed, and the two back left protruding decorative bodies 3421 of the back left rotating decorative body 3410 are back left rotating decorative. It is located at a retreat position where it is immersed in the body 3410 invisibly.

  Furthermore, in the normal state, the back decoration 3568 of the back lower movable effect unit 3500 is located at the lower end position, and a part from the lower side of the center role 2500 so as to be visible from the player side. You are in the frame. Also, in the normal state, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664 and the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633, 3673 of the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 are located within the frame of the center role 2500 that is difficult to see from the player side. Are also located at the outer evacuation position.

  The gaming board 5 is displayed from the normal state according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Movable staging unit 2560, front and bottom movable staging unit 2570, back upper staging unit 3100, lower back front staging unit 3200, back right mobile staging unit 3300, back left mobile staging unit 3400, back lower staging rear staging unit 3500, and The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 performs a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, for example, in the top movable effect unit 2560 of the center role 2500, the top movable decorative body 2561 is lowered from a normal position by the rotation drive of the top drive motor 2563, and the center liquid crystal display device 1500 It is located at the top front (see FIG. 146). This allows the upper part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to be covered with the upper movable decorative body 2561 to make the player think that the game state will change, thereby increasing the expectation for the game. be able to.

  Also, in the front and bottom movable rendering unit 2570 of the center role 2500, the first and second rotary decorative bodies 2572, 2573 and 2574 are rotated by the front and bottom drive motor 2575 (FIG. 4). See FIG. 96 (b)). Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game.

  Further, in the back upper movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back upper decoration body 3152 is lowered from the retreat position to the first appearance position by the rotational drive of the back upper drive motor 3103 in a state where the top and bottom are reversed ( See FIG. 147). In this state, the pair of openings 3152a of the upper back decoration 3152 and the sub-decoration 3157a facing the opening 3152a can be partially visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the center role 2500. it can. Thus, the predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152 appears to be looking upside down from the top, so that the player can be surprised and entertained by the appearance of the character. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Further, in this state, when the back upper sub-decoration body 3157 is reciprocated right and left by the rotational driving of the back upper sub-drive motor 3159, the pupil of the predetermined character simulated by the back upper decoration body 3152 (sub-decoration 3157a) ) Is swayed to the left and right, so that the player can be further surprised and can enjoy the movable performance.

  In the upper back movable effect unit 3100, the upper back decoration 3152 is further moved to the second lower appearance position by the rotational drive of the back upper drive motor 3103 while the upper back decoration 3152 is in the first appearance position. (See FIG. 148). When the upper back decoration 3152 descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the state of the predetermined character simulated by the back upper decoration 3152 is reversed, and the top and bottom is returned to a normal state. Since it descends while rotating, the movement of the upper back decoration 3152 becomes a dynamic movement, which can strongly attract the player's interest and can greatly surprise the player.

  In the state where the upper back decoration 3152 is in the second appearance position, as shown in the drawing, the top and bottom of the predetermined character simulated by the upper back decoration 3152 is in a normal state, and the back upper decoration 3152 is in the normal state. It is located approximately at the center of the frame of the center role 2500. As a result, the upper back decoration 3152 becomes conspicuous in the game area 5a, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be greatly foreseen that an advantageous game state will occur. . Even in the state of the second appearance position, the pupil of the predetermined character simulated by the back upper decoration body 3152 can be moved right and left by the rotational drive of the back upper sub-drive motor 3159, which makes the player more enjoyable. Can be.

  In the back upper movable effect unit 3100, the back upper decorative body 3152 is moved up and down between the retreat position and the first appearance position, up and down between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, and the retreat position. Can be moved up and down between the second appearance position and the first appearance position or the second appearance position. Various movable effects can be performed by combining them, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  In the lower back front movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, when the back upper decorative body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is in the second appearance position, the back lower front drive motor 3202 rotationally drives the back side of the retracted position. The first lower decorative body 3209 and the second lower decorative body 3212 are moved to the appearance positions located in the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIG. 148). As a result, as shown in the figure, the first lower decorative body 3209 imitating the hand is located in front of the upper upper decorative body 3152 imitating the head (face), so that a predetermined character casts a spell. Since the player is in a state as if he / she is tied (like connecting a mark), a strong impact can be given to the player, and the sense of expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be further increased.

  Further, in the back right movable rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the pair of shutters 3312 are separated from each other by a back right shutter solenoid (not shown) in a normal state (a state in which the rotation of the first decorative surface 3310a is stopped toward the front). Then, the inside decoration 3313 is made to face forward from between the shutters 3312 (see FIG. 149), and the inside decoration 3313 is illuminated. Thereby, the arrival of a chance or the like can be suggested to the player.

  In the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304. As a result, the player can be made to feel a sign that the game state has changed, and a sense of expectation for the game can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, in the back right movable rendering unit 3300, the back right rotation decorative body 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304 to stop the second decorative surface 3310b toward the front (front) (see FIG. 150). Thereby, the back right character decoration 3318 of the second decoration surface 3310b can be visually recognized from the player side.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304 to stop the third decorative surface 3310c forward (front) (see FIG. 151). As a result, the ball guiding member 3322 extending vertically in the back right rendering space 3321 can be visually recognized from the player side, so that game balls are supplied to the back right rendering space 3321 to the player. Time, that is, whether the upper winning a prize opening 2006 may be opened, and the sense of expectation for the game can be raised.

  In addition, in the back left movable rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back left rotation is performed by driving the back left decorative body solenoid 3422 in a normal state (a state in which the first decoration surface 3410a is stopped rotating forward). A back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body 3410 (see FIG. 149). By this, the back left projecting decorative body 3421 projects from the cylindrical rotating back left rotating decorative body 3410, so that the player can be surprised and think that there is something good. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotary decorative body 3410 is rotated by the rotation of the back left drive motor 3404. As a result, the player can be made to feel a sign that the game state has changed, and a sense of expectation for the game can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back left movable rendering unit 3400, the back left rotation decorative body 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the first decorative surface 3410a toward the front (front) (see FIG. 83 and the like). Since the first decorative surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 that imitates a door, the shutter 3312 of the first decorative surface 3310a of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 in the back right movable rendering unit 3300 is provided to the player. As in the case of, it can be assumed that the door decoration 3411 is also opened, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decorative body 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the second decorative surface 3410b toward the front (front) (see FIG. 150). Thereby, the back left character decoration 3413 of the second decorative surface 3410b can be visually recognized from the player side.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decorative body 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the third decorative surface 3410c toward the front (front) (see FIG. 151). Although illustration is omitted, in this state, when the red light is emitted by the LED of the back left third decorative substrate 3417, the red symbol can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415, and the blue light is emitted. Then, the blue symbol can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. Thereby, the arrival of a chance or the like can be suggested to the player by the symbol projected on the back left projection unit 3415, and the player can be entertained or have an increased sense of expectation.

  The back right movable rendering unit 3300 and the back left movable rendering unit 3400 rotate the back right rotating decorative body 3310 and the back left rotating decorative body 3410 at the same time, so that the left and right ends (in the frame of the center role product 2500). A movable effect can be performed on the left and right outer sides of the central liquid crystal display device 1500), and the rotating back right rotating decorative body 3310 and the back left rotating decorative body 3410 increase the player's sense of expectation and suppress a decrease in interest. be able to. In addition, by appropriately selecting the decoration surface on which the rotation of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 and the back left rotating decorative body 3410 is stopped, the pattern of the movable effect can be diversified, and the player can be less tired. .

  Further, in the rear-to-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the rear-to-bottom rear up-and-down drive motor 3512 rotates the lower back-to-bottom rotary decoration 3568 to the raised end position which is substantially the center in the frame of the center role 2500. To rise. Then, when the back-bottom rotating decoration body 3568 is at the rising end position, the back-bottom rear rotation decoration motor 3553 rotates the back-bottom rear rotating decoration body 3568 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 152). ). As a result, the lower back rotation decoration 3568 slightly desired to the player side above the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 rises and is positioned at the center of the center role 2500 in the frame. Can be surprised and thought that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. In addition, by rotating the back decoration 3568 in the counterclockwise direction after rotation, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation of the game.

  In addition, in the rear lower back movable rendering unit 3500, when the rear lower back rotation decorative body 3568 is at the rising end position, the rear lower back rear rotation decorative body 3568 is rotated clockwise in front view by the rear lower back rotation drive motor 3553. When this is done, the four back-bottom rear-rotating decorative bodies 3568 open and rotate so as to separate from each other and rotate (see FIG. 153). Accordingly, the diameter of the back-and-under rear rotation decorative body 3568 is larger than in the case of rotating counterclockwise, so that the player's expectation of the game can be further increased.

  In the back four corner movable rendering unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664 are positioned within the frame of the center role object 2500 from the retracted position by the rotational driving of the back four corner drive motors 3615, 3655. It goes up and down to the appearance position (see FIG. 154). Thereby, the appearance of the four back four corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664 can surprise the player and can indicate the arrival of a chance.

  In the back four corner movable effect unit 3600, the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633, 3673 are rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position located in the frame of the center role object 2500 by the rotational driving of the back four corner drive motors 3615, 3655. (See FIG. 153). Thus, the appearance of the four back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 extending radially around the center of the center role 2500 in the frame can surprise the player, and can do something good. It can be thought that there is, and the expectation for the game can be raised. In the back four corner movable rendering unit 3600, the back four corner second decorative bodies 3633 and 3673 are rotated to the appearance position when the rear bottom rotating decoration 3568 of the rear bottom bottom movable rendering unit 3500 is at the rising end position, so that the center is formed. It is possible to make it appear that a large shuriken has appeared in the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 153). As a result, it is possible to convince the player of the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state, to increase the sense of expectation for the game as much as possible, and to enhance the interest in the game.

[6. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board (particularly, the main control MPU mounted on the main control board) will be described. FIG. 155 (a) is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a control process performed by the main control MPU of the main control board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the main control board according to this embodiment first executes various registers and main control as a process of step S1 on condition that a RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated. Initializes the data stored in the built-in RAM. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. The RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed since the power was turned on. When it is determined, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process of storing information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the main control built-in RAM is executed. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM in the backup process is referred to without performing the initialization process (step S1), A restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. When the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to an initial state by executing an initialization process without executing a recovery process.

  Next, as a process of step S2, a random number which is a number updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board according to the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol displayed variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display is stopped. Special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) to be provided in the lottery process for the display mode, and variable random numbers to be provided in the lottery process for a predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of the special symbol. If the reach random number is subjected to a lottery process as to whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in response to the above-mentioned special symbol change display, If it is determined, a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) to be subjected to a lottery process for determining a type of a big hit, Etc. random number is subjected to such a lottery process to drop (usually random), and a random number counter for storing random numbers such.

  In this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol use a common reach random number, that is, even if the first start port 2002 is started, the second start port 2004 is started. Even in this case, the reach random number is updated from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach random number is updated from a different counter. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second reach symbol corresponding to the reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number may be different from the first reach determination table. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) which are not involved in the random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process of step S2 is basically repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 155 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, the gate sensor 2305, the first starting opening sensor 2107, the second starting opening sensor 2325, the upper winning opening sensor 2552, the lower winning opening sensor 2354, and the general winning opening sensor 3050. For example, detection signals from various sensors are input. Next, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, the random number (special random number, ordinary random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped out of the random numbers is updated. An operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this manner, the main control MPU of the main control board performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol display as the process of step S14. Execute. Although the special symbol process process will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, The corresponding process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Then, the main control MPU of the main control board executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process of a hit at the time of the operation of the second starting door member 2323 as a process of step S15. In the normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board controls the second starting port door member 2323 so that the driving frequency is higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state (excluding some big hits). It is configured to execute a lottery process (a so-called time-saving state). In this embodiment, such a time-saving state is realized by shortening the time required for the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  More specifically, in the control of the time saving state (hereinafter referred to as time saving control), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 1/100 (per 100%), and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is set to a non-zero value. When the time is shortened to a predetermined time shorter than the time saving state (for example, 0.08 seconds) and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit, the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 is set to, for example, After moving forward for 5.5 seconds to allow the game balls to be received in the second starting port 2004, the game apparatus is retreated again so that the game balls cannot be received in the second starting port 2004.

  On the other hand, in the non-time saving control, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0%, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is set to a predetermined variation time (for example, 5 seconds), so that the second starting is performed. The acceptance of game balls into the mouth 2004 is disabled. In addition, even in the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol may be set to 0% or more. In this case, the winning probability is set lower than the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is When the second starting port 2004 is turned on, the second starting port door member 2323 is moved forward for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, 2 seconds to enable the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 and then again. You may make it retreat and make the acceptance of the game ball in the 2nd starting port 2004 impossible.

  In other words, in the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is 0%, and in this case, even if the player hits right, it is impossible to win the game ball in the second starting port 2004. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, a game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center role 2500 (so-called “left”) so that many game balls enter the first start port 2002 instead of the second start port 2004. Striking ").

  On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is 100%, and the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 is further advanced for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). In this case, by hitting right, it becomes easy to win a game ball to the second starting port 2004. Therefore, in the non-working time state, a game ball is fired aiming at the right side of the center role 2500 (so-called “right Striking ").

  In addition, as the time saving control, control for increasing the winning probability of the ordinary symbol from the non-saving time state, control for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol than the non-saving time state, Control to extend the period in which the second starting port door member 2323 is advanced from the non-time saving state, control to increase the number of times the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 is advanced from the non-time saving state, Among the controls for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol in the special symbol display or the second special symbol display (the time required for the variable display control of the decorative symbol in the central liquid crystal display device 1500) compared to the non-time saving state. Any one or any combination (or all) may be executed.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the ordinary symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board next performs the process of step S16 in the special symbol process. A process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the above-described normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board or the like is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU of the same main control board performs an information output process of outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer, for example, as the process of step S18.

  Then, the main control MPU of the main control board executes the first starting port sensor 2107, the second starting port sensor 2325, the upper winning award winning port sensor 2552, and the lower winning award winning port sensor 2354 as a process of step S19. When the detection signals of the general winning opening sensor 3050 and the like are on, the payout control command is output to the payout control board so that the prize balls corresponding to the signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 and pays out a prize ball to the player. In this example, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port sensor 2107 is turned on, “3 balls”, a game ball wins in the second starting port 2004 and the second start starts. When the mouth sensor 2325 is turned on, “1 ball”, a game ball wins in the above-mentioned large winning opening (the upper winning opening 2006, the lower winning opening 2005) and the upper winning opening sensor 2552 or the lower winning opening sensor 2354. Is turned on, a game ball wins in the general winning opening 2001, and when the general winning opening sensor 3050 is turned on, a prize ball of "10 balls" is paid out to the player. ing.

  Further, the main control MPU of the same main control board next executes a storage process for checking an increase or decrease in the number of reservations as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the constantly operating actuator is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is ended when the interrupt is permitted (step S24). Becomes

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process using a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be performed. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers provided for the various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 156, the main control MPU of the main control board first detects the random number by the first starting port sensor 2107. Assuming that the signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter, and is obtained by the main control built-in RAM. The first start-pass passage process such as storing in the first special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2325 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is replaced with the random number. A second starting opening passage process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S40) is executed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped are “4R normal big hit”. , "4R latent big hit", or "4R probable big hit", the lower big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the lower big winning opening A 4R jackpot game state in which an opening / closing pattern (round) to be closed four times when the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that 9 game balls have won in 2005 is detected (the 4R jackpot game state of simply opening for a long time and Control), and the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting “16R sudden hit”. In addition, the lower large winning opening 2005 is controlled to be in a 16R jackpot game state in which the opening / closing pattern of opening (for example, 0.5 second) for a short time and then closing 16 times is repeated 16 times (sometimes simply referred to as a 16R jackpot game state of short opening). Then, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol indicates a mode indicating "8R probable big hit", the lower large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5). Second), or after repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed eight times when the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that 9 gaming balls have been awarded in the lower large winning opening 2005, the lower large winning opening 2005 is shortened. An 8R jackpot game state in which the opening / closing pattern to be closed after opening for a period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is repeated eight times (sometimes simply referred to as a long-open 8R jackpot game state). Then, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol indicates a mode indicating “16R probability change big hit”, the upper large winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5). Seconds) or the opening / closing pattern to be closed 16 times when the above-mentioned big winning port sensor 2552 detects that 9 gaming balls have won in the big winning port 2006. (Sometimes referred to as a 16R jackpot gaming state). It should be noted that the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that the lower large winning opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that 9 gaming balls have been placed in the lower large winning opening 2005 as the 4R big hit gaming state. The opening / closing pattern (round) to be closed when closed is repeated four times, and then the opening / closing pattern to close after opening the lower winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is repeated 12 times. By executing the control of the 4R jackpot gaming state substantially, the opening / closing pattern for always opening / closing the lower big winning opening 2005 regardless of the type of jackpot in the case of the jackpot gaming state may be repeated 16 times. Good, after opening the lower big win 2005 for a long time as the 8R big hit game state (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 9 gaming balls win in the lower big win 2005 The opening / closing pattern to be closed when detected by the above-mentioned lower winning a prize opening sensor 2354 is repeated eight times, and thereafter, the opening / closing pattern to open the lower prize winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 second) and then close it is not performed. You may do so. That is, as long as the number of repetitions of the round in which the game ball can be accepted to the lower winning a prize entrance 2005 substantially matches, the number of times is not limited to the above.

  In the present embodiment, a left-handed state in which a game based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 2002 is mainly executed, and a game mainly based on winning of a game ball in the second starting port 2004 is executed. To the right-handed state. Specifically, when the time-saving control is executed, the vehicle is controlled to the right-handed state, while when the time-saving control is not executed, the vehicle is controlled to the left-handed state. In the left-handed state, a long-hit jackpot game state of a maximum of 8 rounds is executed, and in the right-handed state, a long-hit open jackpot game state of a maximum of 16 rounds is executed. Can get more prize balls than in the left-handed state.

  In the jackpot control process, after performing such opening control of the special winning opening (the upper winning opening 2006 and the lower winning opening 2005), the setting process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is performed. Execute. The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used in the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 161 described later and is set until the next big hit occurs (the first hit shown in FIG. 166 described later). Special symbol stop processing or second special symbol stop processing (not shown)).

  The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the time-saving control is being executed (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability-time-saving state). The first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 166 which will be described later when the big hit game state based on the 4R probable big hit, the 16R probable big hit, the 8R probable big hit, and the 16R big hit game state ends. Or it is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  If the jackpot execution flag is not set, the condition is that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is “0”. (Step S37), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol process stored in the second special symbol holding storage area is performed. On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S37), a second special symbol including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process is executed (Step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first starting port passage processing (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first starting port sensor 2107 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 157. First, the main control MPU of the main control board first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value (upper limit). It is determined whether the value is "4" (step S42). In the process of step S42, if it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly set the variable display control of the first special symbol to a suspended state. The processing of S43 to S44 is performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. And the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S42 that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value (when a so-called "ball" occurs), the variable display of the first special symbols is performed. Control is not newly suspended. That is, without executing the processing of steps S43 to S44, the respective random numbers acquired in step S41 are stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S43). S45) By ending the processing, the above-mentioned variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the second starting port passage processing (step S34).

  Now, in the process of the step S33, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2325 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 158. The main control MPU of the main control board first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board acquires the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on the counter value. It is determined whether it is "4" (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the number of reserves of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly set the variable display control of the second special symbol to a suspended state. The processing of S53 to S54 is performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process in step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. And the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of the step S52 that the number of reserved special second symbols is the maximum value (when a so-called "ball" occurs), the variable display of the special second symbols is displayed. Control is not newly suspended. That is, without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the respective random numbers acquired in step S51 are stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S51). S55) By ending the processing, the above-mentioned variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  When the number of reserved special first symbols changes based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002, a command (first reserved) instructing the number of reserved special first symbols in the storage process (step S20). The number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board, and when the number of reserved special second symbols changes based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 2004, the above-described storage processing (step S20) ), A command (second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) indicating the reserved number of the second special symbol is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board. In addition, when a random number is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area based on a game ball having entered the first starting port 2002, a command for notifying the random number (first hitting ball designation command) is also described above. Set in the storage process and transmitted to the peripheral control board, and when the random number is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the random number is notified. The command to be performed (the second ball-ball designation command) is also set in the storage process and transmitted to the peripheral control board. When the first ball command and the second ball command are transmitted to the peripheral control board in the storage process, the storage contents of the first special symbol non-lottery storage area and the second special symbol non-lottery storage area are cleared.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and the random numbers used in the determination are used. Only the first special symbol processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. A first special symbol in which the first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read first special random number is performed. Normal processing (step S80)

  2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which a process of determining a mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )

  3. Lottery processing on the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 First variation pattern setting process in which the processing is performed (step S82)

  4. First special symbol change processing that waits until the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83).

  5. The first special symbol display mode is determined on the basis of the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 155).

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control MPU of the main control board firstly performs the processing in step S101. As a process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the held state based on the counter value of the first special held number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is the variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, the process is then stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM as a process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Read from Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special reserved number stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  More specifically, the first special symbol storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol storage area a to first special symbol storage area d), The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the first special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the variable display control suspension is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become. Similarly, the second special symbol storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol storage area a to second special symbol storage area d). The extracted random numbers are stored sequentially from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. Thereby, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the second special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

  After that, as a process of step S105, a big hit determination process is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, which is a lottery process for the big hit hit. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S106) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), the process ends.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU of the main control board, if the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time reduction state, high probability non-time reduction state) (step S111), a large hit at the time of high probability shown in FIG. The determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is the low probability state (step S111), the large hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 162 (A) is selected (step S113). The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 162 (A), the big hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the game state is low probability (low probability non-time saving) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). State and low-probability time-short state) and a large-hit determination table used when the game state is high-probability (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state). And a table. Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to be compared with the first special random number, one type of first special random number matches the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and 399 types of first big random numbers are determined. The first special random numbers are associated with each other such that the special random number matches the outlier determination value indicating the outlier (big hit probability at low probability; 1/400). Also, in this example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to be compared with the second special random number, the first special random number Similar to the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to for comparison with the jackpot determination value indicating that one kind of second special random number has won a big hit, and 399 kinds of second special random numbers are out of the above. The above-mentioned second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the outlier determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability; 1/400).

  Also, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability that is referred to be compared with the first special random number, ten kinds of first special random numbers match the big hit determination value, and 390 kinds of first special random numbers match the loss determination value. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match (big hit probability at high probability; 1/40). In the present example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first special random number is used. Similar to the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the jackpot determination value indicating that ten kinds of second special random numbers have won the big hit, and 390 kinds of second special random numbers are out of the above. The above-mentioned second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the outlier determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; 1/40). The jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number and the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number (the number of the jackpot determination values are assumed to be the same). The jackpot determination values may be different (the jackpot probability is common), and the number of the jackpot determination values may be different (the jackpot probability may be different). In this case, at least one of the big hit determination tables at the time of low probability and the big hit determination table at the time of high probability may be made different (or both may be made different).

  When the main control MPU of the main control board compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, and determines that it is a big hit (step S115). Then, a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a big hit is set (step S116), and the big hit determination processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S115 that the data is out of position, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in the high-probability non-hours reduction state. A reach determination table at the time of the high-probability time reduction state to be used in the case of, It has. Then, in the reach determination table in the high-probability time reduction state, one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that the reach is not reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other.

  In the reach determination table in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability save time state reach, is one. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that no reach is made. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the vehicle reaches the reach in the low probability state is set higher than in the high probability time reduction state.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high-probability non-reduction state, the reach random numbers including the same reach random numbers set in the reach determination tables in the high-probability reduction state and the low-probability state must be reached. , And the reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values indicating that the reach random numbers of 66 types do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability non-hours reduction state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is higher than in the high-probability time reduction state and the low-probability state (low-probability non-hours reduction state). Enhanced.

  The main control MPU of the main control board compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119). The reach flag indicating the reach is set and the process ends (step S121).

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 163, the main control MPU of the main control board firstly performs The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the change display of one special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 162 (B), and selects the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. The big hit symbol as a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined by comparing the obtained symbol determination table (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 162 (B), in the symbol determination table, the symbol random numbers (4R normal hits, 4R latent hits, 4R hits, 8R hits, 16R hits, etc.) The first symbol random number and the second symbol random number are stored in an associated form. The main control MPU of the main control board determines the type of the jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number. In addition, in the symbol determination table of this example, it is set so that the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are different. ing.

In particular,
1. Opening / closing to close after opening the lower prize winning port 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower prize winning port sensor 2354 detects that 9 game balls have won the lower prize winning port 2005. By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball is controlled to a 4R big hit game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the lower big winning opening 2005, and a low probability non-saving time state until the next big hit game state occurs (a so-called normal state). 4R normal jackpot controlled to

  2. Opening / closing to close after opening the lower prize winning port 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower prize winning port sensor 2354 detects that 9 game balls have won the lower prize winning port 2005. By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball is controlled to the 4R jackpot game state where the ball can enter (easily) the lower big winning opening 2005, and then the high probability non-time saving state is controlled until the jackpot game state occurs. 4R latent big hit that performs an effect that is difficult to determine that it is controlled to the probability state

  3. Opening / closing to close after opening the lower prize winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower prize winning opening sensor 2354 detects that 9 game balls have won the lower prize winning opening 2005. By repeating the pattern four times, the game ball is controlled to the 4R big hit game state where the ball can enter (easily) the lower big winning opening 2005, and then to the high probability time saving state until the big hit game state occurs.

  4. The opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the lower large winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closing it 16 times is repeated so that the game ball is controlled to a 16R big hit gaming state where it is difficult to enter the lower large winning opening 2005, and 16R probable big hit that controls whether the game has been controlled to the high probability time saving state until the big hit game state occurs and suddenly shifts to the high probability time saving state without occurrence of the big hit game state during the game.

  5. Opening / closing to close after opening the lower prize winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the lower prize winning opening sensor 2354 detects that 9 game balls have won the lower prize winning opening 2005. After repeating the pattern eight times, the opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the lower large winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is repeated eight times, so that the game ball can enter the lower large winning opening 2005 (easy). ) Control to the 8R big hit gaming state, and then control to the high probability time saving state until the big hit gaming state occurs.

  6. Opening / closing that closes after opening the big winning hole 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the above big winning opening sensor 2552 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the big winning opening 2006. By repeating the pattern 16 times, the game ball is controlled to the 16R jackpot game state where the game ball can enter the upper winning prize opening 2006 (easy), and then to the high probability time reduction state until the jackpot game state occurs.

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the driving of the second starting port door member 2323 is not performed. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except in cases, only the first special symbol display on the first special symbol display is changed, and the big hit related to the first special symbol (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit, 4R certain big hit, 16R probable big hit, 8R certain big hit) A big hit). Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball does not win the first starting port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display except when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol. Only the display is executed, and a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit, 4R certain big hit, 16R certain big hit) related to the second special symbol is generated.

  Also, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the lower winning a prize port 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) can be repeated eight times, whereas the opening and closing pattern related to the second special symbol can be repeated eight times. In the big hit, the opening and closing pattern of opening the upper winning prize opening 2006 up to a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) can be repeated 16 times, and the lower winning prize opening 2005 related to the first special symbol is opened for a long time ( The upper winning award opening 2006 related to the second special symbol is opened for a longer period of time (for example, 28.5 seconds) than the ratio (31%) determined for the 8R probability change jackpot that repeats the opening / closing pattern of 28.5 seconds) repeated 8 times. The opening / closing pattern to be repeated 16 times is set to be about twice as high as the probability (63%) determined to be a 16R probability big hit. Technique it is possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls mainly compared to the left-handed state a player based on the winning of the game balls to the first start hole 2002 is executed in a right-handed state which is executed.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the 4R normal big hit is determined, the 4R normal big hit is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 4R latent big hit is determined, the 4R latent big hit symbol is set as the big hit symbol. When it is determined, it is decided to be a 4R probability variable jackpot as a big hit symbol when it is determined to be a 4R probability variable jackpot, and when it is determined to be a 16R collision probability big hit symbol as a big hit symbol when it is determined to be a 16R ballistic jackpot, and when it is determined to be an 8R probability variable jackpot. Is determined to be an 8R probability variable jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol. Also, although not shown, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the 4R normal big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop processing, the 4R normal big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 4R latent big hit is determined, the 4R latent big hit symbol is determined. If it is determined to be a big hit symbol, and if it is determined to be a 4R probability variable jackpot, it is determined to be a 4R probability variable big hit symbol as a big hit symbol, and if it is determined to be a 16R probability variable big hit, it is determined to be a 16R probability variable big hit symbol as a big hit symbol.

  If the big hit flag has not been set in step S131, the main control MPU of the main control board determines that the first special symbol is in the form of an out-of-position symbol when the variation is stopped (step S136). The counter is incremented by 1 (step S135b), and the routine goes to step S137.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed, the main control MPU of the main control board instructs any one of the lottery results (the type of the big hit, the out-of-reach, and out-of-reach (No. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the stop symbol of one special symbol may be transmitted to the peripheral control board. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S138, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so as to proceed to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82), this process ends.

  The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board controls the display of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 based on the received judgment result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed to display the left decoration). Stop display in the order of symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol (note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be synchronously fluctuated and displayed simultaneously with the same symbol and stopped at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU specifies the 4R normal jackpot among the jackpots from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 stops changing the symbol. Is determined to be a 4R normal big hit symbol (combination where the left, middle and right decorative symbols are the same even symbols among the symbols of "0" to "9") and the 4R latent big hit is specified among the big hits Is determined to be a 4R latent big hit symbol (combination in which the same left, middle and right decorative symbols as the 4R normal big hit symbol are the same even symbols among the decorative symbols of "0" to "9"). When the 4R probable big hit is specified, the 4R probable big hit design (combination where the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are all "1" or "9") is determined, and the 16R probable big hit is specified among the big hits Has a 16R jackpot When the pattern (the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns includes all the patterns of "1", "3", and "5") is determined, and the 8R probable big hit is specified among the big hits, the 8R probable big hit is determined. The pattern (combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are all "5") is determined, and if the 16R probability variable jackpot is specified among the jackpots, the 16R probability variable jackpot symbol (all the left, center, and right decorative symbols are all (Combination "7"). In addition, when the out-of-reach is specified, the out-of-reach design accompanied by the reach (a combination of the same design in which the left and right decorative designs are “0” to “9” and different middle decorative designs; reach loss) If the outlier is specified and the outlier is specified, it is determined as an outlier with no reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different from among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols) and fluctuates. When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 164, the main control MPU of the main control board sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), the change pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big hit according to the type of the big hit determined at the step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it has been set (step S145), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146). In the case of a non-executing (a non-executing), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the non-executing is selected. (Step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148). A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), the process is ended. As a result, the first special symbol display display control is performed on the first special symbol display for the thus determined change time, and the effect control is performed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. Will be performed.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is included in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. The variable random numbers are stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Is obtained from the table, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  In the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, it is set so as to determine the type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. . For example, out of 241 types of variable random numbers, 164 types of variable random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is to be performed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are super reach having a low jackpot expectation degree. The determination values (164 to 222) are set as the determination values (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the effects is to be performed, and the determination values (223 to 240) indicating that the 18 types of variable random numbers are to execute any of the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation ). In addition, the super-reach production is that the big hit expectation degree is higher than the normal reach production, and for the player who wants to generate the big hit game state, when the super reach production is executed, the player's expectation degree for the big hit game state is It is growing.

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of a loss which is provided corresponding to the first special random number and the first symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time reduction state and the time reduction state are common. And a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of losing which is provided corresponding to the second special random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, the variation time of 0.3 seconds is set as the time saving state. Is set, and a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time saving state. As described above, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is made the same in the time reduction state and in the non-time reduction state. The time for allowing the game ball to win in the mouth 2004 is secured.

  In addition, as described above, in the right-handed state, only an interval that allows one game ball to pass is provided, so that the rolling of the game ball is limited, and guided to the gate unit 2003 and the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability. Is done. In other words, in the right-handed state, the game ball is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a very high probability, and a normal symbol is hit, and the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 is advanced. Thus, the game ball is configured to be accepted to the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability (substantially all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center role 2500). Further, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to be 100% hit, and when the ordinary symbol is hit, the second starting port door member 2323 of the second starting port 2004 is for a long time (5.5 in this example). (Seconds), the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004. In this example, when the player is operating the handle lever 504, game balls are fired at 0.6 second intervals. Then, when the launched game ball is driven into the right side of the center role 2500, the game ball is accepted to the second starting port 2004 with extremely high probability. In a state where the member 2323 moves forward and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004, a winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs at an interval of about 0.6 seconds. In this example, as described above, in the variation pattern table when the second special symbol is lost based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, the variation time in the time saving state is set to 0.3 seconds, which is extremely short. . Also, the interval time from when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped to when the variable display is started again is set to about 0.6 seconds. That is, in the time saving state, the execution interval of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is extremely shortened as compared with the non-time saving state (variation time 12 seconds, interval time 0.6 seconds), and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is moved. Since the difference between the winning interval and the execution interval of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is narrowed, even if a large number of game balls win the second starting port 2004 in a very short time, the second special symbol is displayed. The variable display is executed in a very short time to prevent an increase in the number of reserved second special symbols, and the number of variable displays per unit time in the above-mentioned time reduction state is extremely increased as compared with the non-time reduction state. As a result, in the high-probability time-saving state in which the transition to the right-handed state is controlled, it is possible to win the next big hit in an extremely short time as compared with the previous gaming machine, and it is possible to acquire a large amount of prize balls in a short time. , It is possible to improve game entertainment.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol change process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol change process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 165, the main control MPU of the main control board first executes step S171. As the process, the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is decremented by one. Then, when the variable time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the lottery variable time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, the process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 166, the main control MPU of the main control board firstly performs the processing in step S181. As processing, display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display is performed, and the central special liquid crystal display device 1500 displays the first special symbol. A stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board (step S182).

  When the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board sets a big hit start command indicating to start the big hit game state (step S187), and sets the big hit game state. Is set to the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit executing flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, The time reduction flag is reset (step S189), and when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S194), the process ends. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, the jackpot start command (4R normal jackpot start command, 4R latent jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (4R ordinary jackpot, 4R latent jackpot, 4R odd jackpot, 16R sudden jackpot, 8R jackpot, 16R jackpot) A start command, a 4R certain variable big hit start command, a 16R probable big hit start command, an 8R certain variable big hit start command, and a 16R certain variable big hit start command are set. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game state according to the type of the jackpot designated by the jackpot start command is executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like.

[7. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 167, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process for clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every time 2 mS elapses, and executes a 2 mS regular process. In the 2 mS steady processing, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed. At the same time as setting the flag T, a process of resetting (clearing) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter to 0 is executed. As described above, the 16 mS elapse flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 mS elapse flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapse flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapse flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 mS steady processing is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS regular processing, processing for controlling the central liquid crystal display device 1500, lamps / LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like is executed based on a command received from the main control board. After the end of the 16 mS steady processing, the flow returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16mS. On the other hand, if the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the 16 mS regular processing executed every 16 mS in the sub main processing. In the 16 mS regular processing, the peripheral control MPU executes the processing of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, a command received from the main control board is analyzed. In the effect control processing of step S602, the central processing is performed based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S149 of the first fluctuation pattern setting processing, the second fluctuation pattern setting processing). The control processing related to the liquid crystal display device 1500 is executed.

  In the sound control process of step S603, control processes related to the speakers 130, 222, 262, side speakers, upper first speaker 354, upper second speaker 355, and upper third speaker 356 are executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 3060 and the like are executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS regular processing ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process to the end of the 16 mS steady-state process, the 16 mS steady-state process is started from the beginning immediately after the 16 mS elapses from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process (the command in step S601). Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 mS has elapsed during the execution of the 16 mS steady processing, only the 16 mS elapsed flag is set. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS regular process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 mS regular processing in the sub-main processing.

[8. Battle Direction]
Next, the winning reduction control will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 169 and FIG. 173 show that the command analysis shows that a judgment result notification command and a fluctuation pattern command indicating reach (reach out of reach, per reach) are received when the vehicle is controlled to the high probability time saving state. FIG. 171 to FIG. 173 are timing charts of a battle effect executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when specified in the process (step S601). FIGS. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a battle effect executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when the command analysis processing (step S601) specifies that the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating that the command has been received have been received. is there.

  In this example, during the high-probability time-saving state, the mode in which the main character 1500a walks is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced at the lower left of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. To execute the fluctuation display. Then, when receiving the determination result notification command indicating the reach and the variation pattern command, the enemy character 1500b is displayed so as to face the main character 1500a, and the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b are confronted. Perform battle effects. Then, when the received judgment result notification command indicates a big hit, a mode in which the main character 1500a defeats the enemy character 1500b as a result of the battle effect is displayed, and when the received judgment result notification command indicates a loss, The mode in which the main character 1500a is defeated by the enemy character 1500b as a result of the battle effect is displayed.

  In the battle effect, the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b are displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 so as to face each other, and then temporarily blacked out (displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 by turning off the screen). Is displayed), and then one of the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b is displayed. The character displayed after the blackout indicates that a preemptive attack is to be performed, and if the main character 1500a is displayed after the blackout, a big hit will always occur. On the other hand, if the enemy character 1500b is displayed after the blackout, a big hit will always occur if the attack of the enemy character 1500b is avoided. In this way, the player can recognize that the main character 1500a is displayed after the blackout and thus will be a big hit, and also avoids the attack of the enemy character 1500b even when the enemy character 1500b is displayed after the blackout. You will be able to recognize the big hit.

  In this way, even if it is determined that a big hit will occur in the middle of the battle effect, if the battle effect is continued thereafter and the fluctuation display is executed for a long time, the special symbol per unit time is displayed. Since the number of times of the variable display is reduced, the number of times the jackpot game state is obtained and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained are reduced, the player may be disadvantaged and the interest in the game may be reduced. In this example, if it is determined that a big hit will occur in the middle of the battle effect, at that time, the big winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower big winning opening 2005) is opened to control the big hit gaming state. While starting, the production is continued so that the battle production is executed to the end. The details will be described below.

  In this example, a battle effect short and a battle effect long are provided as a variation pattern when reaching during the high probability time saving state, and the battle effect short is executed only when a big hit occurs, and the battle effect long is a big hit. The processing is executed both in the case where the error occurs and in the case where the error occurs. First, a battle effect executed based on the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect short will be described with reference to FIG. 169 and FIGS. 171 (A) to 172 (I). In the high-probability time-saving state, a game is performed in which the right-handed player performs the above-described right-handed operation and the game ball enters the second starting port 2004. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to the high-probability time-saving state, the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character 1500a is moving on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In this state, when the second special symbol process process (step S39) is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, the main control MPU executes the second special symbol as shown in FIG. The display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started on the display, and the judgment result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command (in this case, the judgment result notification command indicating a big hit and the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect short-circuit) are displayed on the peripheral control board. Is transmitted. Upon receiving the determination result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command from the main control MPU, the peripheral control MPU variably displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size at the lower left of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and receives the received fluctuation. When the fluctuation time specified by the pattern command has elapsed, all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, when the reach (miss, reach, hit, hit) is indicated by the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU, the main character 1500a stops and stops. The noticed mode is displayed (FIG. 171 (B)).

  Next, after displaying the enemy character 1500b on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 so as to face the main character 1500a (FIG. 171 (C)), the peripheral control MPU blacks out the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 (FIG. 171 (C)). FIG. 171 (D)). Then, the received judgment result notification command indicates that there is a big hit (in this example, 4R certain variable big hit, 16R certain variable big hit) in which the high probability time saving state is continued, and the variation pattern command instructs execution of the variation pattern of the battle effect short. If so, the peripheral control MPU gradually brightens the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 so that only the main character 1500a emerges, and the left, middle, and right images that are reduced and displayed at the lower left of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (big hit symbol), and "big hit determined!" Is displayed to notify the player of a big hit (FIG. 171 (E)).

  As shown in FIG. 169, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is substantially equal to the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Matching, the big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display at the timing of the battle effect that only the main character 1500a emerges after the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is blacked out, The main control MPU starts opening control of the big winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower big winning opening 2005) based on the stop display of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. When the main control MPU starts opening control of the special winning opening (the upper winning opening 2006 or the lower winning opening 2005), the peripheral control MPU displays “big hit!” To control the big hit gaming state. To start, the player can recognize that the control of the big hit gaming state is started, and the player suffers a disadvantage without noticing that the control of the big hit gaming state is started. Can be suppressed. Not limited to the above example as long as the player can surely recognize that the control of the big hit game state is started, and the audio output of the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. (the big hit is started. Please do.) Or a display for notifying the start of the big hit (the big hit is started) may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control MPU continuously executes the battle effect even after the control of the big hit game state is started by the main control MPU, and displays a mode in which the main character 1500a attacks the enemy character 1500b. (FIG. 172 (F)). Next, the peripheral control MPU displays “Press the button and stab!” On the central liquid crystal display 1500 and starts the timer to start measuring the valid period (FIG. 172 (G)). When the dish effect button 257 is operated and the detection signal from the effect button pressing sensor 258 is input to the peripheral control MPU, the elevating unit 3510 moves the back and forth rotating decorative body unit 3550 invisible from the player side to the evacuation. From the position (the rising end position), it is slid downward in an arc shape to move to the appearance position (the falling end position) where it can be seen from the player side, and the rotary connecting member 3630 is rotated to rotate the back four corner second decorative body. The base 3631 and the four back corner second decorative bodies 3633 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 are rotated (rotated) (FIG. 172 (H)).

  Then, after displaying the mode in which the main character 1500a has won (FIG. 172 (I)), the peripheral control MPU executes an effect display of the big hit game state (big hit effect; round effect display, etc.) as shown in FIG. 169. . As described above, even if the big hit game state is started before the end of the battle effect short is completed, the peripheral control MPU continuously executes the effect of the battle effect short and responds to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257. Then, the appearance of the rotating decorative body unit 3550 after the back is made to proceed in a direction in which the effect of the battle effect short is completed (FIG. 172 (H)). In other words, when the battle effect is executed, the player operates the upper plate effect button 257 so as to complete the effect of the short battle effect to cause the back and forth rear decorative body unit 3550 to appear. As described above, the effect of the battle effect short can be completed in response to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 by the player, so that the intention of the player can be reflected in the effect, and a sense of satisfaction and a sense of achievement can be obtained. It can perform more attractive effects than conventional gaming machines. In addition, as shown in FIG. 169, the valid period of the plate effect button 257 is continued until one round of the jackpot game state ends, but when the plate effect button 257 is not operated within the valid period. Even after the validity period has elapsed, the back and back rotating decorative body unit 3550 may be exposed, or if the upper plate effect button 257 is not operated within the validity period, the back and back rotating decorative body unit 3550 may be displayed. The mode in which the main character 1500a has won may be displayed without displaying the unit 3550.

  Also, in this example, a big hit is notified to the player in the middle of the battle effect, control of the big hit game state is started, and the continuation of the battle effect is executed during the execution of the big hit game state, and the effect is displayed. By doing so, the start time of the jackpot game state that would otherwise be started after all of the battle effects have been executed, and at the same time, the fluctuation time of the battle effect performed before the start of the jackpot game state is reduced, This suppresses a reduction in the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated. Specifically, in this example, a period of 58 seconds to 87 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257) is set as a period required to execute all effects of the battle effect short. However, the fluctuation time corresponding to the period for performing the effect performed before the start of the big hit gaming state is 12 seconds, and after the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect short is selected and the second special symbol is variably displayed, When 12 seconds have elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, and control of the big hit gaming state is started. And, the effect of the majority of the effects of the battle effect short (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but may be at least half of the entire period) is executed during the big hit game state, The effect period of the battle effect short executed before the control is 12 seconds, whereas the effect period of the battle effect short executed during the big hit game state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257). It depends on).

  As described above, the period executed during the big hit game state (period executed as the big hit effect) of the entire effect period required to execute the battle effect short is changed to the period (variable time) executed before the start of the big hit game state. ), The time required for the variable display is reduced, and the reduction in the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol per unit time can be suppressed. As described above, in the jackpot gaming state, after opening the special winning opening (the upper winning opening 2006 or the lower winning opening 2005) for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the big winning opening (the upper winning opening 2006 or lower). The opening / closing pattern (round) to be closed when the upper large winning opening sensor 2552 or the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that 9 gaming balls have been awarded in the large winning opening 2005 is performed a plurality of times (4 in this example). Times or 16 times), a certain period or more is always required from the start to the end of the big hit game state. Then, a part of all the effects of the battle effect short is effected before the start of the big hit game state by the variable display effect (in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol), the central liquid crystal display device 1500). And the remaining effect is executed as a big hit effect after the start of the big hit game state, and the effect period of the battle effect short executed as a variable display effect before the start of the big hit game state is: The fluctuating time of the battle effect short is set so as to be relatively shorter than the effect period of the battle effect short executed as the big hit effect after the start of the big hit gaming state. This allows the player to operate the handle lever 504 to make the big prize port (the upper prize port 2006 or the lower prize port 2005) play a game ball only during the execution period of the jackpot game state. Executing part of the production short, directing the battle production short before the start of the jackpot game state, without having to be terminated halfway, while displaying all the productions of the battle production short Since the variation time of the battle effect short can be reduced by 46 to 75 seconds as compared to the case where the effect is performed during the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) is started. And the period from the end of the big hit game state to the end can be shortened. There for possible to prevent the reduction may increase the execution opportunities jackpot determination process. Further, even if the time required for the variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed for a long period of time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the big hit game state, so that the battle can be performed without simplifying the effect contents. It is possible to reduce the fluctuating time by executing the effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the simplification of the effect content.

  In the above-described example, an effect requesting a button operation (button effect) is executed after it is determined that a big hit has been determined. The body unit 3550 is moved from an evacuation position invisible to the player to an appearance position in which it is visible. In other words, the player is notified that the jackpot has been determined to be a big hit, and if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated during the validity period, the player is informed in advance that the back decorative decoration unit 3550 always appears. The button effect is being executed while the user is aware of it. Normally, the button effect is executed before the result of the variable display is determined, and if the result of the variable display is lost, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the validity period, the lower back rotation is performed. It is set so that the possibility that the decorative body unit 3550 appears from the retreat position to the appearance position is reduced. If the result of the variable display is a big hit, if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the validity period, the back side is displayed. The lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 is set to be more likely to appear from the retracted position to the appearing position.

  Further, as described above, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability is set to 1/400, and the jackpot probability at the time of high probability is set to 1/40. When the button effect is executed, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, it is unlikely that the rear decorative decoration unit 3550 will appear from the retracted position to the appearing position. In this way, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated when the button effect is executed, if the rear decorative body unit 3550 does not appear from the retracted position to the appearing position, the player feels stress, In addition, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, there is a low possibility that the rear decorative ornamental unit 3550 will appear from the retracted position to the appearing position from the retracted position. Was.

  In this example, if it is determined that a big hit has been determined as described above, and the button effect is executed and the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the validity period, the lower back rear decorative ornament unit 3550 must be moved from the retracted position. Since the button effect is executed in a state where the player knows in advance that it will appear at the appearance position, the upper plate effect to dissipate the stress accumulated by the button effect executed before the big hit is confirmed The button 257 can be operated. In addition, since it is determined that a big hit has occurred, the upper decorative effect button 257 can be operated in a state where attention is paid to the surrounding players, so that the lower back and back rotating decorative body unit 3550 can appear, thereby obtaining a sense of superiority. And the joy of being a big hit can be further enhanced.

  Next, the battle effect executed based on the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect long will be described with reference to FIG. 170 and FIGS. 171 (A) to 171 (D), FIG. 171 (E ′), FIGS. explain. The effect performed based on the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect long includes the same effect as the effect performed based on the change pattern of the battle effect short. Is interpreted as battle effect long, and only the portions different from the battle effect short effect will be described below.

  FIG. 171 (A) to FIG. 171 (D) by the peripheral control MPU based on the reception of the determination result command and the fluctuation pattern command (in this case, the fluctuation pattern command indicating the battle effect long fluctuation pattern) from the main control MPU. Is executed, if the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is gradually brightened and only the enemy character 1500b emerges (FIG. 171 (E ')), an attack is performed by the enemy character 1500b. In addition, as shown in FIG. 170, the attack by the enemy character 1500b is performed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

  The received judgment result notification command indicates a jackpot (4R probability variable hit, 16R probability variable hit) in which the high-probability time-saving state continues, and the execution of the battle effect long variation pattern is instructed by the variation pattern command. In this case, the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character 1500a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1500b (FIG. 173 (F ′)), and also displays the left and middle images reduced and displayed at the lower left of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. -The right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner (big hit symbol) and "Attack Avoidance! Big Hit Confirmation!" Is displayed to notify the player of a big hit (Fig. 173 (G ')). Thereafter, the effects of FIGS. 172 (F) to 172 (I) are executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 170, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is substantially equal to the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. At the timing of the battle effect, in which the main character 1500a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1500b, the big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display, and the big special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the stop display, the main control MPU starts opening control of the special winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower winning opening 2005).

  On the other hand, the received judgment result notification command indicates a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit in this example) that ends the missed or high-probability time saving state, and the execution of the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect long by the fluctuation pattern command. Is displayed, the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character 1500a is attacked by the enemy character 1500b (FIG. 173 (F ″)), and if the received determination result notification command is out of order, The left, middle, and right decorative symbols, which are reduced and displayed at the lower left of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, are stopped and displayed in an out-of-position mode (in this case, the out-of-reach symbols), and the received judgment result notification command is in a high-probability time-saving state. If the big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit in this example) ends, the lower left of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 By stopping and displaying the reduced left, middle, and right decorative symbols in a jackpot manner and displaying "defeat ...", the player is notified that the deviation or the high-probability time-saving state is ended (FIG. 173 (G '')). Thereafter, if the received judgment result notification command is out of order, the process returns to FIG. 171 (A), and the mode in which the main character 1500a is moving is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. If the jackpot is to end the state (in this example, 4R normal jackpot, 4R latent jackpot), it is notified that the jackpot gaming state is to be started and the control of the jackpot gaming state is performed, and then the process returns to FIG. The state in which character 1500a is moving is displayed on central liquid crystal display device 1500.

  It should be noted that a period of 78 seconds to 107 seconds (depending on the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257) is set as a period required to execute all the effects of the battle effect long executed when the big hit occurs. However, the fluctuation time corresponding to the period of performing the effect performed before the start of the jackpot gaming state is 32 seconds, and after the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect long is selected and the second special symbol is variably displayed, When 32 seconds have elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, and the control of the big hit gaming state is started. And, the effect of the majority of the effects of the battle effect long (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but may be at least half of the entire period) is executed during the big hit game state, and The effect period of the battle effect long executed before the control is 32 seconds, whereas the effect period of the battle effect long executed during the big hit game state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257). It depends on).

  As described above, even in the case of performing a battle effect in which the effect period is longer than the battle effect short, of the entire effect period required to execute the battle effect long, the period executed during the big hit game state (executed as the big hit effect) The time required for variable display is reduced by making the period (variable time) performed before the start of the big hit gaming state (variable time), and the number of times of special symbol variable display per unit time is reduced. Can be suppressed. That is, a part of the effects of the battle effect long is changed before the start of the big hit game state by the variable display effect (in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol), the central liquid crystal display device 1500). And the remaining effect is executed as a big hit effect after the start of the big hit gaming state, and the effect period of the battle effect long executed as a variable display effect before the start of the big hit gaming state is: The variation time of the battle effect long is set so as to be relatively shorter than the effect period of the battle effect long executed as the big hit effect after the start of the big hit gaming state. This allows the player to operate the handle lever 504 to make the big prize port (the upper prize port 2006 or the lower prize port 2005) play a game ball only during the execution period of the jackpot game state. Executing a part of the effect of the production long, and performing all the effects of the battle effect long without ending all the effects of the battle effect long, but changing all the effects of the battle effect long as a fluctuation display effect and changing the second special symbol The fluctuation time of the battle effect long is reduced by 46 seconds to 75 seconds as compared with the case where it is executed during the display, the fluctuation display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) is started, and then the big hit game state is ended. The period of time until the change of the special symbol per unit time due to the shortened fluctuation time can be suppressed. It can increase the sense of execution opportunities. Further, even if the time required for the variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed for a long period of time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the big hit game state, so that the battle can be performed without simplifying the effect contents. It is possible to reduce the fluctuating time by executing the effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the simplification of the effect content.

  In addition, 65 seconds is required as a period required to execute all the effects of the battle effect long executed when a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit) in this example ends the loss or the high probability time saving state. Is set. In other words, the fluctuation time of the battle effect long executed in the case of a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit in this example) that ends the loss or the high probability time saving state is set to 65 seconds. It should be noted that, by displaying a mode in which the main character 1500a is not able to avoid the attack of the enemy character 1500b by executing the battle effect long, and performing an effect of reviving the main character 1500a and defeating the enemy character 1500b, a big hit is achieved. May be notified. In this case, when the main character 1500a is restored, the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the big hit symbol of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Then, after the control of the big hit gaming state is started, an effect of defeating the enemy character 1500b (for example, the effects of FIGS. 172 (F) to 172 (I)) may be executed. In this case, the period of the effect performed before the start of the big hit gaming state may be longer than the period of the effect performed during the big hit gaming state, but even in this case, at least all Since the effect period can be shortened as compared with the case where the effect is executed before the start of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the number of times of display of the special symbol per unit time.

  As described above, the battle effects have been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present embodiment is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications may be made without departing from the gist of the embodiments as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Also, in the above example, the effect performed during the high probability time saving state is shown, but the effect period is shortened compared to the case where all effects performed in connection with the variable display are executed before the start of the big hit game state. As long as the control is executed, the state is not limited to the high-probability time-saving state, but is a low-probability non-time-saving state (so-called normal state), a low-probability time-saving state (so-called time-saving state), a high-probability non-time-saving state, and a high-probability time-saving state. (So-called probable state) or any combination (or all). Further, when the control for shortening the effect period is executed even in a state other than the high-probability time reduction state, the appearance frequency of the effect and the big hit expectation may be made different for each game state. For example, in the non-time-saving state (high-probability non-time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state), the frequency of appearance is lower than in the time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state), and the big hit expectation is lower than in the time-saving state. It is also possible to increase the selection ratio of the long version of battle production (battle production long) in the non-time saving state when it is a big hit, and to increase the selection ratio of the short version of battle production (battle production short) in the time reduction state. In the time reduction state, the effect of shortening the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) to the end of the big hit game state may be enhanced as compared with the non-time reduction state.

  In addition, as described above, in the fluctuation pattern in which the high probability time saving state of the battle effect short and the battle effect long is continued, the button effect is executed during the big hit game state, but the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 The content of the big hit effect that is executed after the end of the battle effect may be changed accordingly. For example, when the button effect is executed, the validity period of the upper plate effect button 257 is set until a predetermined round (for example, three rounds) of the jackpot game state ends, and the upper effect is set in an earlier round (for example, until two rounds end). When the dish effect button 257 is operated, a series of jackpot effects (moving images, etc.) that are completed before the remaining round of the jackpot game state is executed, and the upper plate effect is performed in a late round (for example, three rounds). When the button 257 is operated, a series of big hit effects may be terminated halfway when the remaining rounds in the big hit game state are executed while performing the same effect. As described above, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is late, the big hit effect ends in the middle, so that the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated at an earlier timing.

  In addition, while the common jackpot effect is executed regardless of the operation timing of the above-mentioned large plate effect button 257, the process is executed until the big hit effect is completed according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257, or the process ends. The effect is not limited to a different one, and a different effect may be executed in accordance with the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257. For example, when the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is early, the player enjoys When the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is late while displaying an effect such as circulating, the effect that makes the player uncomfortable is displayed so that the upper plate effect button 257 is operated at an earlier timing. Or the timing at which the upper plate effect button 257 is operated (round, elapsed time, and time until the upper plate effect button 257 is operated). It is executed as a big hit effect by changing the type of the big hit effect that is executed after the end of the battle effect according to the winning opening (the number of gaming balls entering the upper winning opening 2006 or the lower winning opening 2005). The battle effect may be completed by operating the upper stage effect button 257 at a timing determined by the player himself while considering the type of the game. In this way, by making the subsequent development different according to the timing at which the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, the player can also consider the timing at which the upper plate effect button 257 is operated and enjoy the game in the big hit game state. Because of this, it is possible to execute a more attractive effect than the conventional jackpot effect performed in the conventional jackpot game state.

  Further, the mode of the battle effect may be changed in accordance with the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257. For example, the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 (round, elapsed time, until the upper plate effect button 257 is operated) The effect display (for example, the back side) of displaying the back and forth rotating decorative body unit 3550 as the number of game balls entering the large winning prize opening (the upper winning prize opening 2006 or the lower winning prize opening 2005) becomes earlier or later. When displaying a flame around the lower rear rotating decorative body unit 3550, the size and color of the flame may be flashy. As the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 is earlier, the effect display at the time of the appearance of the back and forth rotating decorative body unit 3550 is made more flashy, so that the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated at an earlier timing. As the operation timing of the button 257 is later, the effect display at the time of displaying the back and forth rotating decorative body unit 3550 is flashier, so that the upper plate effect button 257 can be operated at a later timing. As described above, by appropriately setting the effect, it is possible to guide the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257 at a predetermined timing.

  In addition, as the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257, depending on the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening (upper winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) before the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, In the case where the mode of the effect (either one or both of the battle effect and the big hit effect) is made different, in all the big hit game states executed after the control of the high-probability time-saving state is started, the big winning prize port (the upper winning prize) The number may be changed according to the number of game balls that have entered the opening 2006 or the lower winning a prize opening 2005). In this case, since the mode of the effect can be made different as the number of the big hit game states executed in the high probability time saving state increases, the player can be changed depending on the number of the big hit game states. Can be given a sense of superiority and satisfaction, and the joy of having a big hit can be further enhanced.

  In the above-described example, when the button effect is executed and the upper plate effect button 257 is operated within the valid period, the valid period ends at that point and the back and back rotating decorative body unit 3550 is operated a predetermined number of times (the number of times). Although it is configured to appear only once in the example), the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the back decoration rotary decoration unit 3550 appears, the validity period is not terminated. By operating the upper plate effect button 257 again after the revolving decorative body unit 3550 has retreated, the revolving decorative body unit 3550 may be made to appear after the lower back, or a predetermined round (all rounds) in the jackpot game state. Alternatively, if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated in a specific round (for example, until 10 rounds are completed or an odd round, etc.), the lower back and back rotation decoration is performed. The unit 3550 may be caused to appear, whereby the joy of the big hit can be further enhanced, and the appearance of the underside rear rotating decorative body unit 3550 by operating the upper plate effect button 257 causes a big hit. You can appeal to others around you and give them a sense of superiority.

  Further, in the above example, the battle effect (battle effect short, battle effect long) can be executed not only in the case of a big hit but also in the case of a loss. The battle effect variation pattern may be executed only in such a case, and the battle effect may not be executed in the case of a miss. With this configuration, when a battle effect is executed, a big hit always occurs. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the effect with a margin, and at the same time, the timing of starting control of the big hit game state and the type of the big hit (4R normal The big hit, the 4R latent big hit, the 4R variable big hit and the 16R variable big hit can also be noticed.

  In addition, during the high-probability time-saving state, a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit) for ending the high-probability time-saving state is instructed by the determination result notification command, and a battle effect (battle effect short, battle effect) is issued by the fluctuation pattern command. Long) fluctuation pattern is instructed, the control of the big hit game state is started after the end of the battle effect, but in this case, the 4R big hit game state executed in this case is larger than the 16R big hit game state. Since the period required from the start to the end of the jackpot game state is short, even if the battle effect is executed as a variable display effect to the end during the variable display of the second special symbol, the special symbol (this In this case, the special symbols (in this case, the second special symbols) It can shorten the period until the end of the 4 jackpot gaming state from the start of variable display of the second special symbol).

[9. Real-time production]
Next, the real-time production will be described. The real-time effect is to display an image in which the main character 1500a walks in the field into a plurality of scenes and display them in order, regardless of whether or not the game ball has won the starting prize, and loop the divided scenes to the center. During the display on the liquid crystal display device 1500, the game ball is currently displayed when the game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the start port unit 2100 and starts the variable display accordingly. This effect is performed seamlessly from the loop video scene.

  In the real-time effect in the present embodiment, for example, a loop image in which the main character walks in a field (in this example, in a train car) is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and a game ball is displayed while the image is being displayed. At the time when the winning prize and the fluctuation display are performed, the effect corresponding to the object displayed in the field of the loop image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is changed according to the fluctuation pattern output from the main control board. The peripheral control MPU selects according to the fluctuating time. For example, when the main character walks through the field and a window is displayed when a fluctuating display is performed, for example, performing an effect using a window such as an enemy jumping out of a window. Thus, it is possible to perform an effect by linking a scene displayed before the change display and a scene displayed during the change display in real time, and to enjoy a variety of effects.

[Loop video]
The loop image in this example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 206 is a diagram showing a sketch of a field in which the main character 1500a walks in the loop image. FIG. 207 is a diagram showing a loop image displayed on central liquid crystal display device 1500. FIG. 207 (A) shows main character 1500a displayed in an area of scene 1 (hereinafter simply referred to as scene 1) in FIG. 206. (B) is a loop image displayed when the main character 1500a is displayed in the scene 2 area, and (C) is a loop image displayed when the main character 1500a is displayed in the scene 3 area. Is a loop image displayed when is displayed. FIG. 208 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the loop image in FIG. 207. (D) is a loop image displayed when the main character 1500a is displayed in the area of scene 4, and (E) is a scene image. 5 (F) is a loop image displayed when the main character 1500a is displayed in the area of the scene 6 when the main character 1500a is displayed in the area 5.

First, as shown in FIG. 206, the loop image means that the main character 1500a walks from a start point to a goal point in a field designated in advance, and when it reaches the goal point, returns to the start point and returns to the goal point again. It shows an image that is displayed cyclically and repeatedly, such as walking. In this field, scenes are set for each place, and are divided into six scenes 1 to 6 in total.
A loop image starts from a scene 1, progresses along a scene 2 and a scene 3, and a scene 6 is the last scene. After proceeding to scene 6, it returns to scene 1 again, and loops thereafter. The time required from the start point of scene 1 to the goal point of scene 6 is, for example, 60 seconds to 70 seconds.

  Note that the loop image from scene 1 to scene 6 displayed on the central liquid crystal display device in this example is displayed as if the camera were pointed from the side of the main character 1500a, but is not limited to this. Instead, for example, the display mode may be such that the camera is turned from behind the main character 1500a and follows the main character 1500a walking.

[Types of real-time production]
FIG. 209 is a diagram illustrating an effect table that stores effect patterns used for real-time effects.
As shown in FIG. 209, a total of eight types of effect patterns of PTN1 to PTN8 are prepared for the real-time effect in this example.

  When the PTN 1 is displaying the loop image, and the door is displayed in the loop image, the PTN 1 is to reach by the judgment result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control MPU (reach, release, reach This is an effect pattern that can be selected when "big hit" is indicated. This effect pattern is an effect using a door which is a fixed object, and an effect in which a creature jumps out after the door opens vigorously is executed.

  When displaying a loop image, and when a window is displayed in the loop image, the PTN 2 is to reach with the judgment result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU (reach, departure, reach). This is an effect pattern that can be selected when “big hit” is indicated or when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is 12 seconds or more. This effect pattern is an effect using a window which is a fixed object, and an effect in which a window is broken and a creature jumps in is executed.

  PTN3 is displaying a loop image, when a door is displayed in the loop image, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is less than 5 seconds by the judgment result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control MPU. It is an effect pattern that can be selected other than. This effect pattern is an effect using a door which is a fixed object, and an effect in which the door is only opened vigorously is executed.

  PTN4 is an effect pattern that can be selected while a loop image is being displayed and a window is being displayed in the loop image. This effect pattern is an effect using a window which is a fixed object, and an effect only in which the window is broken is executed.

  When it is impossible to display the effect patterns of the PTN1 to PTN4 (the object of the door or the window is not displayed in the loop image), the PTN5 transmits the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU. This is an effect pattern that can be selected when reaching (reach out, reach and big hit) is indicated. This effect pattern is an effect using an image and an action, and displays an image in which the camera is turned from behind the main character 1500a, the main character 1500a stops, looks back in the camera direction, and then the camera returns to the main character 1500a. When it turns around, an effect in which an enemy appears in front of the main character 1500a is executed.

  When the display of the effect patterns of the PTN1 to PTN4 is impossible, the PTN6 is selected by the judgment result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control MPU except when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is less than 12 seconds. This is a possible production pattern. This effect pattern is an effect using an image and an action, and displays an image in which the camera is turned from behind the main character 1500a, the main character 1500a stops, looks back toward the camera, and then the camera returns to the main character 1500a An effect is performed in which no enemy appears in front of the main character 1500a, although the wraparound is performed.

  PTN7 is selected when the effect pattern of PTN1 to PTN6 cannot be displayed and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is shorter than 5 seconds by the judgment result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control MPU. This is a possible production pattern. This effect pattern is an effect in which the main character 1500a performs an action, and an effect in which the main character 1500a stops, takes out the wireless device, and emits a word (for example, “This is Tom, over.”) Is executed. After that, a replacement effect of changing the background is executed.

  When the display of the effect patterns of the PTN1 to PTN6 is impossible, the PTN8 is selected by the judgment result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control MPU except when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is less than 5 seconds. This is a possible production pattern. This effect pattern is an effect in which the main character 1500a performs an action, in which an effect in which the main character 1500a stops, looks back toward the camera, raises the thumb, and takes a thumb-up pose is executed. After that, a replacement effect of changing the background is executed.

  When none of the fluctuation patterns of the PTNs 1 to 8 can be executed, that is, when the object of the door or the window is not displayed in the loop image and the conditions of the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern are not satisfied, the background is changed. It is designed to execute a replacement effect that changes.

  The period during which the object action using the door or window can be selected is predetermined for each scene. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 210 is a diagram showing a period in which an object action can be executed in a graph for each scene. L1 indicates an object action using a door, that is, PTN1 or PTN3, and L2 indicates an object action using a window, that is, PTN2 or PTN4. In the scenes 1 to 6, when the above-described conditions of the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern are satisfied during the period in which the above L1 and L2 are displayed, the respective effect patterns are selected according to the conditions. When L1 and L2 are in the range where they are not displayed and the above-described conditions of the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern are not satisfied, the respective effect patterns cannot be selected. When the fluctuation display is performed during a period in which both the L1 and L2 effect patterns can be selected, whether the fluctuation is a fluctuation accompanied by a fluctuation time or a reach specified based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control board. The effect pattern is determined depending on whether or not.

[Performance of real-time production]
When no start winning has occurred on the game board, the above-described loop image from scene 1 to scene 6 is cyclically looped and displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Then, during display of a loop image in which the main character 1500a is walking in the field, for example, when a game ball wins and wins when the main character 1500a is present in the area of the scene 2, the main control board moves to the peripheral control board. The fluctuation pattern command is output, and the peripheral control MPU analyzes the command received from the main control board, and specifies the fluctuation time. At the same time, a real-time effect determination process is executed.

  Next, a control process when the peripheral control MPU determines to perform a real-time effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 211 is a flowchart in which, when the peripheral control MPU determines that a real-time effect is to be performed, which effect pattern is to be selected in a stepwise manner in accordance with the variation time. This process is a process executed in the effect control process of step S602 in the 16 mS regular process (see FIG. 167) by the peripheral control MPU.

When the real-time effect determination process is started, in step S700, if the variation time in the variation is the number of seconds in which PTN1 to PTN4 can be executed (YES in step S700), it is determined to execute an object action ( Step S704), the real-time effect determination process ends.
On the other hand, if the change time in the change is not the number of seconds in which PTN1 to PTN4 can be executed (NO in step S700), it is determined whether the change time in the change is the number of seconds in which PTN5 to PTN6 can be executed. Perform (Step S702).

Next, in step S702, when the fluctuation time in the fluctuation is the number of seconds in which PTN5 to PTN6 can be executed (YES in step S702), it is determined to execute the camera action (step S708), and the real-time effect determination is performed. The process ends.
On the other hand, if the change time in the change is not the number of seconds in which PTN5 to PTN6 can be executed (NO in step S702), it is determined whether the change time in the change is the number of seconds in which PTN7 to PTN8 can be executed. Perform (step S706).

Next, in step S706, when the variation time in the variation is the number of seconds in which PTN7 to PTN8 can be executed (YES in step S706), it is determined to execute the hero action (step S712), and the real-time effect determination is performed. The process ends.
On the other hand, if the fluctuation time in the fluctuation is not the number of seconds in which PTN7 to PTN8 can be executed (NO in step S706), it is determined to execute the replacement notice, and the real-time effect determination process ends (step S710).

[Example 1 of production flow in real-time production]
Next, an example of a flow in the real-time effect of the present example will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 212 is a diagram illustrating an example of a real-time effect performed when the main character 1500a is in the area of the scene 1.

  During the display of the loop video as shown in FIG. 212 (A), the main character 1500a walks through the field. For example, when the main character 1500a is in the scene 1 area in the field, as shown in FIG. 212 (B). When the game ball starts and wins, a variation pattern command is output from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and the peripheral control MPU analyzes the command received from the main control board to specify the variation time. Next, when the specified fluctuation time can execute the effect patterns of PTN1 to PTN4, it is determined to execute the object action.

  When it is determined that the object action is to be executed, one of the effect patterns of PTN1 to PTN4 is selected. If the analyzed fluctuation pattern command does not involve a reach, PTN1 is an effect pattern that can be selected only for a fluctuation pattern with a reach, and in this case, one of PTN2 to PTN4 is selected. In the area of scene 1, a door is disposed at the left corner and a window is disposed at the right corner as fixed objects (see FIG. 212 (A)). However, in FIG. Since only a part of the window can be visually recognized, in this case, it is determined to execute the PTN3 effect pattern.

  When the effect pattern of PTN3 is executed, as shown in FIG. 212 (C), the effect shifts to an effect in which the scene is not switched from the displayed loop image and the door is opened seamlessly and vigorously. At this time, the main character 1500a is surprised that the door has opened vigorously, and performs an action of paying attention to the door as shown in FIG. 212 (D). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 212 (E), a seamless transition is again made to a loop image in which the main character 1500a walks through the field.

  In the first example, if the analyzed fluctuation pattern command is accompanied by a reach, any one of the PTNs 1 to 4 is selected. In Example 1, since the entire door is visible and only a part of the window is visible, either PTN1 or PTN3 effect pattern is selected. In this case, the peripheral control MPU sorts out one of the effect patterns using the random number lottery and the distribution table. For example, the selectable PTN1 is selected at a rate of 10% only in the case of the fluctuation pattern with the reach, and the selectable PTN3 is selected at a rate of 90% even in a pattern other than the fluctuation pattern with the reach.

  In addition, even when the window or the door, which is a fixed object, is only partially visible or not visible at all, an effect pattern using the door or the window may be selected. In order to convey the situation that the window is often opened or the window is broken, the effect is expressed only by the sound using the speaker unit 920. As a result, the player can be given a thrilling or fearful feeling that the door will be opened vigorously or the window will be broken out of sight, and the interest in the game will be improved.

[Example 2 of production flow in real-time production]
During the display of the loop image, when the main character 1500a walks through the field, for example, when the main character 1500a is in the area of the scene 2 in the field and the game ball starts and wins, the fluctuation pattern from the main control board to the peripheral control board is displayed. The command is output, the command received from the main control board by the peripheral control MPU is analyzed, and the fluctuation time is specified. Next, when the specified fluctuation time cannot execute the effect patterns of PTN1 to PTN4 and the effect patterns of PTN5 to PTN6 can be executed, it is determined to perform the camera action.

  When it is decided to execute the camera action, one of the effect patterns of PTN5 to PTN6 is selected. If the analyzed fluctuation pattern command does not involve a reach, it is determined that a selectable PTN 6 effect pattern is to be executed when the fluctuation time is less than 12 seconds.

  When the effect pattern of the PTN 6 is executed, the main character 1500a stops without switching scenes from the displayed loop image, and shifts to an effect of looking back toward the camera. Next, when the camera turns again behind the main character 1500a, an enemy appears in front of the main character 1500a. Then, the enemy performs an action of holding a weapon such as a gun possessed by the enemy. Thereafter, a seamless transition is made again to a loop image in which the main character 1500a walks through the field.

  In the above example 2, if the analyzed fluctuation pattern command is accompanied by a reach, one of the PTNs 5 to 6 is selected. In this case, the peripheral control MPU sorts out one of the effect patterns using the random number lottery and the distribution table. For example, the selectable PTN5 is selected at a rate of 20% only in the case of the fluctuation pattern with the reach, and the selectable PTN6 is selected at the rate of 80% even if the pattern is other than the fluctuation pattern with the reach.

[Example 3 of production flow in real-time production]
During the display of the loop image, when the main character 1500a walks through the field, for example, when the main character 1500a is in the area of the scene 5 in the field and the game ball starts and wins, the fluctuation pattern from the main control board to the peripheral control board is obtained. The command is output, the command received from the main control board by the peripheral control MPU is analyzed, and the fluctuation time is specified. Next, in a case where the specified fluctuation time cannot perform the effect patterns of PTN1 to PTN6 and the effect patterns of PTN7 to PTN8 can be executed, it is determined to perform the main character action.

  When it is determined that the hero action is to be performed, one of the effect patterns of PTNs 7 to 8 is selected. If the analyzed variation pattern command does not involve a reach, both variation patterns are effect patterns that can be selected when the variation time is less than 5 seconds. One of the effect patterns is assigned to the minute table. For example, 95% of PTN7 and 5% of PTN8 are selected.

  For example, when the effect pattern of PTN7 is executed, the main character 1500a stops without switching scenes from the displayed loop image, takes out the wireless device, and shifts to an effect of saying one word. Next, the main character 1500a performs an action of issuing a line “This is Tom, over.” Toward the wireless device. After that, instead of seamlessly transitioning to a loop image in which the main character 1500a walks in the field, the replacement image is displayed, the background is switched, and non-seamless scene switching is performed.

[Example 4 of production flow in real-time production]
During the display of the loop image, when the main character 1500a walks through the field, for example, when the main character 1500a is in the area of the scene 5 in the field and the game ball starts and wins, the fluctuation pattern from the main control board to the peripheral control board is obtained. The command is output, the command received from the main control board by the peripheral control MPU is analyzed, and the fluctuation time is specified. Next, when the object of the door or the window is not displayed in the loop image, and the effect pattern of PTN1 to 8 cannot be executed based on the fact that the conditions of the specified variation time and variation pattern are not satisfied, It is decided to give a notice of replacement.

  When it is determined that the replacement notice is to be executed, a replacement image for switching the background is displayed without performing the various action effects, and the replacement notice is performed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, unlike the effect in which the relevance between the conventional loop image and the variable display is weak, the scene displayed before the variable display and the image displayed during the variable display are displayed. Since the scene and the scene can be linked in real time to perform a seamless effect, it is possible to provide an unprecedented effect mode to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Return to loop image]
The effect performed when the effect patterns of PTN7 to PTN8 and PTN1 to PTN8 among the effect patterns described above cannot be selected is an effect of displaying a replacement image for switching a screen from a loop image (replacement notice). Things. Therefore, in this example, when returning to the loop image after the replacement effect is completed, the scene returns to the area of the scene where the main character 1500a existed before the replacement effect was executed. For example, when the main character 1500a is present in the scene 2 area, the above-described replacement effect is performed, and when returning to the loop image again, it does not return to the start point area of the scene 1 but specifies the scene 2 area. In this case, the loop image is displayed again from the scene area where the main character 1500a existed before the replacement effect is performed. This will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the flow of the loop video processing described later and the selected effect pattern, and FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the flow of the loop effect.

  The process of executing the loop image and the selected effect pattern is executed in the effect control process of step S602 in the 16 mS regular process (see FIG. 167) by the peripheral control MPU.

  In order to return to the designated return point after performing the replacement effect, in this example, it is a replacement effect. Is identified by The default value of the pointer is set to “1” corresponding to scene 1. When the main character 1500a walks through the field and moves to the next scene, the point value is incremented by one and the upper limit is set to "6". That is, the point value when the main character 1500a exists in the scene 1 is “1”, and the point value when the main character 1500a exists in the scene 6 is “6”.

  For example, when the replacement effect is performed when the main character 1500a is present in the scene 2 during the display of the loop image, the point value is “2”. Is configured so that the main character 1500a returns to the start point of scene 2 corresponding to the point value "2" and returns to the loop image.

When the loop video processing is started, in step S720, if the replacement effect is being executed (YES in step S720), the loop video processing ends.
On the other hand, when the replacement effect is not being executed (NO in step S720), a scene corresponding to the pointer value in the loop image (if the pointer value is “3”, scene 3 is displayed) is displayed (step S720). S722).

Next, in step S724, it is determined whether or not one scene of the displayed loop image has ended (the main character 1500a that walks has straddled the scene), and if one scene has not ended (NO in step S724). ) Terminates the loop video processing.
On the other hand, when one scene is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the pointer is the upper limit value ("6") (step S726).

Next, in step S726, if the value of the pointer is not the upper limit value (NO in step S726), 1 is added to the value of the pointer, and the loop video processing ends.
On the other hand, if the value of the pointer is the upper limit value (YES in step S726), the value of the pointer is returned to the default value “1”, and the loop video processing ends.

  According to the configuration described above, in the loop image, the value of the pointer is set corresponding to the scene where the main character 1500a exists, and any scene in the loop image is displayed according to the value of the pointer. Is to be determined. That is, when returning to the loop image after the replacement effect is executed, the loop effect is not simply returned to the start point of the loop image, but is started from the scene where the main character 1500a was present before the replacement effect was performed. For example, even though the main character 1500a was present in the scene 4 before the replacement effect was performed, when returning to the loop image after the replacement effect, the area of the scene 4 It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable feeling when the loop image is started from a different position, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the above-described returning processing to the loop image, the description has been made assuming that the value of the identification pointer indicating which scene the main character 1500a was in is added every time the main character 1500a moves through the scene. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to more finely set the return point by increasing the upper limit value of the pointer value and providing points where the pointer value is added at a plurality of places in each scene. it can. This makes it possible to restart the loop effect from a position close to the position where the main character 1500a existed before the replacement effect was executed, and to return to the loop image naturally without further discomfort. be able to.

[10. Game content]
Next, the contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 174 is a front view of the game board in which the front structural member and the front unit are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. FIG. 175 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the right portion in the game area in FIG. 174, and FIG. 175 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line HH in FIG. It is. Further, FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram showing, in an enlarged manner, the vicinity of the big winning opening in FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the upper center part 2500 which divides the inside of the game area 5a into right and left depending on the hitting strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the stronger the ball is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger it can be driven.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the game ball is inserted into the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  The game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 by the ball launching device 680 hitting the game ball with a hitting strength less than a predetermined hitting strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, Of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500, the vehicle enters the left side in front view of the highest portion. Then, the game ball that has entered the left side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role item 2500 is placed on the left side of the center role item 2500 while the game ball abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). Will flow down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500, the game ball of the center role 2500 passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the left end of the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2523 opened in the frame.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 rolls back and forth on the stage 2530 to the left and right, and the side guiding grooves 2532 formed on both sides at the center in the left and right direction in the game area 5a. When the water is released forward, the water flows down the area above the starting port unit 2100 below the stage 2530 in the game area 5a. Thereby, there is a possibility that the game ball is accepted in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released forward from the central guide groove 2531 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a of the stage 2530, the starting port unit 2100 opened directly below the central guide groove 2531. Is accepted with a high probability in the first starting port 2002 of the first. When game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the game is performed below the center role 2500 by a plurality of obstacle nails, the first shelf 2201a of the side unit 2200, and the like. There is a possibility that the vehicle will be guided toward the center in the left-right direction in the area 5a, and will be accepted in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, and the like arranged on the downstream side. Then, when a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  Also, the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center role 2500 does not flow down to the attacker unit 2300 side due to the lower side of the center role 2500 extending between the starting port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300. The general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the lower winning opening 2005, etc. of the attacker unit 2300 are not accepted. Note that the opening unit 2100 includes a horizontally long rectangular fake portion 2105a similar to the lower winning opening door member 2352 that opens and closes the lower winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2300 below the first opening 2002. Therefore, it can be illusioned that there is a big winning opening below the first starting opening as in the conventional pachinko machine.

  On the other hand, the ball launching device 680 is hit with a hitting strength equal to or greater than a predetermined hitting strength in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, so that the ball firing device 680 is hit into the upper portion of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a. The game ball enters (is driven into) the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500. The game ball that has entered the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role item 2500 passes through the upper right entrance, the upper gaming space 2541, and the right passage 2542 from the lower right exit 2543. It is discharged directly above the gate section 2003 in the attacker unit 2300. As a result, a game ball hit (right-hit) so as to flow down the right side of the center role item 2500 passes through the gate unit 2003 with an extremely high probability. Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 flows down onto the shelf member 2303 through the front of the second starting port 2004, and rolls on the shelf member 2303 to the left as viewed from the front. It is emitted downward from the left end of the view. The game ball released from the shelf member 2303 flows down on the lower right rail 1005 through the front of the lower large winning opening 2005, rolls on the lower right rail 1005 leftward in front view, and plays the game from the out opening 1111. It is discharged out of the area 5a.

  When the game ball discharged from the lower right exit 2543 flows down the left side of the gate section 2003 when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 via the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 and the guiding section 2302b of the starting port front member 2302. Or, there is a possibility that the lower winning award 2005 will be accepted. On the other hand, when the game ball flows down on the right side of the gate portion 2003 when viewed from the front, it flows down onto the lower right rail 1005 without being accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 and is discharged from the out opening 1111. You.

  Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 when the lower large winning opening 2005 is open, the lower large winning opening 2005 is accepted with a high probability.

  When a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2305, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board, and when the selected normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second starting door member 2323. Moves forward for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 3 seconds) to open the second starting port 2004. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the front of the second starting port 2004 at the timing when the second starting port door member 2323 is advanced and is in the open state, the distribution direction is changed backward by the second starting port door member 2323. And is received by the second starting port 2004. When game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board and the payout control board.

  In the present embodiment, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 (for example, 0. 0). 1 to 10 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5.

  In addition, if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and for more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  When a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "medium") advantageous to the player on the main control board. A special lottery result for generating “hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change”, “time reduction”, etc.). Then, the lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 5 to 360 seconds). Note that special lottery results obtained by accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “15R big hit”, “ Per probability change (probability change) "," Time reduction (time reduction) "," Probability variation time reduction "," Probability variation time reduction no hit ", and the like.

  When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. Either the lower winning opening door member 2352 of the attacker unit 2300 or the upper winning opening door member 2550 of the center role 2500 opens and closes in an opening and closing pattern according to the special lottery result. A game ball can be accepted into the winning opening 2005 or the upper winning opening 2006. When a game ball is received in the lower special winning opening 2005 or the upper special winning opening 2006 while the lower special winning opening 2005 or the upper special winning opening 2006 is in an open state, a predetermined number of payouts are performed from the payout device 830 by the main control board and the payout board. (Eg, 10 or 13) game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the lower winning a prize opening door member 2352 or the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 is opening and closing in a predetermined pattern, the lower prize winning opening 2005 or the upper prize winning opening 2006 accepts a game ball, thereby increasing the number of game balls. A game ball can be paid out and a player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the lower winning opening door member 2352 or the upper winning opening door member 2550 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern for closing in a state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the lower winning opening door member 2352 or the upper winning opening door member 2550 is opened, or When one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls into the special winning opening 2005 or the special winning opening 2006 is satisfied, the lower winning opening door member 2352 or the upper winning opening door member 2550 is satisfied. Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R big hit" is repeated for two rounds, and "15R big hit" is repeated for 15 rounds, thereby generating an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the case of "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed ("Time savings").

[Holding Memory Related to Accepting Game Balls in First Starting Port 2002 and Second Starting Port 2004]
In the present embodiment, a random number value is obtained to execute a special lottery by accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and until a variable display based on the obtained random number value is started. During the period, when a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, since the fluctuation cannot be started, the random number value is held until the previously executed fluctuation display is completed. . The upper limit of the number of the retained random numbers is four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if a game ball is accepted in the mouth 2004, it is discarded without obtaining a random value.

[Sending number specification command to peripheral control board]
As described above, the main control MPU changes the number of pending special first symbols based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, that is, the first starting port shown in FIG. When the value of the first special reserved number counter in step S43 of the passing process is incremented by one, and when one reserved memory of the first special symbol is consumed, that is, in the first special symbol normal process shown in FIG. When the value of the first special reservation number counter in step S103 is decremented by 1, in the storage process (step S20) of FIG. 155 (b), a command indicating the number of reservations of the first special symbol (first reservation number designation command) 0-4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board.

  In addition, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, that is, when 1 is added in step S53 of FIG. 158, and when the second special symbol is reserved. When one memory is digested, that is, in the second special symbol normal processing which is not shown and described because it is the same algorithm as the first special symbol normal processing, the value of the second special reserved number counter is decremented by one. In this case, in the storage process (step S20), a command (second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) indicating the reserved number of the second special symbol is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board.

[Reception of command on peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU controls the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like in the 16 mS regular processing (see FIG. 167) based on the command received from the main control board. Execute the process.

[Command analysis processing]
That is, the peripheral control MPU executes the processing of steps S601 to S606 shown as an example of the 16 mS regular processing in FIG. 168 every 16 mS. For example, in the command analysis processing of step S601, a command received from the main control board is analyzed.

[Direction control processing]
In addition, in the effect control processing of step S602, as an example, based on the analysis result of the command, as the processing of step S137, a lottery result (indicating any of the type of big hit, loss of reach, or loss (stop of the first special symbol) The determination result notification command transmitted in accordance with each lottery result so that the symbol pattern may be transmitted to the peripheral control board, and the variation pattern setting process (the first variation pattern setting process). In step S149, the control process relating to the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the second variation pattern setting process.

  The peripheral control MPU controls the display of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration patterns are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decoration pattern → the right decoration pattern → middle). The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols (note that the decorative symbols on the left, the middle, and the right may be synchronously displayed in the same symbol in a fluctuating manner and may be simultaneously stopped and displayed).

  Further, even when the reception of the first hold number designation commands 0 to 4 and the second hold number designation commands 0 to 4 is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601), the effect control process of step S602 On the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, a control process for displaying the first reserved number related to the first special symbol and the second reserved number related to the second special symbol is executed.

[Display of decorative pattern on central liquid crystal display device 1500]
Next, an example regarding a display mode in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 will be described. FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display of the number of reservations on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 according to the embodiment. Here, a description will be given of an example of the display mode of the hold storage in the course of the effect of one variation of the decorative symbol drawn on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when the player sitting directly opposite the gaming machine 1 is in progress. .

  The “1 fluctuation” means that the first special symbol display (not shown) of the function display unit 1400 shown in the front view of the game board 5 in FIG. The first special lottery result selected is changed from the start of the change as the first special symbol to the stop display, or the second special symbol display (not shown) of the function display unit 1400 is connected to the second start port 2004. The second special lottery result selected by accepting the game ball is changed to a second special symbol until the start and stop display, and the effect drawn on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is also the first special symbol or It is performed according to the time when the second special symbol is changed and displayed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this example, in the normal gaming state, that is, in the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the driving of the second starting port door member 2323 is not performed. I can't. Therefore, in the left-handed state, no winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs. However, only the variation display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display except when there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol, and the big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit) related to the first special symbol is executed. , 4R probable big hit, 16R probable big hit, 8R probable big hit). For this reason, the following mainly describes the case where there is a reserved storage of the first special symbol.

  The first special lottery result selected by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 is based on the command from the main control board, and the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board controls the effect, as shown in FIG. As shown in ()), at the top of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the decorative display 1600a is displayed on the left side, the decorative pattern 1600b is displayed on the center, and the decorative display 1600c is displayed on the right side, and a predetermined time has elapsed. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c is stopped, and the player can recognize the first special lottery result (winning result determination result).

  In FIG. 177 (A), as an example of a decorative pattern that is changing, the left decorative pattern 1600a and the right decorative pattern 1600c are stopped and displayed in the same pattern on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and only the middle decorative pattern 1600b is changed. An example is shown in which a reach state is generated by a decorative symbol by adopting a display mode. In FIG. 177 (A), as an example, the reach in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the symbol “7” and only the middle decorative symbol 1600b is changing is shown.

[Display of Hold Memory in Central Liquid Crystal Display Device 1500]
Also, as shown in FIG. 177 (A), a first reserved number display area 1510 (first starting port) related to the first special symbol is provided on the lower left side of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 which is visible to the player. 2002) is set, and a second reserved number display area 1580 (related to the second starting port 2004) related to the second special symbol is set on the lower right side of the display panel.

  In FIG. 177 (A), in the first reserved number display area 1510, two reserved images 1521 and 1522 indicating that the first special symbol is reserved corresponding to the reserved number of the lottery result are displayed. It is shown that the first hold number of the lottery result for the special symbol is “2”. In addition, in the second reserved number display area 1580, a reserved image indicating that the second special symbol is retained in accordance with the second reserved number of the lottery result is not displayed, and the second special symbol is randomly selected. It shows that there are no pending results.

  In addition, the display of the first hold number in the first hold number display area 1510 for the first special symbol is the first hold memory, the second hold memory, the third hold memory from the left toward the center, The reserved images 1521 to 1524 are displayed as in the fourth reserved storage. In addition, the display of the number of holdings in the second holding number display area 1580 of the second holding number for the second special symbol is the first holding memory, the second holding memory, and the third holding memory toward the right from the center. The hold image is displayed like the hold storage and the fourth hold storage.

  Further, in this example, the reserved images 1521 to 1524 indicating that the reserved images are stored can take a plurality of types of display modes. For example, there are a plurality of types of display modes, such as an aspect in which the image shape is the same and the display color is different, an aspect in which the image display color is the same and the shape is different, and an aspect in which both the image shape and the display color are different. obtain.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved images 1521 to 1524 indicating that the reserved first special symbols are stored are displayed in a circular shape, and the display colors of the reserved images 1521 to 1524 are changed to a plurality of colors. Shall do.

  In FIG. 177 (A), for the first special symbol, the first hold image and the second hold image 1521 and the hold image 1522 for the second hold image are displayed in a normal display mode of the hold image, for example, in a circular display color. It is displayed in "blue" (first reserved image) and is visible to the player.

  Next, in FIG. 177 (B), in response to the stop display command received from the main control board being specified in the command analysis processing of step S601 by the peripheral control MPU, the changing middle decoration symbol 1600b is changed to the symbol " 5), the left decorative symbol is displayed as “7”, the middle decorative symbol is displayed as “5”, and the right decorative symbol is stopped as “7”. Is notified to the player.

  Next, in FIG. 177 (C), the judgment result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board are specified by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing of step S601, and accordingly, the central liquid crystal is displayed. On the display panel of the display device 1500, it is shown that the symbols of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c have started to change. Hereinafter, this is referred to as digestion of the reserved memory.

  By the peripheral control MPU, the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board are specified in the command analysis processing of step S601, and accordingly, the left decorative symbol is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The symbols 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c start changing symbols.

  Then, thereafter, the reception of the first reserved number designation command “1” transmitted from the main control board is analyzed by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing (step S601). In addition, the first reserved memory is consumed for the first special symbol, the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved memory disappears, and as the second reserved memory for the first special symbol in FIG. 180 (A). The displayed hold image 1522 becomes a new first hold memory and is moved and displayed as a hold image 1521 (display color “blue” in a circular shape), and the first hold number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is displayed. It becomes "1".

[Pending Change Direction]
FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In FIG. 178 (A), the reception of the first pending number designation command “2” transmitted from the main control board during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c is analyzed by the command analysis process (step S601). After that, the reception of the first hold number designation command “3” transmitted from the main control board indicates that the command analysis processing (step S601) has analyzed.

  In response to this, on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in FIG. 178 (A), the second special holding symbol is newly added to the right side of the holding image 1521 displayed as the first holding symbol for the first special symbol. The stored image 1522 (display color “blue” in a circular shape) is displayed as a memory, and a third stored image is newly stored on the right side of the stored image 1522 displayed as the second stored image. The image 1523 (display color “blue” in a circular shape) is displayed, indicating that the first hold number of the lottery result for the first special symbol has become “3”.

  Next, in FIG. 178 (B), the command analysis processing (step S601) analyzes that the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board was received while the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c fluctuated. In response to this, for the first special symbol, a fourth holding memory is newly added to the right of the holding image 1523 displayed as the third holding memory, and the holding image 1524 (displayed in a circular shape) "Blue") is displayed, indicating that the first reserved number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is "4", and that the reserved storage number for the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. In the following description, the first reserved number display area 1510 is simply referred to as the reserved number display area 1510.

[Hold change effect using upper plate effect button 257 and hold image indicating hold memory]
In a conventional gaming machine in which a hold announcement effect is performed, the probability of a big hit is kept low and the probability of a reach is not so high in a normal gaming state. Therefore, the opportunity for the player to watch the pending announcement effect was low. In other words, it was said that the probability that the hold notice effect would be performed was low.

  Further, there is also a case where a hold notice is given on condition that an operation button is operated. Hereinafter, since the effect content changes when the player operates such an effect form, it is referred to as “participatory effect”. However, due to the low probability that the hold announcement effect is performed, some players are not fortunate to have the opportunity to operate the operation buttons provided for the effect effectively, reducing their interest in the game with frustration There was a risk of it.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below relates to an invention relating to a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in interest in a game by expanding opportunities to participate in a participatory effect.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU, which controls the production control, determines that the first hold number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, the upper limit may be “4” or a number smaller than that). For example, it may be “3” or “2”), and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the hold change effect. That is, in this example, whether or not to perform the hold change effect on condition that the reception of the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601). Such a lottery (called a lottery for a hold change effect) is performed.

  When it is determined that the hold change effect is to be performed in the lottery of the hold change effect, the operation of the player on the upper plate effect button 257 (FIGS. 22 and 31) is enabled, and the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed. Each time it is detected by the effect button press sensor 258 (FIG. 38), a hold change effect of changing the display color of the hold image indicating the hold storage is performed.

[Pending Change Direction Screen]
In addition, in the hold change effect of the present example, the display color of the hold image to be finally displayed (referred to as the final display color) is determined based on the timing of the winning start. FIG. 178 (C) shows an example of a hold change effect screen displayed on the display panel of central liquid crystal display device 1500 when it is determined that a hold change effect is to be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (C), the variable display is executed by reducing the left, middle, and right decorative patterns on the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In addition, the character “Hold color changes when button is pressed!” Is displayed at approximately the center of the display panel of central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the operation on upper plate effect button 257 (FIGS. 22 and 31) is performed. This indicates that the button is effective and that the player is urged to perform a button operation.

  Note that the effective period for which the operation of the above-mentioned upper plate effect button 257 (FIGS. 22 and 31) is effective can be arbitrarily set. Until the received next control command is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601).

  The control command may be, for example, one of a stop display command, a jackpot start command, a determination result notification command, a first hold number designation command, or a combination selected from a plurality of these control commands. Can be. In this example, in order to make the description easy to understand, it is assumed that the reception of the next stop display command transmitted from the main control board is analyzed until the command analysis processing (step S601).

  FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 performed after FIG. 178 (C). In FIG. 179 (A), as a result of the player performing an operation (first time) on the upper plate effect button 257 in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, a fourth hold is performed in FIG. 179 (C). This indicates that the display color of the reserved image 1524 (displayed in a circular shape and the display color “blue”) that has been stored and displayed in the normal display mode has changed to “green”.

  Although not explicitly shown in FIG. 178 (C) and FIG. 179, during the hold change effect, the display color of the hold image in the hold memory that is targeted by the button operation by the player changes each time. The final display color of the hold image in the hold memory is determined in advance when it is determined to perform the hold change effect. In the specific example shown in the drawing, it is assumed that the final display color of the hold image of the target hold storage is determined to be “red”. Then, the display color of the hold image of the target hold storage is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 with the final display color determined as a result.

  In addition, in FIG. 179 (A), the characters “The color of the hold changes when the button is pressed!” Are displayed substantially at the center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the upper plate effect button 257 is displayed. It is suggested that the operation to is effective, and that the player is urged to perform the button operation.

  Next, in FIG. 179 (B), as a result of the player performing an operation (second time) on the upper plate effect button 257 in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, in FIG. 179 (A), It is shown that the display color of the hold image 1524 displayed as the hold image 1524 (display color “green” in a circular shape) as the fourth hold memory has changed to “yellow”.

  Here, among the left, middle, and right decorative patterns that are reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the left decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the symbol “3”, The decorative pattern on the right keeps on the floating display.

  In addition, in FIG. 179 (B), the character “The color of the hold changes when the button is pressed!” Is displayed substantially at the center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the upper plate effect button 257 is displayed. It is suggested that the operation to is effective, and that the player is urged to perform the button operation.

  Next, in FIG. 179 (C), as a result of the player performing the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 (the third time) in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, in FIG. 179 (B), This shows that the display color of the reserved image 1524 displayed as the reserved image 1524 (display color “yellow” in a circular shape) as the fourth reserved storage has changed to “rainbow”.

  Here, among the left, middle, and right decorative patterns reduced and displayed at the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the pattern "3". Only the decorative symbols in the decorative symbols continue to fluctuate. The stop symbol “3” of the left and right decorative symbols indicates that the reach has occurred.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold change effect using the hold number display on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 performed after FIG. 179 (C). In FIG. 180 (A), in response to the stop display command received from the main control board being specified by the command analysis processing of step S601, the changing middle decoration symbol 1600b is changed to symbol "4" by the peripheral control MPU. , The reduced display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns in the upper right portion of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is eliminated, and the original position and size of the center of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are eliminated. Is displayed, and as a result, the left decorative symbol is stopped at “3”, the middle decorative symbol is stopped at “4”, and the right decorative symbol is stopped at “3”, and the variation stop result of the decorative symbol is “reach out”. Is notified to the player.

  In FIG. 180 (A), in response to the stop display command being identified in the command analysis processing of step S601, the display mode of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 changes the display mode to “hold color when the button is pressed. Changes! "Has disappeared, suggesting that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is no longer valid (the effective period for validating the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 has ended). Is shown.

  In this manner, the hold change effect is performed on condition that the number of holds specified by the control command (first hold number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4). It has become. For this reason, the opportunity for the hold change effect to be given is widely given to the player. Then, during execution of the hold change effect, each time an operation is performed on the operation input device (the upper plate effect button 257), the hold memory (4 in this example) to be displayed in the hold number display area 1510 is displayed. The display color of the hold image 1524 in the (second hold memory) changes. Therefore, during the hold change effect, the player is given a chance to operate the operation input device not only once but also a plurality of times. In addition, each time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the hold image in the hold memory changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity to participate in the reserved effect participation type effect is expanded, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

[Relation between digestion of hold memory and hold image]
FIGS. 180 (B) to 180 (C) show how the reserved storage is being consumed. First, FIG. 180 (B) shows that two reserved memories have been consumed after four reserved memories in FIG. 180 (A).

  By the peripheral control MPU, the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board are specified in the command analysis processing of step S601, and accordingly, the left decorative symbol is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The symbols 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c start changing symbols.

  Then, thereafter, the reception of the first reserved number designation command “3” transmitted from the main control board is analyzed by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing (step S601), and accordingly, The first reserved symbol is consumed for the first special symbol, the reserved image 1521 displayed as the first reserved symbol disappears, and the second to fourth reserved symbols are displayed for the first special symbol in FIG. 180 (A). The reserved images 1522 (display color “blue”), 1523 (display color “blue”), and 1524 display color “rainbow” that have been displayed as the reserved storage become the new first to third reserved storages and the reserved image. 1521 (display color “blue” in a circular shape), reserved image 1522 (display color “blue” in a circular shape), and reserved image 1523 (display color “rainbow” in a circular shape). The first pending the number of lottery result is "3".

  Next, in response to the stop display command received from the main control board being specified by the command analysis process of step S601, the peripheral decoration MPU changes the middle decorative symbol 1600b to the symbol "omitted, but missing symbol" by the peripheral control MPU. , And as a result, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in a combination of the missing symbols, and the player is notified that the variation stopping result of the decorative symbols is "losing". And

  Next, the peripheral control MPU identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing in step S601, and accordingly, the command is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The symbol change of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

  Then, thereafter, the reception of the first reserved number designation command “2” transmitted from the main control board is analyzed by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing (step S601), and accordingly, In addition, the first reserved memory is consumed for the first special symbol, the reserved image 1521 (display color “blue”) displayed as the first reserved symbol disappears, and the first special symbol is displayed in FIG. 180 (A). 1523 (display color “blue”) and 1524 (display color “rainbow”) that were displayed as the second and third hold storages become new first and second hold storages and hold images 1521 ( The display color “blue” in a circular shape) and the reserved image 1522 (display color “rainbow” in a circular shape) are moved and displayed, and the first reserved number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is “2”. FIG. 180 (B) shows the result of the above process.

  Thereafter, in response to the stop display command received from the main control board being specified by the command analysis processing in step S601 by the peripheral control MPU, the changing middle decoration symbol 1600b is changed to a symbol "omitted, but a missing symbol." , And as a result, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in a combination of the missing symbols, and the player is notified that the variation stop result of the decorative symbols is "losing". It shall be.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board in the command analysis processing in step S601, and accordingly, the command is displayed on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The symbol change of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b, and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

  Then, thereafter, the reception of the first reserved number designation command “1” transmitted from the main control board is analyzed by the peripheral control MPU in the command analysis processing (step S601). The first reserved symbol is consumed for the first special symbol, the reserved image 1521 (display color “blue”) displayed as the first reserved symbol disappears, and the first special symbol is displayed in FIG. 180 (B). 15223 (display color “rainbow”) that was displayed as the second hold storage for, becomes a new first hold storage in FIG. 180 (C) and becomes a hold image 1521 (display color “red” in a circular shape) And the first hold number of the lottery result for the first special symbol becomes “1”.

  As described above, in the present example, the display color of the hold image in the hold memory in the above example is changed to “rainbow” by the operation of the player on the upper plate effect button 257 during the hold change effect. The final display color of the hold image in the hold memory that is the target is determined in advance when it is determined to perform the hold change effect.

  The effect of the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 being developed is closely related to the reach fluctuation state and the jackpot notification state of the lottery symbol displayed on the display panel, and the interest and attention of the player. Very high degree.

  Therefore, even after the hold change effect has ended, in other words, even after the valid period of the upper plate effect button 257 has expired, the first hold number display area 1510 displays 1 The display color of the reserved image (the reserved image whose display color has been changed) whose display position is to be sequentially moved toward the second reserved storage is kept unchanged. For this reason, in proceeding the game, consideration is given to the effect that the effect information provided from the display panel does not have a disadvantageous effect on the progress of the game, so that the interest of the game is not reduced.

  In the specific example shown in the drawing, when the reserved image of the target reserved storage is displayed as the first reserved storage in the reserved number display area 1510, it is changed to a predetermined final display color “red”. Then, the hold image of the hold storage which is the target is displayed. For this reason, the player who intends to change the color of the hold image by performing the operation is given a surprise and an unexpectedness such as "that ...? Why is it turned red?" Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  FIG. 181 is a time schematically showing the hold change effect of the present example, the change of the display color of the target hold image, and the display color of the hold image of which the display position changes as the hold storage is exhausted. It is a chart.

  As shown in FIG. 181, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display by the main control MPU and the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 are substantially equal to each other. I do. In addition, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the value of the first special reserved number counter of the main control MPU is updated to “4” due to the game ball winning in the first starting port 2002, and the main control The first pending number designation command “4” is output from the board.

  The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to perform the hold change effect on condition that the reception of the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601). As a result of performing the lottery of the hold change effect, it is determined that the hold change effect is to be performed by the lottery of the hold change effect, and in this example, the fourth hold memory is set as the hold memory of the effect target, and The operation on the dish effect button 257 (referred to as button operation) is enabled. In addition, as a fourth storage to be determined as a subject to be notified, a reserved image 1524 (display color “blue” in a circular shape) of a normal display color, which is described as “blue 4” in FIG. I have.

  In addition, in the hold change effect of the present example, the display color (referred to as a final display color) of the hold image to be finally displayed is determined based on the timing of the start winning prize. It is assumed that the final display color of the reserved image has been determined to be “red”.

  In FIG. 181, the display of the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory determined to be the production target, which is described as “green 4”, as a result of the first button operation performed by the player during the symbol change The color has changed to "green". Thereafter, as a result of the second button operation performed by the player, the display color of the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved storage determined as the production target and described as “yellow 4” is changed to “yellow”. Is changing. Further, after this, as a result of the third button operation performed by the player, the display color of the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved storage determined as the production target and described as “rainbow 4” is “rainbow” Has changed.

  After that, the stop display command is output from the main control board based on the stop of the change of the first special symbol. The peripheral control MPU stops the change of the decorative design on the display panel of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in response to the stop display command being specified in the command analysis processing of step S601. At the same time, the fact that the button operation is no longer valid (the valid period for validating the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 has ended) is shown.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU displays the decoration symbols in a variable manner as the reserved number of the first special symbols is consumed. In FIG. 181, each variation of the first special symbol and the decoration symbol of the first special symbol indicator is displayed. The display is performed three times. Along with the completion of the first hold storage, a first hold number designation command 3 (hereinafter simply referred to as a hold number designation command 3) is output, and the display position of the hold image is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 in response to this. Is performed, and the reserved image 1524 as the fourth reserved memory determined as the production target is shifted to the reserved image as the third reserved memory described as “rainbow 3” without changing the display color. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, the first hold number designation command 2 (hereinafter, simply referred to as a hold number designation command 2) is output as the second hold storage is exhausted, and accordingly, the hold image is displayed in the hold number display area 1510. Is shifted, and the hold image 1524 as the third hold memory determined as the production target is changed to the hold image as the second hold memory described as “rainbow 2” without changing the display color. Is displayed shifted.

  Further, with the completion of the third hold storage, a first hold number designation command 1 (hereinafter, simply referred to as a hold number designation command 1) is output, and accordingly, a hold image of the hold image is displayed in the hold number display area 1510. The display position is shifted, and the reserved image 1524 as the third reserved memory determined as the production target is changed as the first reserved memory in which the determined final display color is changed and described as “red 1”. Is shifted to the reserved image and displayed.

[Processes related to reservation storage notice by peripheral control MPU]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing each process executed by the peripheral control MPU in connection with the suspension storage as each process of the effect control process of step S602 in FIG. 168. In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU sequentially executes the number-of-holds designation command process (step A100), the process for determining a change in hold (step A200), the process for holding a change effect (step A300), and the process for shifting the hold image (step A400). I do. Substantive execution conditions in each process are as described below.

  If it is determined that the command analyzed in the command analysis in step S601 in the 16 ms regular processing shown in FIG. 168 is the first reserved number designation command (hereinafter simply referred to as the reserved number designation command), In the effect control process of S602, a suspended number designation command process of step A100 is executed.

  When it is determined in the holding number designation command processing in step A100 that the number of holding memories has reached a predetermined number (for example, “4” in this example) as the execution condition of the holding change effect for changing the holding image. , The hold change effect determination process in step A200 is substantially executed.

  The hold change effect determination process of step A200 is substantially executed, and when it is determined that the hold change effect is to be performed, the hold change effect process of step A300 is substantially executed. In step A100, when it is determined that the display position of the reserved image needs to be shifted by detecting that the reserved number has decreased by one, the reserved image shift process is substantially executed.

[Hold number specification command processing]
The hold number designation command processing is executed when it is determined that the command analyzed in the command analysis in step S601 is the hold number designation command. It is transmitted from the main control board. The hold number designation command is a control command output when the number of holds (the number of storages) managed in the main control board changes, and is a command for designating the number of holds.
A hold number specification command “0” that specifies the hold number “0 (none)”,
Hold number specification command "1" for specifying the hold number "1",
Hold number specification command "2" for specifying the hold number "2",
A hold number specification command “3” for specifying the hold number “3”,
A hold number specification command “4” for specifying the hold number “4” (upper limit),
There are five types.

  FIG. 183 to FIG. 184 are flowcharts showing a subroutine of the pending number designation command processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. When the peripheral control MPU starts the suspended number designation command processing, first, the suspended number designated by the suspended number designation command analyzed by the command analysis in step S601 is “0” (hereinafter simply referred to as the designated suspended number). ) Is determined (step A110).

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A110 that the designated hold number is “0”, the peripheral control MPU sets a value 0 to a first hold number counter for storing the hold number (step A111). ), The first to fourth of the reserved image storage area set in the built-in RAM (not shown) are cleared (step A112), and the flow returns to the effect control processing routine through the subroutine of the reserved number designation command processing.

  FIG. 188 is a diagram showing tables, storage areas, and processing operations necessary for the peripheral control MPU to execute each process related to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 188 (D), the built-in RAM is provided with a first reserved image storage area to a fourth reserved image storage area corresponding to values 1 to 4 in the first reserved number counter, respectively. .

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in Step A110 that the designated number of reservations is not “0”, the process proceeds to Step A113, and determines whether the designated number of reservations is “4” ( It is determined whether or not a predetermined number has been reached (step A113). In this example, it is determined that the holding change effect using the holding image is performed on condition that the value of the holding number reaches a predetermined number. The predetermined number is described as, for example, “4” in this example, but is not limited to this. The predetermined number may be a smaller number, for example, “3” or “2”.

  If the peripheral control MPU determines in step A113 that the designated hold number is “4”, the peripheral control MPU sets a value 4 to a first hold number counter for storing the hold number (step A114). ), A reserved image (circular shape) is set at the fourth position in the reserved image storage area (step A115), and the display color of the reserved image is set to normal ("blue" in this example) (step A116). The execution flag of the change effect determination process is set (step A117), and the process exits the subroutine of the number-of-reservations designation command process and returns to the routine of the effect control process.

  If, on the other hand, the peripheral control MPU determines in step A113 that the designated hold number is not “4”, the processing proceeds to step A113. In this case, the designated hold number is one of “1”, “2”, and “3”. In step A114, the peripheral control MPU compares the designated hold number with the value of the first hold number counter (step A120).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the comparison is “+1” increase (step A121). When it is determined that the comparison result is “+1” increase, for example, when the designated hold number is “3” and the value of the first hold number counter is 2, The value of the first reserved number counter is incremented by one (step A122), and the reserved image (circular shape) is set in the reserved image storage area (see FIG. 188 (D)) corresponding to the value of the first reserved number counter (step A123). ), The display color of the hold image is set to normal (“blue” in this example) (step A124), and the process exits the subroutine of the hold number designation command process and returns to the routine of the effect control process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A121 that the comparison result is not “+1” increase, for example, when the designated hold number is “3” and the value of the first hold number counter is 4, or For example, the comparison result is "-1" when the designated hold number is "2" and the value of the first hold number counter is 3, for example.

  The peripheral control MPU determines NO in Step A121, decrements the value by 1 in a first reserved number counter for storing the reserved number (Step A126), and sets a value in a shift flag for executing a reserved image shift process described later. 1 (execute) is set (step A127), and the process returns to the effect control process routine via the subroutine of the number-of-holds designation command process.

[Hold change effect decision process]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of a hold change effect determination process executed by the peripheral control MPU. When starting the suspension change effect determination processing, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not the execution flag is set (Step A130). The execution flag is set in step A117 of the reserved number designation command processing described above.

  In step A130, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if it determines NO in step A130, the peripheral control MPU performs the subroutine of the hold change effect determination processing without performing any substantial processing. The process returns to the effect control processing routine.

  In step A130, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is set, that is, if it determines YES in step A130, the peripheral control MPU acquires a hold change effect random number (for example, 0 to 99) (step S130). A131), with reference to the acquired value of the random number for hold change effect and the hold change effect determination table (step A132), it is determined whether or not a hold change effect is to be performed (step A133).

  FIG. 188 (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution rate of the hold change effect determination table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188 (A), in this example, it is determined that the hold change effect is to be performed at a distribution rate of 70%. For the remaining distribution rate of 30%, another effect (an effect other than the hold change effect) is performed.

  In step A133, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the hold change effect is not to be performed, that is, if step A133 is NO, the process proceeds to step A140, and clears the execution flag of the hold change effect determination process (step A133). A140), the process exits the subroutine of the hold change effect determination process and returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, a substantial hold change effect process described later is not executed.

  In step A133, if the peripheral control MPU determines to perform the hold change effect, that is, if it determines YES in step A133, the process proceeds to step A134, and sets the execution flag of the hold change effect process (step A134). . Thus, the execution of the hold change effect process is determined.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU obtains the final display color random number (for example, 0 to 6) (Step A135), and refers to the obtained final display color determination random number and the final display color determination table to determine the final display color. Is determined (step A136), and the determined reserved image of the final display color is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step A137).

  FIG. 188 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a final display color determination table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188 (B), if the value of the obtained final display color determination random number is “0”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “blue”, and if “1”, the reserved image is determined. Is determined to be “yellow”, if “2”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “green”, and if “3”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “orange”. If "4", the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be "purple"; if "5", the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be "red"; Is determined to be “rainbow”.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU sets “1 (stored)” in a storage flag indicating that the final display color has been stored (step A138), and indicates the order of the held image to be subjected to the hold change effect. The value of the display location counter is set to the number representing the display location, in this example, "4" (step A139), the process proceeds to step A140, and the execution flag of the hold change effect determination processing is cleared (step A140). The process exits the subroutine of the determination process and returns to the routine of the effect control process. In this case, a hold change effect process is executed.

[Hold change effect processing]
FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the hold change effect process executed by the peripheral control MPU. When starting the suspension change effect process, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not the execution flag is set (Step A150). The execution flag is set in step A134 of the hold change effect determination process described above.

  In step A150, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if it determines NO in step A150, the peripheral control MPU exits the subroutine of the hold change effect processing without performing any substantial processing. To return to the effect control processing routine. In this case, the hold change effect is not substantially performed.

  In step A150, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution flag is set, that is, if it determines that step A150 is YES, whether there is a button operation (whether or not the upper plate effect button 257 has been pressed) Is determined (step A151). That is, the state in which the execution flag is set is a state in which the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 by the player is valid.

  In step A151, when the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a button operation, that is, when it determines YES in step A151, the peripheral control MPU acquires an operation random number (for example, 0 to 6) (step A152). With reference to the value of the operation random number and the operation-time display color selection table (step A153), the display color is determined (step A154), and the reserved image of the determined display color is stored in the fourth reserved state shown in FIG. 188 (D). The image is stored in the image storage area (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A156.

  FIG. 188 (C) is a diagram showing an example of an operation display color selection table stored in a ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 188 (C), if the value of the obtained operation random number is “0”, the display color of the reserved image is determined to be “rainbow”, and if “1”, the display color of the reserved image is It is determined to be “yellow”, if “2”, the display color of the reserved image is determined to be “green”, if “3”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “orange”, and If it is, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “purple”, if “5”, the final display color of the reserved image is determined to be “green”, and if “6”, the final display color of the reserved image is “ Rainbow ".

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that there is no button operation, that is, if step A151 is determined to be NO, the peripheral control MPU proceeds directly to step A156 without performing the processing of step A152 to step A155. move on.

  In step A156, the peripheral control MPU determines whether a stop display command has been received (step A156). That is, when it is determined that the command analyzed in the command analysis of step S601 is the stop display command, the peripheral control MPU determines that the stop display command has been received.

  In step A156, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the stop display command has been received, that is, when it determines YES in step A156, the peripheral control MPU clears the execution flag of the hold change effect process (step A157). The process exits from the subroutine of the hold change effect process and returns to the routine of the effect control process. In this case, the subsequent hold change effect is not performed. In the present example, the state in which the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 by the player is made effective is completed.

  In step A156, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the stop display command has not been received, that is, if it determines NO in step A156, the subroutine of the hold change effect process is performed without performing the process of step A157. And returns to the routine of the effect control processing. In this case, since the execution flag is set, the subroutine of the hold change effect process is continuously executed. Therefore, each time a button operation is performed, steps A152 to A155 are executed. Therefore, the display color of the reserved image changes.

  In this manner, the hold change effect is performed on condition that the number of holds specified by the control command (first hold number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4). It has become. For this reason, the opportunity for the hold change effect to be given is widely given to the player. Then, during the execution of the hold change effect, every time an operation is performed on the operation input device (the upper plate effect button 257), the display color of the effect target hold image 1524 displayed in the number-of-holds display area 1510 is changed. Change. Therefore, during the hold change effect, the player is given a chance to operate the operation input device not only once but also a plurality of times. Moreover, each time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the held image to be rendered changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory effect by the hold change effect is expanded, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

[Hold image shift processing]
FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the suspended image shift processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. When starting the reserved image shift processing, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not the shift flag is set (Step A160). The shift flag is set in step A127 of the reserved number designation command processing described above.

  In step A160, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the shift flag is not set, that is, when it determines NO in step A160, the peripheral control MPU exits the subroutine of the reserved image shift processing without performing any substantial processing. To return to the effect control processing routine. In this case, the display position of the reserved image is not substantially shifted (moved one position to the left).

  In step A160, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the shift flag is set, that is, if it determines YES in step A160, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the second to fourth reserved image storage areas in FIG. The reserved images are respectively copied to copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown) (step A161), the first to fourth reserved image storage areas are cleared (step A162), and copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown). Are stored in the first to third reserved image storage areas (step A163). See FIG. 188 (E).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the storage flag is set (Step A164). The storage flag is set in step A138 of the hold change effect determination process described above.

  In step A164, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the storage flag is not set, that is, when determining in step A164 is NO, the reserved image shift processing is performed without performing the processing in steps A165 to A169. And returns to the effect control processing routine. In this case, only the shift of the display position of the reserved image (movement to the left by one) is substantially performed.

  On the other hand, in step A164, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the storage flag is set, that is, if it determines that step A164 is YES, it indicates that a hold change effect has been performed. The peripheral control MPU decrements the value of the display location counter by one (step A165), proceeds to step A166, and determines whether or not the value of the display location counter is "1 (position at which the reserved image is displayed in the final display color)". A determination is made (step A166). By the processing in step A165, the display position of the suspended image set as the production target is updated.

  In step A166, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the value of the display location counter is not “1”, that is, if it determines that step A166 is NO, it performs each processing of step A167 to step A169. Instead, the process exits the subroutine of the pending image shift process and returns to the routine of the effect control process. In this case, substantially, only the shift of the display position of the reserved image (movement to the left by one) is performed.

  On the other hand, in step A166, if the peripheral control MPU determines that the value of the display location counter is “1”, that is, if it determines that step A166 is YES, the peripheral control MPU performs the processing of steps A167 to A169. Do. That is, in the first reserved image storage area, the reserved image of the final display color determined and stored first is stored (step A167), the storage flag is cleared (step A168), and "0" is set in the display location counter. It is set (step A169), and the process exits the subroutine of the reserved image shift process and returns to the routine of the effect control process.

  Display of the reserved image on the display panel of central liquid crystal display device 1500 is performed by outputting image data in the information output process of step S605 in FIG. 168.

  As is clear from the above description, even if the player has never performed a button operation, the suspended image [the normal display color “blue”] targeted for the effect is the first. , The reserved image is displayed in the final display color determined and stored previously, and the display color changes.

  Therefore, even after the hold change effect has ended, in other words, even after the valid period of the upper plate effect button 257 has expired, the first hold number display area 1510 displays 1 The display color of the reserved image (the reserved image whose display color has been changed), which is an effect target for sequentially moving the display position toward the second reserved storage, is kept unchanged. For this reason, in proceeding the game, consideration is given to the effect that the effect information provided from the display panel does not have a disadvantageous effect on the progress of the game, so that the interest of the game is not reduced.

  In the specific example shown in the drawing, when the production target reserved image is displayed as the first reserved storage in the reserved number display area 1510, it is changed to a predetermined final display color, for example, “red”. The suspended image set as the production target is displayed. For this reason, the player who intends to change the color of the hold image by performing the operation is given a surprise and an unexpectedness such as "that ...? Why is it turned red?" Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  As described above, the embodiment relating to the hold change effect has been described. However, the hold image may be changed to a display color different from the normal display color, for example, “blue”, and the hold image may be displayed in the final display color at the final display position. How it is received by the player is entirely up to the imagination of the player.

  In the present embodiment, the condition for changing the display color of the reserved image is that the reserved number has reached a predetermined number. Therefore, there is no restriction as to whether or not the hold memory that has won the starting port is a big hit, whether or not a reach occurs.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the stop display command is received as the end of the effective period of the button operation, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a big hit start command, a determination result notification command, a first hold number designation command, , Or any of the following. For example, when a jackpot start command is received as the end of the effective period of the button operation, if the jackpot game is started, the button operation is enabled over a plurality of display variations of the decorative pattern until the jackpot game is started, and the hold image is displayed. The display color will change.

  Therefore, during the hold change effect, the opportunity for the player to operate the operation input device is provided not only for the variable display with one decorative symbol but also for the variable display with multiple decorative symbols. . Moreover, each time the operation input device is operated, the display color of the held image to be rendered changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory effect by the hold change effect is expanded, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

[Embodiment in Hold Announcement Effect Using Upper Plate Effect Button and Hold Image]
In the embodiment relating to the holding effect described so far, the peripheral control MPU controlling the effect control determines that the first holding number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, even if the upper limit is “4”). Or a smaller number, for example, "3" or "2"), the determination is made as to whether or not to perform the hold effect. In the holding effect of the above, the peripheral control MPU decides whether or not to perform the holding effect when the launched game ball wins and wins. This is a reservation notice effect in which the display color of the reserved image finally changed is determined a predetermined number of times and then the display color of the reserved image is changed a predetermined number of times.

  In the hold announcement effect of the present example, the time point at which the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 becomes valid to the time point at which it becomes invalid is appropriately set in advance, and while the operation is valid, the central liquid crystal display device 1500, various speakers, etc. By performing an effect (operation request effect) for requesting the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257 by using the notifying means, it is notified that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is effective, Then, when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in response to the operation request effect, a hold announcement effect of changing the display color of the hold image in accordance with the degree of expectation for the big hit is performed.

  In the following, an example of the hold announcement effect of the present example will be described. Note that the reserved image for which the reserved announcement effect is determined to be performed is hereinafter referred to as a “announced reserved image”. Also, in the hold announcement effect of this example, the display color of the hold image finally displayed (referred to as a final display color) is determined based on the timing of the start winning prize. It is assumed that the final display color is determined to be “red” having a high degree of expectation for the jackpot.

Further, in this embodiment, the display color of the hold display that is changed by the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257 indicates the expectation degree to the big hit to the player.
The display color of the notice suspension image in the present embodiment includes “blue”, “yellow”, “green”, “orange”, and “red”, and [the normal display color “blue”] is expected to be the biggest hit. The color with a low degree, [the final display color "red"] is set as the color with the highest expectation for the jackpot, and the colors "blue"<"yellow"<"green"<"orange"<"red" The order of expectation is higher in order.
The order in which the display colors of the reserved images are changed is that the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in response to the operation request effect while [normal display color “blue”] is displayed. The display color changes to any one of “yellow”, “green”, and “orange”, and then a specific occasion, for example, the hold display indicating that the hold announcement effect is being executed is the display position of the first hold image Is changed to "red", which is the final display color.
Hereinafter, the flow of the hold announcement effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 189 shows an example of the flow in the hold notice effect, and FIG. 189 (A) shows a state in which the notice of the hold notice effect is performed in the third hold image, and FIG. Shows a state in which the third reserved image is shifted to the second reserved position, (C) shows a state after the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed, and (D) shows 5 shows a state where the reserved image shifted to the second reserved position is further shifted to the first reserved position.

  As shown in (A), when it is determined by the peripheral control MPU that the holding notice effect is to be performed for the holding image displayed at the third holding position, the change of the currently performed symbol is completed by the end. In addition, a message image of “Pay attention to the third hold!” Is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and an arrow and a “Colle” are displayed near the hold image (advance notice hold image) displayed at the third hold position. Is displayed, and the player is notified and recognized that the hold announcement effect will be performed.

  Next, as shown in (B), the change of the reserved image displayed at the first reserved position in (A) is started, and when the notice reserved image is shifted to the second reserved position, the central image is changed. On the liquid crystal display device 1500, an image that prompts the user to operate the upper stage effect button 257 such as “Pressing a button changes the color of the hold ?!” (operation request effect). As a result, the player recognizes that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is effective, and further reminds the user that pressing the upper plate effect button 257 may cause something to happen. It has a configuration that can be used.

  Then, in response to the operation request effect, by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the display color of the notice suspension image changes from "blue" to "green" as shown in (C-1). This allows the player to change the display color of the notice suspension image by his / her own operation, reminding the player that the degree of expectation for the jackpot has been increased, and to enhance the interest in the game. It should be noted that the color from the “blue” reserved image to the reserved image of the color after pressing the upper plate effect button 257 is determined by the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, in (B), the change mode of the notice-holding image when the player does not perform an operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is, as shown in (C-2), more than when the operation is detected. The display color changes to “yellow” with a low degree of expectation for the jackpot. As a result, as compared with the case where the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, although the expected value related to the jackpot is displayed as being lower, the display color is changed to a display color having a higher expected value than the normal display color “blue”. Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the jackpot. In addition, the player who has noticed that the display color when the expectation for the jackpot changes to be higher when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed has a merit for operating the upper plate effect button 257. Because of the feeling, it is possible to actively participate in the production, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Next, as shown in (D), when the notice suspension image is displayed as the first suspension memory, the final display color is changed to a predetermined final display color, in this example, "red" and displayed. . The player who has operated the upper plate effect button 257 changes the display color of the notice suspension image to “green”, which has a higher degree of expectation than “blue”, and further holds “red”, which is considered to have the highest degree of expectation. By seeing the display color change in the image, it is possible to feel a further sense of expectation and enhance the interest in the game. In addition, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is operated and overflows, the display color of “yellow”, which has a low degree of expectation for the jackpot, is changed to a “red” reserved image, which is considered to have the highest degree of expectation. Because there is a follow-up that the display color changes, it can be wiped out even if the sense of expectation drops because the display color has been pushed down and the expectation is low, suppressing the decrease in interest in games can do.

  Also, in the description of the above-mentioned reservation notice effect, the operation request effect is performed when the notice reservation image is shifted from the third reservation position to the second reservation position, and the display color of the notice reservation image is changed only once. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an operation request effect may be performed each time the reserved position of the preliminary reservation image shifts, and the display color of the preliminary reservation image may be changed. For example, when the reserved image at the fourth reserved position is set as the preliminary reserved image, the operation request effect is performed in response to the shift to the third reserved position, and the advance plate producing button 257 is pressed. The display color of the suspended image changes from “blue” to “yellow”. Next, triggered by the shift of the notice holding image to the second holding position, an operation request effect is performed, and the display color of the notice holding image is changed from “yellow” to “green” by pressing the upper stage effect button 257. Change. Then, when the notice suspension image is shifted to the first suspension position, the final display color changes to “red”.

  According to the above-described example, each time the display position of the designated notice suspension image is shifted, the suspension notice effect is performed, so that the display color of the suspension image is changed a plurality of times for one notice suspension image. It is possible to do. In addition, every time the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed by the operation of the player, the display color of the notice suspension image becomes a display with a high degree of expectation for the jackpot, and therefore, by participating in the suspension notice effect, the player gradually approaches the jackpot. Since the player can be made to think that the game is going to go, the player actively participates in the reservation notice effect, and it is possible to hope that the interest in the game is improved.

[Second Example in Hold Announcement Effect Using Upper Plate Effect Button and Hold Image]
In addition, the opportunity for the suspension notice effect to be performed is not based on the case where the display position of the notice suspension image is shifted, but by the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern output from the main control board to the peripheral control board, It may be determined whether or not to perform the hold notice effect on the notice hold image.

  For example, when the hold before the notice holding image becomes the change, when the change time is short (for example, less than 10 seconds), when the hold notice effect is performed, after the operation request effect is performed, the player Even if the user attempts to press the upper plate effect button 257, the change display of the change ends immediately, so that the player cannot press the upper plate effect button 257 in time and thinks that the player has missed a chance. There is a possibility that interest in the game may be reduced. In addition, since the user wants to press the upper plate effect button 257 within the time, the user may be distracted only by the hold notice effect, and may not fully enjoy the change display of the change. When the change time of the hold that changes when the display position of the hold image is shifted is longer than a predetermined change time (10 seconds or more in this example), a hold announcement effect is performed.

  After the operation request effect is performed by performing the hold notice effect when the fluctuation time of the hold before the notice hold image is 10 seconds or more as in the above configuration, the player presses the upper plate effect button 257. Since it is possible to secure enough time to press the button, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the possibility of failing to press the upper plate effect button 257 in a short time. Can be prevented.

[Third Example in Hold Announcement Effect Using Upper Plate Effect Button and Hold Image]
Further, it may be determined whether or not to carry out the hold notice effect on the notice hold image based on the fluctuation pattern output from the main control board to the peripheral control board.

In the present embodiment, when the change mode of the hold performed when the display position of the notice hold image shifts is a change accompanied by reach, the hold notice effect is performed.
If the fluctuation is a fluctuation display accompanied by a reach, the player recalls the thought that a jackpot may arrive, and the expectation for the jackpot related to the fluctuation increases. In this state, by further performing a hold notice effect on the notice hold image, it is possible to add a sense of expectation to the jackpot, thereby increasing interest in the game. In addition, even if the result of the change is out of order, the notice suspension image continues, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the final display color of the notice suspension image is determined to be “red” having a high degree of expectation for the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A color that changes when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, such as “green” or “orange”, may be used as the final color.

  Furthermore, when a hold notice effect is performed a plurality of times for one notice hold image, for example, when the display color of “green” is currently displayed as the notice hold image, the display color changes from “green” to “yellow”. Not to be. Since the display color is not changed to a display color having a lower degree of expectation than the currently displayed display color, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game related to the change in the display color.

  Further, a display color having a higher degree of expectation than the final display color of the notice suspension image is not displayed as a display color caused by pressing the upper plate effect button 257. For example, when the final display color of the notice suspension image is set to “green”, when the upper stage effect button 257 is pressed in the suspension notice effect, “orange” or “red” having higher expectations than “green” is displayed. Display color is not displayed. Thereby, when the notice suspended image becomes the final display color, the display color having the expected degree higher than the currently displayed notice suspended image is displayed as the final display color, so that the interest in the game can be improved. .

  Further, the peripheral control MPU determines the display color of the notice suspension image related to the suspension notice effect. The display color changes from the standard display color `` blue '' to what color display color, and finally what color display color is displayed is determined as a scenario. This is determined by the peripheral control MPU as one scenario pattern.

FIG. 190A is a scenario pattern table showing a pattern in which the display color of the notice suspension image changes.
The random number for scenario determination in this example is set so as to determine which of the patterns related to the pending announcement effect is to be executed. In this example, the scenario patterns 1 to 4 are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a scenario pattern may be appropriately prepared and provided.

  When the pattern 1 is selected by the peripheral control MPU, a hold notice effect is performed when the display position of the notice hold image shifts. The number of times of the hold announcement effect caused by pressing the upper plate effect button 257 is one, and when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed by the player, the display color changes to “green” and is not pressed. The display color changes to "yellow". Then, when the notice suspension image is shifted to the first suspension position, the final display color changes to “red”.

  When the pattern 2 is selected by the peripheral control MPU, a hold notice effect is performed when the display position of the notice hold image shifts. The number of times of the hold announcement effect caused by pressing the upper stage effect button 257 is two, and when the upper stage effect button 257 is pressed by the player in the first hold advance effect, the display color is “green”. , And if not pressed, the display color changes to “yellow”. Next, in the second hold notice effect, the display color changes to "orange" when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257, and changes to "green" otherwise. Then, when the notice suspension image is shifted to the first suspension position, the final display color changes to “red”.

  When the pattern 3 is selected by the peripheral control MPU, a hold announcement effect is performed when the display position of the notice suspension image is shifted. The number of times of the hold announcement effect caused by pressing the upper stage effect button 257 is two times, and when the upper stage effect button 257 is pressed by the player in the first hold advance effect, the display color is “yellow”. , And when the button is not pressed, the display color does not change and is displayed as “blue”. Next, in the second hold notice effect, the display color changes to "green" when the player has pressed the upper plate effect button 257, and otherwise the display color does not change and remains "blue". Is displayed. Then, when the notice suspension image is shifted to the first suspension position, the final display color changes to “orange”.

  When the pattern 4 is selected by the peripheral control MPU, when the change mode of the hold performed when the display position of the notice hold image is shifted is the change accompanied by the reach, the hold notice effect is performed. The number of times of the hold announcement effect caused by pressing the upper plate effect button 257 is one, and when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed by the player, the display color changes to “green” and is not pressed. The display color changes to "yellow". Then, when the notice suspension image is shifted to the first suspension position, the final display color changes to “red”.

  The example of the scenario pattern selected by the peripheral control MPU has been described above. Further, in the peripheral control board, a random number for determining a scenario pattern in a preliminary notification image, a random number for determining a scenario pattern, and a scenario pattern table are prepared in advance as means for determining a scenario pattern in the preliminary notification effect. Based on the scenario pattern table, a scenario related to any of the pending announcement effects is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (b), for example, 100 kinds of variable random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 99) indicating that one of the scenario patterns is executed, and 25 kinds of variable random numbers out of the variable random numbers are set. , Is set as a determination value indicating that the hold announcement effect of pattern 1 is to be executed (0 to 24), and 20 types of variable random numbers are set as determination values indicating that pattern 2 is to be executed (25 to 44). Forty kinds of variable random numbers are set as determination values indicating that pattern 3 is executed (45 to 89). Ten kinds of variable random numbers are set as determination values indicating that pattern 4 is executed (90 to 99).

According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the change mode of the display color of the notice suspension image differs depending on the scenario pattern related to the suspension notice effect determined by the peripheral control MPU, and even if the same scenario pattern is used. By changing the manner in which the display color of the notice suspension image is changed depending on whether or not the upper plate production button 257 is operated, it is possible to provide the player with various variations of the reserve preliminary production effect. According to the variation of the display color of the notice suspension image, it is possible to make the player feel delighted and improve the interest in the game. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is determined by the peripheral control MPU. The change mode related to the display color of the notice suspension image differs depending on the scenario pattern related to the suspension notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various types of pending announcement effects, and to make the player feel excited by the variation of the display color of the announcement pending image.

  In the above-described hold notice effect, the display color of the notice hold image changes depending on whether or not the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. In addition, for example, the change also occurs before the notice hold image. When the held image to be performed is variably displayed, if the variability is a variability accompanied by a reach, the display color of the notice pendant image is changed without triggering the operation of the player effect button 257 by the player. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the reserved color of the preliminary reserved image is changed without any advance notice without giving any preliminary notice to the player.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the change mode of the display color of the notice suspension image differs depending on the scenario pattern related to the suspension notice effect determined by the peripheral control MPU, and even if the same scenario pattern is used. By changing the manner in which the display color of the notice hold image is changed depending on whether or not the upper plate effect button 257 is operated, various kinds of hold notice effects can be provided to the player. In this manner, the player can be delighted with the change of the display color of the notice suspension image, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Change timing of notice suspension image in suspension announcement effect]
In the present embodiment, a plurality of change timings related to the hold color of the notice hold image that change after the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed in the hold notice effect are provided.

  The timing pattern in which the display color of the notice suspension image in the suspension notice effect changes (hereinafter referred to as a change timing pattern) includes an immediate change pattern, a change pattern after one second, and a change pattern after two seconds, which will be described later. FIG. 200 is a time chart in a case where the immediate change pattern is selected from the change timing patterns of the notice suspension image in the suspension notice effect. FIG. 200 shows one second to be described later among the change timing patterns of the notice suspension image in the hold notice effect. FIG. 201 is a time chart when the after-change pattern is selected, and FIG. 201 is a time chart when the change pattern after 2 seconds is selected from the change timing patterns of the notice-hold image in the hold notice effect. FIG. 202 is a change timing table showing a change timing pattern of the notice suspension image.

  The time chart of FIG. 199 shows the respective timings of (A) the operation valid period, (B) the operation request effect, (C) the detection of the upper plate effect button operation, and (D) the immediate change pattern. 201 shows the respective timings of (A) the operation valid period, (B) the operation request effect, (C) the detection of the upper plate effect button operation, and (E) the change pattern after one second. The timing chart of (A) shows the operation validity period, (B) the operation request effect, (C) the detection of the upper plate effect button operation, and (F) the timing of the change pattern after 2 seconds.

  When the hold announcement effect is performed, as shown in (A), the time point at which the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 becomes effective and the time point at which the operation is invalidated are appropriately set in advance, and during that time, as shown in (B). Then, using a notifying means such as the central liquid crystal display device 1500 or various speakers, an effect (operation request effect) for requesting the player to perform an operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed. Is notified that the operation for is effective. Then, in response to the operation request effect, as shown in (C), when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257, the display color of the notice suspension image changes. After the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, the operation validity period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) end, and the display color of the notice suspension image changes. An immediate change pattern in which the display color of the notice suspension image changes immediately by pressing the upper stage effect button 257 as shown in (D), and 1 by pressing the upper stage effect button 257 as shown in (E). A change pattern after 1 second in which the display color of the notice suspension image changes after 2 seconds, a change in 2 seconds after the display color of the notice suspension image changes 2 seconds after pressing the upper stage effect button 257 as shown in FIG. There are patterns etc.

  When the immediate change pattern is selected, as shown in FIG. 199, when the operation effective period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the upper plate effect button 257 is set by the player. When the pressing operation is performed, the operation validity period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and then the display color of the notice suspension image changes.

  When the change pattern after one second is selected, as shown in FIG. 200, when the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the upper plate is set by the player. When the effect button 257 is pressed down, the operation validity period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and a notice hold image is displayed one second after the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 is detected. The color changes.

When the change pattern after 2 seconds is selected, as shown in FIG. 201, when the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the upper plate is set by the player. When the effect button 257 is pressed, the operation validity period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and a notice suspension image is displayed two seconds after the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 is detected. The color changes.
Thus, the timing at which the display color of the notice suspended image changes after the upper stage effect button 257 is pressed differs depending on which change pattern is selected, and the display color of the notice suspended image changes at what timing. The feeling of throbbing obtained by not knowing whether to do so increases, and it becomes possible to entertain various variations in the suspension notice effect.

  Further, in the hold announcement effect, even though the player has requested the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 in the operation request effect, the operable period in which the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is accepted ends. If the immediate change pattern has been selected, the display color of the notice suspension image changes immediately after the operation validity period ends, and if the change pattern has been selected one second later, The display color of the notice suspended image changes one second after the operation valid period ends, and if the change pattern is selected two seconds later, the display color of the notice suspended image changes two seconds after the operation valid period ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the notice suspension image may be changed at an appropriate timing after the operable period ends. Thereby, for example, even when the operation request effect is overlooked and the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 cannot be performed, the display color of the notice suspension image changes, and the display color of the notice suspension image has a low degree of expectation. It is possible to prevent the display color from being displayed as it is and to remind the user that the player has lost the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the peripheral control board, as a means for determining the timing at which the display color of the notice suspension image changes in the suspension notice effect, a change timing determination random number for determining the timing at which the display color of the notice suspension image changes, , A change timing table is prepared in advance, and the change timing pattern of the display color of the notice suspension image is determined based on the change timing determination random number and the change timing table. In addition, the reserved announcement effect determined by the peripheral control MPU in response to the game ball entering the starting port, and the display color of the announcement suspended image changes by operating the upper plate effect button 257 by the operation of the player. When the effect is determined, the change timing of the notice suspension image is determined from the change timing determining random number extracted by the change timing determining random number extracting means and the change timing table after the effect is determined. .

  Next, the change timing determination random numbers will be described with reference to FIG. The random number for change timing determination in this example is set so as to determine which of the notice-holding image display color change timing patterns is to be executed. For example, 100 kinds of variable random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 99) indicating that any of the change timing patterns of the notice suspension image are executed, and 50 kinds of variable random numbers out of the variable random numbers are produced in the plate production. After the pressing operation on the button 257, the determination value is set to indicate that the immediate change pattern in which the display color of the notice suspension image is changed at an immediate timing is executed (0 to 49), and 30 kinds of variable random numbers are displayed on the upper plate effect button. After the pressing operation on 257, a determination value indicating that the change pattern of the display color of the notice suspension image is changed one second later at a timing one second later is set as a determination value (50 to 79). A determination indicating that a change pattern after 2 seconds in which the display color of the notice suspension image is changed at a timing 2 seconds after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed. It is set as (80-99).

  In addition, as an opportunity to determine the timing at which the display color of the notice-holding image changes after a press operation on the upper stage effect button 257 in the hold notice effect, the display position of the notice-holding image is, for example, the fourth hold. When shifting from the position to the third holding position, a change timing determining random number may be extracted by the change timing determining random number extracting means to determine the timing at which the display color of the notice holding image changes, When the change mode of the hold that is changed when the display position of the notice hold image is shifted is a change accompanied by a reach, the change timing determination random number extracting means is triggered by the change accompanied by the reach being performed. A change timing determining random number may be extracted to determine the timing at which the display color of the notice suspended image changes, and various triggers may be used. It can be selected.

  Also, during the game, the change timing pattern of the display color of the notice suspension image in the last suspension notice effect performed immediately is the immediate change pattern, and the change timing pattern of the next lottery notice suspension image is also the immediate change pattern. In this case, the player cannot notice that a plurality of types of change timing patterns of the notice-holding image are prepared, and the change pattern of the notice-holding image after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed is immediately changed. In this example, a timing pattern different from the last change pattern of the notice suspension image is selected so that it may be assumed that the pattern is only the pattern and the interest in the game may be reduced. Has become.

  Further, for example, when the immediate change pattern is selected as the change timing pattern of the last notice suspension image, the change timing pattern selected next is either the change pattern after 1 second or the change pattern after 2 seconds. Is selected, and if the change pattern after one second has been selected, the change timing pattern to be selected next is either the immediate change pattern or the change pattern after two seconds. When the change pattern after 2 seconds is selected, the change timing pattern to be selected next is such that the immediate change pattern or the change pattern after 1 second is selected. As a result, since a change timing pattern different from the change timing pattern selected last is selected, it is possible to prevent the same change timing pattern from being continuously selected, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Next, the flow of the hold announcement effect in this example will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 203 shows an example of the flow of the hold announcement effect, and this example shows a series of the hold announcement effect comparing the case where the change effect is selected after one second and the case where the immediate change effect is selected. It is a figure showing the flow of. (A) shows a state in which it is informed that a hold announcement effect is to be performed in the third hold image, and (B) shows a notice hold image by operating the third upper plate effect button 257. This suggests that the color changes, and indicates a state in which an operation request effect is being performed. (C-1) indicates that an operation on the upper plate effect button 257 has been performed when the immediate change pattern is selected. (C-2) shows the state immediately after the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed when the change pattern after one second is selected, and (D) shows the state immediately after the change pattern is selected. This shows the state one second after the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed in (C-2).

  As shown in (A), when it is determined by the peripheral control MPU that the hold announcement effect is to be performed on the hold image displayed at the third hold position, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays “third hold”. Attention! "Is displayed, and an image with an arrow and" Kore !! "is displayed near the reserved image (preliminary reserved image) displayed at the third reserved position. The player is notified that the preliminary announcement effect is to be performed and made to recognize it.

  Next, as shown in (B), an image of “Pressing button changes color of hold ?!” and an image imitating upper plate effect button 257 are displayed on central liquid crystal display device 1500, and upper plate effect button 257 is displayed. An image prompting an operation for 257 is displayed (operation request effect). As a result, the player recognizes that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is valid, and further, by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the display color of the notice suspension image changes, and it is possible to obtain something. It can remind you of the possibility of getting up.

  Then, for example, when the immediate change pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU, as shown in (C-1), immediately after the depression of the upper plate effect button 257 in response to the operation request effect, a notice is given. In this example, the display color of the reserved image is changed to “green” and displayed. Further, when the display pattern is selected by the peripheral control MPU after one second, even if the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed in response to the operation request effect as shown in FIG. Are displayed as “blue” without changing the display color of

  Subsequent to (C-2), when one second elapses after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, the display is changed to "green" and displayed as shown in (D).

As described above, when the immediate change pattern is selected, the notice suspension image is changed immediately after the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed, and when the change pattern is selected one second later, the upper plate effect button 257 is selected. Immediately after performing the operation for, the display color of the notice suspended image does not change to “blue” and the notice suspended image changes after one second elapses. Is selected, the result of the change of the notice suspension image can be known immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257, and the change pattern after 1 second or the change pattern after 2 seconds is selected. If it does, the display color of the notice-holding image does not change once, but the display color of the notice-holding image changes with the time difference. Can be pounding excitement to the announcement attraction, it becomes possible to increase the interest in the game.
It should be noted that, after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, the color of the reserved image that changes from the “blue” reserved image is determined by the peripheral control MPU.

[Variation 1 of the preliminary announcement effect]
In the hold announcement effect in the present embodiment, the lottery ratio of the change timing pattern of the announcement hold image is changed according to the number of rounds when an advantageous game state (for example, a big hit) is drawn by the main control board. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 204 is a change timing table showing a change timing pattern of a notice suspension image for each number of rounds when a jackpot is selected by lot. (A) is a change timing table selected when a 15-round big hit is drawn, (b) is a change timing table selected when an 8-round big hit is drawn, (c) is 2 It is a change timing table selected when a round big hit is drawn.

  When the main control board draws a 15-round jackpot, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), 80 kinds of variable random numbers out of the variable random numbers are immediately suspended after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257 for the advance notice. It is set as a determination value indicating that the immediate change pattern in which the display color of the image is changed is executed (0 to 79), and ten kinds of variable random numbers are timing 1 second after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that the change pattern is to be executed one second after the display color change of the notice suspended image is performed (80 to 89), and ten kinds of variable random numbers are pressed after pressing the upper plate effect button 257. This is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern after 2 seconds in which the display color of the notice suspension image is changed at a timing after 2 seconds is executed (90 to 99).

  When an eight round big hit is drawn by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), ten kinds of variable random numbers out of the variable random numbers are immediately suspended after the pressing operation of the upper plate effect button 257 for the advance notice. It is set as a determination value (0-9) indicating that an immediate change pattern in which the display color of an image is changed is executed (0 to 9), and 80 kinds of variable random numbers are timing 1 second after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that the change pattern is to be executed one second after the display color change of the notice suspension image is performed (10 to 89), and ten kinds of variable random numbers are pressed after pressing the upper plate effect button 257. This is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern after 2 seconds in which the display color of the notice suspension image is changed at a timing after 2 seconds is executed (90 to 99).

  In the case where a two-round jackpot is drawn by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 204 (c), ten kinds of variable random numbers out of the variable random numbers are immediately suspended after a press operation on the upper plate effect button 257 at the immediate timing. The determination value is set as a determination value indicating that the immediate change pattern in which the display color of the image is changed is executed (0 to 9), and 10 kinds of variable random numbers are timing 1 second after pressing the upper plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern is to be executed one second after the display color change of the notice suspension image is performed (10 to 19), and after 80 kinds of variable random numbers are pressed on the upper plate effect button 257, This is set as a determination value indicating that a change pattern after 2 seconds in which the display color of the notice suspension image is changed at a timing after 2 seconds is executed (20 to 99).

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the number of rounds pertaining to the jackpot can be predicted to some extent by the notice pending image change timing pattern after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. For example, when the display color of the notice suspension image changes immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the player recalls that the 15th round big hit comes with a high probability, and also presses the upper plate effect button 257. If the display color of the notice suspension image changes two seconds later, the player recalls that a two-round big hit comes with a high probability. Thereby, the player can be delighted with the change timing pattern of the notice suspension image, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Other variations of notice production]
The notice effect described above is for changing the display color of the notice suspension image in response to the operation of the upper plate production button 257. Further, a plurality of timings at which the display color of the notice suspension image changes are prepared, and various variations are provided. Has been described as entertaining, but the preview effect in this example is not based on a reserved image, but is a currently performed variation (hereinafter referred to as the variation) in a state where there are a plurality of reservations. In the effect in ()), when an effect game for operating the upper plate effect button 257 is performed and the player performs an operation on the upper plate effect button 257, a change (notice target change) in which digestion is performed after the change is performed. That is, a notice fluctuation effect that can change the effect mode is performed. Hereinafter, a flow of a series of effects will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 205 shows a series of flows in the notice fluctuation effect in this example. (A) shows the state in which the fluctuation effect of the change digested before the notice target change is being performed, (B) shows the state in which the operation requesting effect is being performed, and (C-1) (C-2) shows the state after the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is not performed when the operation request effect is performed in (B), and (C-2) indicates the state when the operation request effect is performed in (B). (D-1) shows a state in which the fluctuation of the fluctuation has ended after (C-1), and (D-2) shows a state after the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed. ) Indicates a state in which the fluctuation of the fluctuation has ended after (C-2), and (E-1) indicates an effect mode of a notice fluctuation operation performed after (D-1). (E-2) shows a state where the notice variable effect has been started after (D-2), and (F) shows the state of (E-2). Shows the representation embodiment of the announcement variation effect that takes place.

For example, when the change held at the first holding position is a change to be notified, as shown in (A), when the change before the notice is performed, as shown in FIG. By performing an effect (operation request effect) for requesting an operation on the upper plate effect button 257, it is notified that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is valid. If the player does not press the upper stage effect button 257 in response to the operation request effect at that time, the process branches to (C-1). As shown in (C-1), since the player did not press the upper plate effect button 257 in (B), the process goes to (D-1) without performing any effect other than the variable display of symbols. . Next, as shown in (D-1), the fluctuation ends. As shown in the subsequent (E-1), the effect mode of the notice variable effect is the same effect mode as the previously performed variable effect mode.
Conversely, when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in (B), as shown in (C-2), an image imitating a ladybird appears on the central liquid crystal display device, and An effect of flying endlessly is performed, and the routine proceeds to (D-2). Next, as shown in (D-2), the fluctuation ends. Thereafter, as shown in (E-2), based on the start of the change of the notice target change, an image imitating the ladybird is displayed again, and then, as shown in (F), the mode of the notice change effect. However, unlike the fluctuation effect mode performed before, the display mode of the fluctuation symbol is changed and displayed. Thus, when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257, it is possible to remind the player that something good may happen, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the effect mode displayed in (F), which is different from the variable effect mode performed before the notice target change, the main control MPU determines whether or not the lottery result of the notice target change becomes the specific game state. After the determination is made in advance, the mode of the changing symbol is changed.

  For example, at the time of (B), the player operates the upper plate effect button 257, and at the next point (C-2), an effect using an image simulating a ladybird is performed, and then (D-2) If the lottery result of the change is out of the above, the player is discouraged, and has an expectation for the change to be notified next time the change is performed. Then, in (E-2), an effect using an image imitating a ladybird is performed again, and in (F), the mode of the notice variable effect is different from the previous mode (in this example, the appearance of the variable symbol is different). Therefore, the player may have missed the lottery result of the previously performed change, and the expectation for the change to be notified increases strongly. At this time, if the lottery result of the notice target change is out of order, for example, the player will be further discouraged, and the interest in the game which has increased expectations will be greatly reduced, so for example, the notice change When the lottery result of the effect is a big hit, by changing the mode of the notice change effect, the user is once discouraged at the time of (D-2), but is discouraged when he witnesses the result of the change of the notice target. The pleasure for the jackpot increases as much as it was, and the interest in the game can be greatly improved.

  As described above, according to the present example, in the effect in the fluctuation, an effect game for operating the upper plate effect button 257 is performed, and when the player performs the operation on the upper plate effect button 257, a notice object Since the effect mode changes when the change becomes the change, it is possible to enjoy various variations of the notice change effect, and it is possible to enhance interest in the game.

  Further, in the operation request effect displayed in FIG. 205B, when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, even if the result of the change is out, the out-of-design symbol is displayed. Since the change mode of the notice change effect changes in the stage of (D) based on the fact, it is possible to newly have a desire for the jackpot and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the image imitating the ladybird displayed in (C-2) is displayed again in (E-2), and the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is performed in the stage of (F). It is possible to make the player aware that the display mode of the notice variable effect has changed by the operation, and it is possible to remind the player of the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 that an effect with high reliability for the jackpot has been allocated. The interest in is improved.

Further, in the present example, the description has been made assuming that the effect of the notice change effect in the notice target change is changed without using the hold image, but the display color of the hold image of the notice target change performed after the change is changed. It is good also as composition.
Accordingly, even if the result of the change is out of order, if there is a change with a high degree of expectation that is higher than a certain level in the hold, if the upper stage effect button 257 is pressed down at the stage of (B), the change In response to the stop of the symbol change, the display color of the suspended image of the change having a high degree of expectation is changed. As a result, although once disappointed with the result of the change, a new expectation can be given to the change to be notified, so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.
Note that if the operation of pressing the upper plate effect button 257 is not performed at the stage (B), the display color of the suspended image of the notice target variation does not change. Even if there is, there is no change in the reserved color, so the player does not notice that the highly expected fluctuation is pending.

If the result of the change is a big hit, if the upper plate effect button 257 is depressed at the stage (B), the expectation is high in accordance with the stop of the design change of the change. The display color of the change pending image is changed. As a result, in addition to the joy that the change has become a jackpot, it is possible to give an expectation to the change to be notified, and it is possible to hope for a further improvement in the interest in the game.
Note that if the operation of pressing the upper plate effect button 257 is not performed at the stage (B), the display color of the suspended image of the notice target variation does not change. Even if there is, there is no change in the reserved color, so the player does not notice that the highly expected fluctuation is pending.

  This allows the player to feel an increase in the degree of expectation for the jackpot game by performing a pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257, and also to know the degree of expectation in the hold memory of the change. In particular, if the lottery result of the change is out of order, if there is a highly expected hold in the hold, even if the lottery result of the change is out of order and you are disappointed, you may have hope for further change Since it is possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, in the notice fluctuation effect in this example, the display mode of the fluctuation symbol has been described as being changed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the background image of the notification fluctuation effect may be changed, or the content of the effect game may be changed. , Or shifting to a so-called look-ahead zone, various effect modes can be selected.

  Further, in the present example, the change immediately before the notice target change is described as the change before the notice, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change two times before and three times before the notice target change may be notified. The pre-variation may be used and can be appropriately selected.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the special lottery result by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. You. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is limited to a maximum of four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is indicated by the function display unit 1400 and the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested under the direct control of the main control board. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display) indicates that a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off, blink for a predetermined time, and then are turned on. The special lottery result is indicated by the combination of the LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the central liquid crystal display device 1500, a special lottery result is suggested as an effect image by being indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board based on a control signal from the main control board. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is displayed in a state where each symbol row is fluctuated in a state where three symbol rows composed of a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed side by side in the left and right direction. The symbol columns are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbol columns are stopped and displayed such that the decorative symbols of the three symbol columns that are stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol rows are stopped and each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, or the like) according to the special lottery result is generated.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 (the fixed image in which the symbol row fluctuates) (The time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, according to the special lottery result selected, the front movable effect unit 2560 and the lower movable effect are displayed. The unit 2570, the back upper movable production unit 3100, the back lower front movable production unit 3200, the back right movable production unit 3300, the back left movable production unit 3400, the back lower rear movable production unit 3500, the back four corner movable production unit 3600, etc. The movable effect is appropriately used to perform the movable effect, and the player can be entertained even by the movable effect, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it becomes possible to accept a game ball to the upper winning prize opening 2006, the back right rotating decorative body 3310 of the back right movable effecting unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is rotated. When the third decorative surface 3310c is directed forward (front), the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guideway 2553 through which the game balls received at the upper winning prize opening 2006 circulates coincides with the back right ball entrance 3320. (See FIG. 175). In this state, when a game ball is received in the upper winning prize opening 2006, the ball enters the rear right ball entrance 3320 from the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear taxiway 2553, and is a ball guiding member arranged in the rear right rendering space 3321. Due to 3322, it flows down while rotating multiple times (here, eight times) around an axis extending vertically in the back right presentation space 3321 (see FIG. 175 (a)).

  As a result, the game balls received in the upper winning opening 2006 can be spirally flown down in the back right production space 3321, so that the player can surely recognize the gaming balls received in the upper winning opening 2006. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for paying out game balls by accepting the game balls into the upper winning prize opening 2006, and to entertain the player with the spirally flowing game balls. Can be suppressed. Further, since the ball guiding member 3322 is disposed adjacent to the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the game ball flows down the ball guiding member 3322 to a player who is paying attention to the effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Can be easily recognized. In this example, the sphere guiding member 3322 is arranged so as to be adjacent to the central liquid crystal display device 1500. However, a part or all of the sphere guiding member 3322 is arranged so as to overlap the central liquid crystal display device 1500. You may make it easy to recognize that the game ball is flowing down the guidance member 3322. Further, in this case, by forming the ball guiding member 3322 with a transparent member whose back portion can be visually recognized, it is possible to prevent the effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 from being visually recognized.

  When the upper winning award opening 2006 is in an open state, if the back right rotating decorative body 3310 faces the front except for the third decorative surface 3310c, the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guideway 2553 is connected to the first decorative surface 3310a. And the second decoration surface 3310b is closed by the outer peripheral surface, so that the game ball received in the upper winning prize opening 2006 enters the escape passage 2555 branched near the rear end of the rear taxiway 2553, and escapes. It is discharged downward through the passage 2555. Thus, when the upper winning a prize opening 2006 can be accepted, the production using the back right production space 3321 of the back right movable production unit 3300 or the production not using the back right production space 3321 is performed. And a variety of variations can be presented to the player for entertaining. In addition, even if the back right rotating decorative body 3310 cannot turn the third decorative surface 3310c forward for some reason, the game ball received in the upper winning a prize opening 2006 stays in the rear taxiway 2553. And the game can be continued without any problem.

[10. High-speed digestion of jackpot games]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, a predetermined number of rounds of the jackpot game can be completed in a shorter time than in a conventional gaming machine in which a special winning opening is arranged near the lower end of the gaming area 5a. The details will be described below.

  As described above, the ball launching device 680 hits the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a with a hitting strength equal to or higher than a predetermined driving strength, so that the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500 is formed. A game ball that has entered the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface contacts the stop portion 1006 and its momentum is weakened, and then enters the upper game space 2541 from the upper right entrance.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 176, the upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball, which abuts against the impact portion 1006 and is weakened, is rolled by the upper right entrance. The direction of movement is restricted, and it falls directly below.

  When the upper winning opening 2006 is opened, the upper end of the upper winning opening door member 2550 is made higher than the lower end, so that the gaming ball in contact with the upper winning opening door member 2550 can be raised with an extremely high probability. In addition to receiving the large winning opening door 2006, the upper winning opening door member 2550 is rotated so that the upper end of the upper winning opening door member 2550 is more rightward in front view than the upper right entrance.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since no obstacle nail is planted in the upper gaming space 2541, the gaming ball falling from the upper right entrance comes into contact with the upper winning award opening door member 2550 with extremely high probability. Therefore, with the upper winning opening 2006 opened, the game balls that have entered the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500 and dropped from the upper right entrance, are extremely With a high probability, it will be accepted in the Kamikatsu winning opening 2006.

  As described above, since the upper winning award opening 2006 is arranged near the upper right end of the gaming area 5a, the upper winning award opening 2006 is driven into the gaming area 5a more than a conventional gaming machine having a large winning opening arranged near the lower end of the gaming area 5a. The moving distance until the game ball received by the upper winning award opening 2006 becomes shorter, and the game ball that has entered the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500 is extremely moved. Since the ball is received in the upper winning opening 2006 with a high probability, the period from when the ball launching device 680 hits a gaming ball into the gaming area 5a to when the gaming ball is received in the upper winning opening 2006 can be shortened. As a result, a predetermined number of rounds of the jackpot game can be completed in a shorter time than in a conventional gaming machine in which a special winning port is arranged near the lower end of the gaming area 5a.

  In addition, a game ball hit by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength equal to or higher than a predetermined driving strength with the upper winning award opening 2006 positioned near the upper right end of the game area 5a is sent to the stop portion 1006. Since the ball is rolled along the inner side of the outer rail 1001 without hitting an obstacle such as an obstacle nail until it touches, the ball can enter the upper winning opening 2006, so that the hit game ball is always The ball rolls at a speed equal to or higher than a certain speed, and at least the period from when the ball launching device 680 hits the game ball into the game area 5a to when the game ball contacts the stop portion 1006 can be shortened. That is, the ball launching device 680 has a larger game area than a configuration in which it is possible to enter the upper winning prize opening 2006 when a game ball is hit with a hitting strength less than a predetermined hitting strength. It is possible to shorten the period from when a game ball is driven into 5a to when the game ball is received in the upper winning award 2006.

  In other words, when the upper winning award opening 2006 is arranged near the upper left end of the game area 5a and the ball is launched by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength less than a predetermined driving strength, the game ball is released. Compared to a case where the ball can enter the upper winning prize opening 2006, the upper winning prize opening 2006 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right end of the game area 5a and has a predetermined hitting strength or more by the ball firing device 680. Since the rolling speed of the game ball is increased by configuring the game ball to be able to enter the upper winning opening 2006 when the game ball is hit with the hitting strength of the ball launching device 680 Can shorten the period from when the game ball is hit into the game area 5a to when the game ball is accepted in the upper winning prize opening 2006, and the predetermined number of rounds of the jackpot game can be completed in a short time. .

  In addition, since the ball launching device 680 hits one game ball every 0.6 seconds, the time required to hit ten game balls, for example, is 6 seconds. In addition, as described above, the game ball hit by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength equal to or higher than the predetermined driving strength may contact an obstacle such as an obstacle nail until the game ball contacts the stop portion 1006. The ball is rolled along the inside of the outer rail 1001, and the ball is launched by the ball launching device 680 with a driving strength equal to or higher than a predetermined driving strength, and enters the game area 5a before winning the top prize. The period until it is accepted in the mouth 2006 is very short (about one second).

  That is, in one round of the jackpot game, the period from the opening of the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 in the open state until 10 gaming balls are received in the upper prize winning opening 2006 is about half that of the conventional gaming machine. The period is about 7 to 8 seconds, and the interval period between rounds (the period from when the upper winning opening 2006 is closed to when it is reopened) is shorter than the conventional gaming machine (about 2.0 seconds). Since it is about 0.6 seconds, a big hit game of 15 rounds ends in about 113.4 seconds to 128.4 seconds.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the period required for the big hit game can be shortened as compared with the conventional gaming machine, so that the pachinko machine 1 executes the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display per unit time. The number of times the variable display of the possible symbols (the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display) is performed (variable display count) It can be increased compared to a gaming machine, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed by increasing the chance of occurrence of a big hit. Further, since the execution period of the jackpot game executed by the conventional gaming machine can be reduced to about half, it is possible to interest the jackpot game itself, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the game ball received in the upper winning prize entrance 2006 enters the rear right ball entrance 3320 from the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear taxiway 2553, and the rear right production space. With the ball guiding member 3322 arranged in the 3321, the ball flows down while rotating multiple times (here, eight times) around the axis extending vertically in the back right presentation space 3321 (see FIG. 175 (a)). ). As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the game ball flowing down the ball guiding member 3322 can be viewed fragmentarily from the player. It takes about 2 seconds before the game ball flowing down the ball guide member 3322 is discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the lower right base 3303 and becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the player. As described above, the period from when the game ball is hit by the ball launching device 680 with a hitting strength equal to or higher than the predetermined hitting strength and enters the game area 5a until it is accepted into the upper winning award opening 2006 is 1 Since the time is about a second, during the period from when the game ball is shot by the ball launching device 680 to the time when the game ball is accepted into the upper winning prize opening 2006, after the game ball is accepted into the upper prize winning opening 2006, the lower right base 3303 Is shorter than the period from when the player is discharged from the discharge port 3303a and becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  As described above, not only the rolling of the game ball in the game area 5a to which the player pays attention, but also the game ball received in the upper winning opening 2006, which is not normally noted, is rolled and discharged in a complicated manner. By increasing the period of time until the game is focused, the player can be noticed, and the game ball which has been accepted into the upper winning a prize entrance 2006 and has become a so-called dead ball can be effectively used to suppress a decrease in the game interest. be able to. In addition, since the period from when the ball is launched by the ball launching device 680 to when it is accepted into the upper winning opening 2006 is short, the player has difficulty in visually recognizing the launched ball and the ball is smoothly driven. Although it may be uneasy whether the ball is being played, the game ball received in the upper winning opening 2006 is complicatedly rolled, and the period until the ball is ejected is extended, so that the driving of the game ball proceeds smoothly. The player can be made aware of what is being done and can be reassured. In addition, the period from when the game ball is driven by the ball launching device 680 to the time when the game ball is received in the upper winning prize opening 2006 is equal to the discharge opening 3303 a of the lower right bottom base 3303 after the game ball is received in the upper winning prize opening 2006. By making the time shorter than the period until the player becomes difficult to see from the player, the player's attention can be directed to the game ball accepted by the upper winning opening 2006.

[11. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game state is changed by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a, the back-up drive motor of the back-up movable effect unit 3100 according to the changed game state. 3103 rotates. When the back upper drive motor 3103 rotates, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 attached to the unit base 3101 rotate together with the back upper drive motor 3103. When the first transmission member 3107 rotates and enters the first specific rotation range from one end of the first specific rotation range, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first transmitted member 3117. As a result, the first transmitted member 3117 rotates. When the first transmitted member 3117 rotates, the first movable base 3116 extends from the base end, which is one of both ends of the first movable range extending in a direction parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100, to the distal end side. In other words, it slides from the uppermost retracted position to the lower first appearance position. Since the upper decorative body 3152 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the upper decorative body 3152 moves downward as the first movable base 3116 slides. Becomes Thereafter, the first transmission member 3107 rotates to reach the range end on the opposite side of the first specific rotation range, and at the same time, the first movable base 3116 reaches the tip on the opposite side of the first movable range, that is, the descending end. When the first transmission member 3107 further moves away from the first specific rotation range, the first movable base 3116 stops moving at the lower end. Note that while the first transmission member 3107 is rotating, the second transmission member 3108 is rotating, but since the second transmission member 3108 is not within the second specific rotation range, the second transmission member 3108 is not rotating. Accordingly, the second movable base 3119 is not slid relative to the first movable base 3116.

  A second movable base drive member 3124 to which rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116. Since the second movable base driving member 3124 is slidably attached to the rotating link member 3123 in the direction in which the second transmission guide portion 3123d extends (second direction), when the first movable base 3116 slides, The rotating link member 3123 and the second movable base driving member 3124 rotate so that the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, and the second movable base driving member 3124 is moved to the rotating link member 3123. On the other hand, it slides relatively in the second direction. At this time, when the second movable base driving member 3124 rotates, the second movable base 3119 slides with respect to the first movable base 3116 by an amount corresponding to the rotation of the second movable base driving member 3124, and the back upper decorative body 3152 moves. The second movable base 3119 slightly moves in the moving direction. However, when the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotation of the second movable base driving member 3124 stops, and the first movable base 3124 stops rotating. The movement of the back decoration 3152 with respect to the movable base 3116 also stops. Since the moving direction of the second movable base 3119 is the same vertical direction as the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, even if the second movable base 3119 slides slightly by the rotation of the second movable base driving member 3124, The player is not noticed, and the back upper decorative body 3152 can be moved without a sense of incongruity. In the initial state, when the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotation link member 3123 and the second movable base driving member 3124 do not rotate, and the second movable base 3124 does not rotate. 3119 does not slide relatively.

  Subsequently, the rotation of the back upper drive motor 3103 moves the first transmission member 3107 out of the first specific rotation range, further rotates the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108, and causes the second transmission member 3108 to rotate. When entering the second specific rotation range from one end of the second specific rotation range, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmission member 3122, and the second transmission member 3122 starts rotating. I do. When the second transmitted member 3122 rotates, the rotation link member 3123 is moved to the second transmitted member 3122 via a portion slidably mounted in the direction in which the first transmission guide portion 3122e extends (first direction). Will revolve around. As the rotary link member 3123 revolves, the extending direction in the second direction is about to rotate. Then, when the direction of the second direction (rotational link member 3123) is about to rotate, the rotation link is set so that the reaction force from the portion where the second movable base driving member 3124 is slidably mounted in the second direction is reduced. While the member 3123 slides along the first direction and the second direction, the second movable base driving member 3124 is rotated, and the rotation from the second transmitting member 3108 is transmitted to the second transmitted member 3122 and the rotation link. It can be transmitted to the second movable base drive member 3124 via the member 3123.

When the rotation is transmitted to the second movable base driving member 3124, the second movable base 3119 is moved relative to the first movable base 3116 from a base end (upper end) which is one of both ends of the second movable range. The first movable base 3116 slides in the same downward direction as the moving direction of the first movable base 3116 toward the opposite end (lower end). Accordingly, the upper back decoration 3152 attached to the second movable base 3119 also moves downward together with the second movable base 3119.
Thereafter, the second transmission member 3108 rotates to reach the end of the range opposite to the second specific rotation range, and at the same time, the second movable base 3119 moves to the tip (second appearance position) on the opposite side of the second movable range. When the second transmission member 3108 reaches the position and further moves away from the second specific rotation range, the second movable base 3119 stops moving at the tip of the second movable range.

  When the second movable base 3119 slides with respect to the first movable base 3116, the decorative body rotating gear 3120 rotatably attached to the second movable base 3119 is mounted on the rack attached to the first movable base 3116. The member 3115 moves while rotating along the rack gear 3115a. And since the back upper decoration body 3152 is attached to the decoration body rotating gear 3120, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back upper decoration body 3152 rotates and moves downward together with the second movable base 3119. Becomes

  In this state, by rotating the back upper drive motor 3103 in the reverse direction, the second movable base 3119 and the first movable base 3116, that is, the back upper decorative body 3152 are moved in the opposite direction to the above, and Can be returned to.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 can be separately moved, a movement of moving the upper back decoration 3152 in two steps is given. This makes it possible to make the back decoration 3152 move in a complicated manner. Also, as the movable effect of the back upper decorative body 3152, by moving only the first movable base 3116, or by moving the second movable base 3119 after the first movable base 3116 is moved, the pattern of the movable effect can be varied. Therefore, the movable effect of the back upper decorative body 3152 can be made hard to get tired, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back upper decorative body 3152 moves downward together with the second movable base 3119 while rotating, so that more various movements can be given to the upper back decorative body 3152. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are slid in the same vertical direction, and the back decoration 3152 can be moved a longer distance in the same direction. The impact of the movable performance by 3152 can be increased, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the rotation from the first transmission member 3107 is first transmitted to the first transmission member 3117, and then the first movable base 3116 is moved by the first transmission member 3117. The circumference of the first specific rotation range of the member 3107 can be amplified by the first transmitted member 3117, and the first movable range from the retracted position of the first movable base 3116 to the first appearance position can be made larger. It is possible to entertain the player with the back upper decorative body 3152 that moves greatly, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the back upper decorative body 3152 can be made to move complicatedly by only one back upper drive motor 3103, for example, the first movable base 3116 may be provided with another drive motor for moving the second movable base 3119. The number of drive motors can be reduced as compared to the case where it is possible to reduce the load related to the control of the movable effect, and the first movable base 3116 does not need to include a drive motor. The load (weight) acting on one movable base 3116 can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to provide the first movable base 3116 with a drive motor for the second movable base 3119, it is possible to make the back upper decorative body 3152 larger (heavier) by the weight of the drive motor, which is large. The complicated movement of the back decoration 3152 can increase the impact on the player, and the large back decoration 3152 performs a two-step complicated movement to the player. It can be made to think that there is a good thing, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

[Moving timing of movable characters]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to perform an effect of movably controlling various decorative bodies (hereinafter, referred to as movable auditory objects) that are movably controlled by the peripheral control MPU by operating the upper plate effect button 257. It has become. Hereinafter, this will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  When the player operates the handle unit 500 and the game ball is driven into the game area 5a, and the game ball flowing down the game area 5a enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the above-described main operation is performed. On the control board, a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change”, “time shortening”, etc.) A lottery and determination of a time (fluctuation time (for example, 5 to 360 seconds)) which suggests the lottery result to the player are performed, and the results are used as a judgment result notification command and a fluctuation pattern command. The configuration is such that the peripheral control MPU performs the variable effect using the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and the movable role based on the commands output to the substrate.

  In the variation effect according to the present embodiment, after performing an operation request effect of pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the player presses the upper plate effect button 257 in response to the operation request effect, thereby responding to the operation. By moving the movable auditorium in various modes, the player feels as if he or she is participating in the game, which enhances the interest in the game (hereinafter referred to as a participation-type movable auditorium effect).

  In the participatory movable role production of this example, the description will be made by taking the upper movable production unit 3100 as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front movable production unit 2560, the front and lower movable production unit 2570, the back The participatory movable role production is performed by appropriately using the lower front movable production unit 3200, the back right movable production unit 3300, the back left movable production unit 3400, the back lower movable production unit 3500, the back four corner movable production unit 3600, and the like. You may do it.

Next, the participatory movable auditory character effects will be described with reference to FIGS.
The movable pattern of the back upper movable rendering unit 3100 in the participatory movable role production includes an immediate movable pattern described later, a movable pattern after one second, and a movable pattern after two seconds. FIG. 192 is a time chart in the case where the immediate movable pattern is selected from the movable patterns of the back upper movable rendering unit 3100. FIG. 192 shows that the movable pattern of the upper upper movable rendering unit 3100 in the participatory movable role production is FIG. 193 is a time chart in a case where a movable pattern after one second described later is selected. FIG. 193 shows that a movable pattern after two seconds is selected from the movable patterns of the back upper movable production unit 3100 in the participatory movable role production. It is a time chart in a case. FIG. 194 is a movable timing table showing a pattern of timing at which the rear upper movable effect unit 3100 moves.
The time chart of FIG. 191 shows the respective timings of (A) the operation valid period, (B) the operation request effect, (C) the detection of the upper plate effect button operation, and (D) the immediate movable pattern. 193 shows the respective timings of (A) the operation valid period, (B) the operation request effect, (C) the detection of the upper plate effect button operation, and (E) the movable pattern after one second. The timing chart of (A) shows the operation validity period, (B) the operation request effect, (C) the detection of the operation of the upper stage effect button, and (F) the timing of the movable pattern after 2 seconds.

  In the case of the participatory movable auditorium production, the variable production is started, and as shown in FIG. 3A, the time from when the operation on the upper plate production button 257 becomes valid to when it becomes invalid is set in advance as appropriate. As shown in (B), performing an effect (operation request effect) for requesting the player to operate the upper plate effect button 257 using the notification means such as the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and various speakers. Thus, it is configured to notify that the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is effective. Then, in response to the operation request effect, as shown in (C), when the player presses the upper plate effect button 257, the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is movably controlled. After the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, the operation validity period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are completed, and the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is movable. As shown in (D), the instant production button 257 is immediately pressed to immediately control the movement of the rear upper movable production unit 3100. The instant production pattern shown in (E) is depressed. Then, one second later, the movable control of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is performed. One second later movable pattern, as shown in FIG. There is a movable pattern or the like two seconds after the movable control is performed.

When the immediate movable pattern is selected, as shown in FIG. 191, when the operation validity period of (A) and the operation request production of (B) are on, the upper plate production button 257 is pressed by the player. When the pressing operation is performed, the operation validity period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and then the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is movably controlled.
When the movable pattern is selected after one second, as shown in FIG. 192, when the operation validity period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, the player can set the upper plate. When the effect button 257 is pressed, the operation validity period and the operation request effect are turned off when the operation is detected, and the back upper movable effect unit 1 second after the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 is detected. 3100 is movably controlled.
When the movable pattern after 2 seconds is selected, as shown in FIG. 193, when the operation valid period of (A) and the operation requesting effect of (B) are in the on state, the upper plate is set by the player. When the effect button 257 is pressed, the operation validity period and the operation request effect are turned off in response to the detection of the operation, and the back upper movable effect unit 2 seconds after the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 is detected. 3100 is movably controlled.
Thus, the timing at which the upper movable effect unit 3100 moves after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed differs depending on which movable pattern is selected. The feeling of throbbing obtained by not knowing whether or not to be controlled is increased, and it is possible to increase the impact in the participation-type movable auditorium production.

  In addition, in the participatory movable role production, even though an operation request production requesting the player to operate the upper production production button 257 is performed in the operation requirement production, the pressing operation on the upper production production button 257 is performed. If the button is not pressed during the operable period for accepting, or if the immediate movable pattern has been selected, the movable upper unit 3100 is controlled to move immediately after the operation valid period ends, and the movable pattern Has been selected, the upper movable effect unit 3100 is movably controlled one second after the operation valid period ends, and two seconds after the operation valid period ends if the movable pattern is selected two seconds later. The movable upper stage effect unit 3100 is controlled to be movable, but is not limited to this. At an appropriate timing after the operable period ends, the upper movable stage unit 3100 is controlled. The Tsu door 3100 may be allowed to move. Alternatively, the upper movable effect unit 3100 may not be moved.

  In addition, the peripheral control board includes a means for determining the timing at which the back upper movable rendering unit 3100 moves in the participatory movable role production, for determining a timing at which the back upper movable rendering unit 3100 moves. A random number and a movable timing table are prepared in advance, and the production mode of the participatory movable auditory character production is determined based on the random number for timing determination and the movable timing table. Then, in accordance with the special lottery result selected by the main control board, the effect pattern determined by the peripheral control MPU is movably controlled by the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 by the operation of the player. In the case of an effect, after the effect is determined, the movable timing of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is determined from the timing determining random number extracted by the timing determining random number extracting means and the movable timing table. It is.

  Next, the timing determination random numbers will be described with reference to FIG. The random number for timing determination in this example is set so as to determine which participatory movable auditory character effect to execute. For example, 100 kinds of variable random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 99) indicating that any of the participating movable character effects is performed, and 60 kinds of variable random numbers out of the variable random numbers are displayed on the upper plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate movable pattern in which the movable control of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is performed at an instant timing is performed (0 to 59), and 25 kinds of variable random numbers are produced. After the pressing operation on the button 257, it is set as a determination value indicating that a movable pattern is to be executed one second after the movable control of the upper back movable effect unit 3100 is performed at a timing one second later (60 to 84). The variable random number is movable two seconds after the movable control of the upper movable effect unit 3100 is performed at a timing two seconds after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257. It is set as a determination value indicating performing a turn (85 to 99).

  In addition, in the participatory movable role production, the timing for determining the movable timing of the rear upper movable production unit 3100 after pressing the upper plate production button 257 is after the production is determined by the peripheral control MPU. For example, the effect pattern determined by the peripheral control MPU according to the special lottery result drawn by the main control board may be changed by the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 by the operation of the player, and the back upper movable effect unit 3100 Is an effect that is movably controlled, the effect is determined, and in response to an operation request effect that instructs the player to press the upper plate effect button 257 on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 or the like, When the user presses the upper plate effect button 257, the timing determination random number extracting means extracts the timing determination random number. , It may be determined movable timing of the back on a movable direction unit 3100.

  In the change timing pattern of the notice suspension image, in this example, the probability that the immediate change pattern is selected is 50%, the probability that the change pattern after 1 second is selected is 30%, and the probability that the change pattern after 2 seconds is selected Is 20%, but is not limited to this, and the probability that each movable pattern is selected may be changed as appropriate.

[Variation of participatory movable role production]
In addition, as a variation of the participatory movable role production, the timing at which the back upper movable production unit 3100 is movably controlled after the upper plate production button 257 is pressed is determined until the position where the movable control is actually performed is seen. The player does not know, and the variable display in the lottery result in which the participatory movable character effect is selected is started, and when the upper plate effect button is pressed during the effective operation period, the player can move upside down with respect to the player After suggesting that the rendering unit 3100 does not move, the rear upper movable rendering unit 3100 may be movably controlled at a time difference. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 195 shows a flow of an effect in which a movable pattern notice is performed when a movable character effect is selected after one second in the participatory movable character effect. A state where suggestion of a special lottery result that has been drawn earlier is performed is shown, (B) shows a state in which a participatory movable auditorium effect is performed, and (C) shows an operation requesting effect. (D) shows a state of less than one second after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, and (E) shows a state after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. This shows a state in which seconds have elapsed, and the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is exposed in front of the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

For example, if the movable pattern is selected after one second, the special lottery result in which the participatory movable auditory performance is selected is not indicated until the suggestion of the previously selected special lottery result is completed. The start is suspended, and the suspension display is performed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Here, the normal hold display is H1, and the hold display of the participatory movable auditory character effect is H2.
The suggestion of the result of the special lottery of H2 is started, an image imitating the upper plate effect button 257 is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and an image “PUSH !!” is displayed below the image, and an operation request for urging a pressing operation is displayed. Direction is performed. When an operation is performed on upper plate effect button 257 in response to the operation request effect, a message image “Sorry!” Is displayed on central liquid crystal display device 1500. The player sees this, and the hope that the movable upper unit 3100 is movable is cut off, and although disappointed for a while, the movable upper stage production button 257 is operated one second after the operation is performed on the upper plate production button 257. The unit 3100 rotates and is exposed so as to cover the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

  As described above, after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, it is once suggested to the player that the upper movable effect unit 3100 does not move, and then the upper movable effect unit 3100 is movably controlled with a time difference. Thus, although disappointed once, the interest can be improved again, the game can be thrilled, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, during the game, the movable pattern of the back upper movable production unit 3100 in the last participatory movable auditory production performed is an immediate movable pattern, and then the back movable of the participation movable movable director production drawn next. When the movable pattern of the effect unit 3100 is also the immediate movable pattern, the player cannot notice that a plurality of types of movable patterns of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 are prepared, and presses the upper plate effect button 257. Since the movable pattern after pressing is considered to be a one pattern, there is a possibility that the impact of the movement of the movable unit 3100 on the back side is not felt and the interest in the game is reduced, so in the present example, A movable pattern different from the movable pattern in the participatory movable auditory performance performed in the above is selected.

  Also, for example, if the immediate movable pattern is selected as the movable pattern in the last participation-based movable role production, the next movable pattern selected is either the movable pattern after 1 second or the movable pattern after 2 seconds. If the movable pattern is selected after one second, either the immediate movable pattern or the movable pattern after two seconds is selected as the next movable pattern to be selected. When the movable pattern after 2 seconds has been selected, the next selected movable pattern is the immediate movable pattern or the movable pattern after 1 second. Thereby, since a movable pattern different from the previously selected movable pattern is selected, it is possible to prevent the same movable pattern from being seen continuously, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. it can.

  Further, after performing the gaseous effect, the back upper movable effect unit 3100 may be movably controlled. For example, when the movable pattern is selected after 2 seconds, the upper movable effect unit 3100 is temporarily vibrated immediately after pressing the upper stage effect button 257 in response to the operation request effect. The player looks at the rear upper movable rendering unit 3100 that is not displayed in front of the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and illusions that the rear upper movable rendering unit 3100 is not movable while assuming that it is movable. Although disappointed, the rear upper movable effect unit 3100 is moved two seconds after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment again and enhance the excitement of the game.

  If, for example, a movable pattern is selected after 2 seconds as one pattern of the gaseous production, the back upper movable production unit 3100 is temporarily vibrated immediately after the upper plate production button 257 is pressed in response to the operation request production. After that, the lower right effect unit 270 may be movably controlled. By temporarily vibrating the back upper movable production unit 3100, the player thinks that the back upper movable production unit 3100 is movable, but two seconds after the upper plate production button 257 is pressed, the door lower right production unit. 270 is movably controlled. Thereby, since the movable role that is different from the player's expectation is controlled to move, the player can be surprised and the interest in the participatory movable role production can be enhanced.

  In the above description of the present example, in the participatory movable role production, if the upper plate production button 257 is pressed during the operation valid period, the back upper movable production unit 3100 is movable according to the selected movable pattern. Although it is controlled, it does not necessarily control the movement. For example, if a production game executed as a participatory movable character production succeeds, the back upper movable production unit 3100 is movably controlled and conversely fails. In this case, the back upper movable effect unit 3100 may not be movable. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 196 is a diagram showing a time chart when the effect game is successful, and FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a time chart when the effect game is failed.

For example, as a participatory movable role effect, when the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), and a successful effect game is executed by the peripheral control board, as shown in FIG. When the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 by the player is detected ten times as shown in (C) during the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B), the effect game is performed. Is successful, the operation validity period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are completed, and the upper movable effect unit 3100 moves as shown in (D).
Further, as shown in FIG. 197, when the operation valid period of (A) and the operation request effect of (B) are in the on state, if the operation on the upper plate effect button 257 is less than ten times, The upper movable effect unit 3100 is not movable.

  In the participatory movable role production, in this example, the probability that the immediate movable pattern is selected is 60%, the probability that the movable pattern is selected after one second is 25%, and the probability that the movable pattern is selected after two seconds is the probability. Although it is 15%, it is not limited to this, and the probability that each movable pattern is selected may be changed as appropriate.

  In the present example, up to here, as a production in which the player can participate, after the operating means (here, the upper plate production button 257) is operated by the player, the movable role (here, the upper movable production unit 3100) is movable. By preparing a plurality of types of controlled timing, the timing at which the movable role related to the pressing of the operating means is movably controlled is not constant, and the feeling of throbbing obtained by not knowing when to control the movability is increased. Although the description has been given of the participatory movable role production that can enhance the impact in the performance, not only the performance using the movable role but also the production mode after the player performs an operation on the operation means. If the switching timing is limited to an effect in which a plurality of types are prepared, in addition to an effect of a player participation type using the central liquid crystal display device 1500 together, Central may be a director of player participation type carried out in only the liquid crystal display device 1500.

  Note that, in this example, an example is shown in which an operating means capable of performing a pressing operation such as the upper plate effect button 257 is used for the participatory movable auditorium effect, but the operating unit is limited to the upper plate effect button 257. Instead, a touch panel 246 that can perform a contact operation, a stick-type operation unit that allows a player to perform a tilt operation, an operation unit such as a rotary selector that allows a player to perform a rotation operation, and the like are appropriately used. You may do it.

[Second embodiment at movable timing of movable character]
The participatory movable role production in the present embodiment is configured to change the lottery ratio of the movable pattern in the back upper movable production unit 3100 according to the number of rounds when an advantageous game state (for example, a big hit) is drawn by the main control board. And This will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 198 is a movable timing table showing a pattern of timing at which the back upper movable effect unit 3100 moves for each number of rounds when a jackpot is selected by lot. (A) is a movable timing table that is selected when a 15-round big hit is drawn, (b) is a movable timing table that is selected when an 8-round big hit is drawn, and (c) is 2 It is a movable timing table selected when a round big hit is drawn.

  When a 15-round big hit is drawn by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), 80 kinds of variable random numbers are immediately displayed after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257, as shown in FIG. It is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate movable pattern in which the movable control of the movable effect unit 3100 is controlled is executed (0 to 79), and 10 kinds of variable random numbers are generated one second after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that the movable pattern is to be executed one second after the movable control of the rear upper movable effect unit 3100 is performed at the timing of (80 to 89). It indicates that a movable pattern is to be executed two seconds later, in which the movable control of the back upper movable staging unit 3100 is performed at a timing two seconds after the pressing operation. It is set as the value (90 to 99).

  When an eight round big hit is selected by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), ten kinds of variable random numbers out of the variable random numbers are immediately displayed after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257. It is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate movable pattern in which the movable control of the movable effect unit 3100 is controlled is executed (0 to 9), and 80 kinds of variable random numbers are one second after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that the movable pattern is to be executed one second after the movable control of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is performed at the timing of (10 to 89), and 10 kinds of variable random numbers are transmitted to the upper plate effect button 257. A determination indicating that the movable pattern is to be executed two seconds later, in which the movable control of the upper back movable effect unit 3100 is performed at a timing two seconds after the pressing operation. Is set as (90 to 99).

  When two rounds of big hits are drawn by the main control board, as shown in FIG. 198 (c), ten kinds of variable random numbers out of the variable random numbers are immediately displayed after the pressing operation on the upper plate effect button 257. It is set as a determination value indicating that an immediate movable pattern in which the movable control of the movable control unit 3100 is controlled is executed (0 to 9), and 10 kinds of variable random numbers are generated one second after the pressing operation on the upper plate control button 257. Is set as a determination value indicating that the movable pattern is to be executed one second after the movable control of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is performed at the timing of (10 to 19), and 80 kinds of variable random numbers are transmitted to the upper plate effect button 257. A determination indicating that the movable pattern is to be executed two seconds later, in which the movable control of the upper back movable effect unit 3100 is performed at a timing two seconds after the pressing operation. It is set as (20-99).

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above, the number of rounds related to the jackpot can be predicted to some extent by the movable pattern of the upper movable effect unit 3100 after the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed. For example, immediately after pressing the upper plate effect button 257, if the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is moved, the player recalls that the 15 round big hit comes with a high probability, and also presses the upper plate effect button 257. After 2 seconds, if the upper movable effect unit 3100 immediately moves, the player recalls that a two-round big hit comes with a high probability. Thereby, the player can be delighted by the movable pattern of the back upper movable effect unit 3100, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 257 Upper plate effect button 341 Upper shaft gear 342 Rear gear 343 Drive motor 344 Rotating shaft 348 Receiving part 349 Receiving part 351 Upper overhanging panel 351a Upper overhanging Upper surface portion 352 Upper display device 353 Upper decoration member 354 Upper first speaker 355 Upper second speaker 356 Upper third speaker 358 Upper overhanging cover portion 371 Upper right gear box 372 Upper left gear box 373 Cam member 374 Upper front gear 375 Upper rear Gear 376 Upper drive motor 377 Sliding concave portion 378 Sliding convex portion 379 Side concave portion 382 Upper gear box 383 Front gear 384 Rear gear 385 Drive motor 398 Left rotating shaft 399 Right rotating shaft 390 Left movable seat 391 Right movable seat 392 Rotational movement mechanism 393 Step gear 394 Middle gear 395 Lower gear 396 Cover member 397 Sheet stopper piece 472 Gear box 473 Gear box base 474 First gear 475 Second gear 476 Third gear 477 Motor 478 Rotation shaft 479 Rotation base 481 Reciprocal movement mechanism 482 Left pinion 483 Right pinion 484 Drive gear 485 Left rack gear 486 Right rack gear 487 Pinion shaft 488 Pinion shaft 489 Drive shaft 490 Left overhanging panel 490a Left outside window 490b Left inside window 491 Right overhang panel 491a Right outside window 491b Right inside Window portion 495 Left overhang display device 496 Right overhang display device 501 Right overhang mechanism 503 Belt movable section 510 Belt mechanism 511 Frame member 511a Left wall 511b Right wall 511c Rear wall 512 Toothed belt 513 Upper bell Gear 514 lower belt gears 515 connecting fitting 516 belt drive motor 517 screws 518 slide recesses 519 slide recess 1
257 Upper plate effect button 1000 Front component 1100 Gaming panel 1500 Central liquid crystal display 2002 First start port 2004 Second start port 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3100 Back movable effect unit 3101 Unit base 3103 Back drive motor (Drive motor)
3104 Drive gear 3105 First driven gear 3106 Second driven gear 3107 First transmission member 3107a First transmission gear 3107b First transmission pin 3107c First lock projection 3107d All cutout 3108 Second transmission member 3108a Second transmission gear 3108b 2nd transmission pin 3108c 2nd lock projection 3108d 2nd notch 3115 rack member 3115a rack gear (decorative body rack gear)
3116 first movable base 3117 first transmitted member 3117a first substrate portion 3117b first working pin 3117c first transmitted main body portion 3117d first transmission slit 3117e first locking recess 3119 second movable base 3120 decorative body rotating gear 3122 Second transmitted member 3122a Second substrate portion 3122b Second transmitted main body portion 3122c Second transmitted slit 3122d Second locked concave portion 3122e First transmission guide portion 3123 Rotary link member 3123a Link main body portion 3123b First transmitted guide portion 3123d Second Transmission guide portion 3124 Second movable base drive member 3124a Second working pin 3124b Drive body portion 3124c Second transmitted guide portion 3125 Shaft member 3150 Decorative body unit on the back (decorative body)
3151 Decorative body base 3152 Decorative body on the back (decorative body)

Claims (2)

A gaming machine comprising an outer frame and a main body frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, wherein a game is played using a game medium,
The outer frame is
A lower member that is provided at a lower portion and includes a curtain plate on which the main body frame is mounted in a state where the main body frame is closed with respect to an outer frame;
A hinge member provided on the left side of the outer frame and supporting the body frame so as to be openable and closable,
At least
A first standing wall portion that is provided horizontally at a position retracted rearward from a front end of the outer frame on a side where the hinge member is provided ;
A second standing wall portion which is provided on the upper side of the curtain plate at a position on the right side and the front side of the first standing wall portion to prevent foreign matter from entering from the front of the gaming machine;
A game ball discharge region formed before the first standing wall portion and behind the second standing wall portion and for discharging a game ball to a rear surface side of the curtain plate ;
Bei to give a,
The upper end of the first standing wall portion is higher than the upper end of the second standing wall portion ,
The lateral width of the game ball discharge area is formed smaller than the lateral width of the hinge member,
On the side of the game ball discharge area, a flat plate portion capable of receiving a game ball rolling from the front when the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame is provided,
The game ball is configured to be guided along the first standing wall portion from the flat plate portion to the game ball discharge region,
The first standing wall portion is separated by at least one game ball from a rear end of a lower end of the main frame when the main frame is closed so as not to hinder the closing of the main frame by the game balls received by the flat plate portion. exhibited form behind rises upward,
A gaming machine, wherein the game ball discharge area is not entirely closed by the lower surface of the main frame when the main frame is closed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first standing wall portion has a bent portion that is bent in the front-rear direction in the middle of the horizontal direction.